Flares Im

COPYRIGHT
The copyright in this manual and its accompanying software are the property of Softbits
Consultants Ltd with all rights reserved. Both this manual and the software have been
provided pursuant to a License Agreement containing restrictions on use.
Softbits Consultants Ltd reserves the right to make changes to this manual or its
accompanying software without obligation to notify any person or organisation.
No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any other language in any form or by any means, or disclosed to
third parties without the prior written consent of Softbits Consultants Ltd.
WARRANTY
Softbits Consultants Ltd or its agents will replace any defective manual, program disks
within 90 days of purchase of the product providing that proof of purchase is evident.
Neither Softbits Consultants Ltd nor its agents or dealers make any warranty, implied or
otherwise, with respect to the software or results generated by the software.
This program is intended for use by a qualified engineer to aid the design and analysis of
flare systems. The results calculated by this program may not be reliable if the input data
has not been appropriately specified or if the program is used without regard to its
documented limitations.
It is the responsibility of the user to interpret the results generated by this program. Softbits
Consultants Ltd shall bear no liability for special, indirect, incidental, consequential,
exemplary or punitive damages arising from use of this software.
The governing law of this warranty shall be that of England.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Softbits Consultants Ltd would like to thank Mr. John F. Straitz III and the National Airoil
Company and GBA Ltd of Slough for assistance with some algorithms within the software.
Windows XP, Vista and Windows 7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Copyright Softbits Consultants Ltd, 1989, 1990, 2002, 2006, 2008, 2010, 2013
Table of Contents
1 Introduction.................................................. 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Program Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Documentation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
2 Getting Started............................................. 2-1

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Offshore Flare Stack Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Onshore Flare Stack Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Using Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Using Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Case Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Gas Dispersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
KO Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
3 Interface........................................................ 3-1
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Multiple Case Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Tool Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Log Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
File Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
About View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Radiation Limits View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Flaresim Update View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
4 General Setup .............................................. 4-1

4.1
4.2
Case Navigator View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Case Summary View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
1
4.3
4.4
4.5
Setup Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Component Management View . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
5 Fluids ............................................................ 5-1

5.1
5.2
Fluid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Assist Fluid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
6 Environment................................................. 6-1
6.1
6.2
Environment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Environment Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
7 Stacks ........................................................... 7-1

7.1
7.2
Stack View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Stack Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
8 Tips ............................................................... 8-1

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
Tip View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Tip Dynamic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Size Tip View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Tip Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
9 Receptors ..................................................... 9-1

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
Receptor Point View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Receptor Point Dynamics View . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Receptor Point Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Receptor Grid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
10 Shields........................................................ 10-1
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
2
Shield View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Rectangle Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Polygon Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Pit / Hut Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Transform View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
11 Dispersion .................................................. 11-1

11.1
11.2
Dispersion View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Implementation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
12 Overlays And Isopleths............................. 12-1

12.1
12.2
12.3
Overlay View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Isopleth Customise View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
13 KO Drums................................................... 13-1
13.1
13.2
KO Drum View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

KO Drum Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
14 Case Studies .............................................. 14-1

14.1
14.2
Case Study View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Select Variable View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
15 Calculations ............................................... 15-1

15.1
15.2
Calculation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

Calculation Options View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
16 Printing ....................................................... 16-1

16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
Report View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

Output Graphic Report View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Select Graphic Report Printer . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Graphic Report Page Settings. . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
17 Calculation Methods ................................. 17-1

17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
Thermal Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4

Surface Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-21
Purge Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-28
Water Sprays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-31
Gas Dispersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-33
3
17.7
17.8
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-36
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-38
A Graphic Report Layout............................... A-1

A.1
A.2
Introduction to XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Layout File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Introduction
1-1
1 Introduction
Page
1.1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2
Program Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.3
Flaresim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Object Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Running a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Documentation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1-1
1-2
1-2
Introduction
1-3
Flaresim is a computer program designed to assist professional

engineers in the design and evaluation of flare systems. The program
calculates the thermal radiation and noise generated by flares and
estimates the temperatures of exposed surfaces. It also performs
dispersion analysis of the combustion gases or relieved fluid in
flame out conditions.
Flaresim provides a user friendly interface with program actions
accessed by menu and toolbar options. Data entry is through a series
of data views controlled from an overall Case Navigator view.
Context sensitive help is available at all points to assist the user in
the use of the program and selection of appropriate design
parameters.
Output from the Flaresim is highly customisable with the user
having the freedom to select summary or detailed output. The
reports also include graphical output where appropriate.
Experienced flare system engineers should read the remainder of
this chapter for an overview of the way that Flaresim performs
calculations. They may then find that they will be able to use the
program with assistance from the help system without further
reference to the manual. However we would advise study of the
manual to become familiar with the full range of options and
recommendations for using the program.
Engineers new to flare system design should work through the
examples in the Getting Started section of the manual after first
reading this chapter. The examples provide a step by step guide to
using Flaresim for flare system design and highlight some of the
critical parameters that must be determined.
1-3
1-4
Features
1.1 Features
The following features highlight the main capabilities of Flaresim.
Equally applicable to the design of flare systems for offshore
platforms, gas plants, refineries and chemical plants.
Data may be entered and reported in the users choice of units
and may be converted at any time.
Correlations are available for modelling a range of flare tips
including sonic tips, pipeflare tips and steam or air assisted tips.
For assisted flares the quantity of steam or air required for
smokeless operation can be calculated.
A number of correlations are provided to predict the fraction of
heat radiated from flames of a range of hydrocarbon fluids with
different types of flare tip.
Liquid flaring systems can be handled.
A wide range of algorithms for calculation of thermal radiation.
These include integrated multipoint methods and the Chamberlain (Shell) method in addition to the Hajek/Ludwig and
Brzustowski/Sommer methods which are described in the API
guidelines for flare system design.
Full three dimensional flame shape analysis with complete flexibility in specification of the location and orientation of multiple
stacks.
Thermodynamic flash routines from NIST to calculate change in
fluid properties with pressure.
Dynamic calculation option to evaluate results as flare flows
vary with time.
1-4
Introduction
1-5
Case study manager to allow multiple comparitive results to be

generated within a single Flaresim model.
Calculation of combustion gas composition.
Calculation of purge gas flows required for tips.
Jet dispersion model to analyse flammable gas concentrations
close to flare in flame out conditions.
Gaussian dispersion model to analyse longer distance dispersion
of the relieving fluid or combustion gases.
A range of options for defining and analysing the noise spectrum
generated by flare systems including user defined spectra.
Ability to define multiple environmental scenarios to allow rapid
evaluation of flare system performance under different wind
speeds and directions.
Multiple stacks/booms each accomodating multiple flare tips.
Calculation of radiation, noise spectrum and surface temperatures at multiple receptor points.
Calculation of radiation variation with wind direction and speed
at a point and display of results on a wind rose chart.
Ability to define multiple receptor grids in multiple planes for
calculation of radiation, noise or surface temperatures.
Plotting of grid results as isopleth contours for sterile area
definition.
Receptor point characteristics for calculating surface temperatures include mass, absorbtivity, emissivity, area, specific heat,
orientation and initial temperature.
1-5
1-6
Features
Option to define local environmental conditions at receptor

points for calculating temperatures.
Sizing and rating of knock out drums.
Modelling of water curtains or solid shields to reduce radiation
and noise transmission.
Sizing of stack or boom length to meet radiation, noise or surface temperature limits at defined receptor points.
Sterile area calculations to allow the safe distance from flare
stack at different radiation limits.
A setup wizard to allow new users to set up an initial model
rapidly with appropriate defaults.
Expert mode to control access to less commonly used options.
Import of files from Flaresim 2.0 and later.
Multiple reports can be created and compared as updates are
made to a model and the data corresponding to any report can be
saved.
Quality Assurance options are included in the reports.
Customisable HTML reports
Customisable graphic reports
Multiple Flaresim cases can be open at the same time.
The wide range of calculation options available within Flaresim may
lead to the possibility of selecting inappropriate correlations for a
particular combination of fluid type and flare system configuration.
While we have tried to prevent the use of the more obvious problems
we have also tried to allow flexibility for one off situations. As
1-6
Introduction
1-7
with all engineering computer software, Flaresim is a tool which

cannot replace sound engineering judgement.
Softbits Consultants Ltd are always interested in continuing product
development to ensure that Flaresim meets the needs of our clients.
Should you wish to see any feature incorporated in Flaresim, please
feel free to contact us at support@flaresim.com. If the request is
reasonable we will endeavour to include it in future releases of the
program.
1-7
1-8
Program Overview
1.2 Program Overview

The Flaresim program has been developed to provide great
flexibility in modelling by breaking down the flare system into a
number of objects such as fluids, stacks, tips etc. These individual
objects are then linked together to define the complete system.
Flaresim provides a Case Navigator view, see Figure 1-1, that shows
a tree structure of all the objects that have been defined in a given
model and provides a rapid overview of which ones are currently
complete and in use.
Figure 1-1, Case Summary view
Case Navigator Icons

Required object
present and ready
Required object
missing or not ready
Optional object
Permanent object
Object ready
Object not ready
Object ignored
1-8
Introduction
1-9
1.2.1 Flaresim Objects

The objects that can be defined are:Case Summary
Each model contains a single Case Summary object which defines
descriptive information.
Fluids
A model can contain multiple fluid objects. Each object describes
the physical properties of a fluid to be flared such as density, lower
heating value, lower explosive limit etc. Fluids may be defined
either by entering bulk properties or by defining the composition of
the fluid to allow calculation of its properties from pure component
data. A single fluid can be flared through multiple tips.
Environments
A model can contain multiple environment objects each of which
describes a combination of wind speed, direction, humidity etc. The
variation of wind speed with direction can also be defined to support
wind rose calculations. Environment characteristics can also be
defined for use in dispersion calculations. Only one environment
object can be active for a set of calculations.
Stacks
Multiple stack objects can be defined which may be active or
ignored in any set of calculations. Stack data includes length,
location and orientation. Each stack may support multiple flare tips.
The distance from each stack to defined radiation and noise limits
can be calculated to evaluate the sterile area required around each
stack.
Tips
Multiple tip objects can be defined and set active or ignored in a set
of calculations. Tip data includes tip type and associated calculation
methods, dimensions and stack location data and the flow and
selection of the fluid being flared. Tip objects provide access to
flame shape and other tip specific results such as combustion gas
composition and purge gas requirements. Tip objects also have a
1-9
1-10
Program Overview
dynamic view that allows the variation in flare flow with time to be
defined and modeled.
Receptor Points
Multiple receptor point objects can be defined and then set active or
ignored in a set of calculations. Receptor point data includes
location, characteristics for surface temperature calculation and
constraints for sizing calculations. Receptor point objects provide
access to results calculated for the point. The effect of wind speed
and direction on the radiation can also be calculated and displayed
as a wind rose plot. Receptor point objects also provide a dynamics
view that displays the variation of results as the flare flow varies
with time.
Receptor Grids
Multiple receptor grid objects can be defined and then activated or
ignored in a set of calculations. Receptor grid data includes
orientation, location and coarseness data as well as characteristics
for surface temperature calculations. Receptor grid objects provide
access to their calculated results including contour plots of radiation,
noise, surface temperature and gas dispersion.
Assist Fluids
Multiple assist fluid objects may be defined and selected for one or
more flare tips. Data includes assist fluid type and calculation
method to be used.
Shields
Multiple shield objects may be defined to model the reduction in
radiation and noise through the installation of water sprays and solid
shields. The transmissivity of water sprays can be specified by the
user or calculated using an internal correlation. Shields can also be
defined to model burn pits or protective locations.
Dispersions
Multiple dispersion objects may be defined to model the dispersion
of combustion gases and flare fluids over long distances using a
Gaussian dispersion model. Either concentration contour plots for a
single pollutant or a downwind plot for multiple pollutants can be
calculated.
1-10
Introduction
1-11
Overlays
Overlay objects allow simple drawings to be created to act as
background pictures for contour plots produced by the Receptor
Grid and Dispersion objects.
KO Drums
KO Drum objects may be defined to perform Sizing and Rating
calculations for knock out drums. Vapour and liquid properties can
be entered directly or a composition specified to allow them to be
calculated by the NIST flash package. Calculations may be run for
either horizontal or vertical drums with a variety of end types. Either
API or GPSA settling velocity correlations can be selected.
Case Studies
Case study objects can be created to run comparitive calculations to
be run alongside the main calculation case. Two types of Case Study
are available. A discrete input Case Study allows a set of input
variables to be selected and case by case values defined.. An
incremental input Case Study allows values for one or two input
variables to be varied in steps over a range of values. Any result
variable can be selected for output in either type of Case Study.
Calculation Options
A single calculation options object defines the correlations to be
used in the calculations. It also provides for control of stack sizing
options, heat transfer options to be used for temperature calculations
and default emissions data. A data fitting option is also available.
Component Management
A component library manager object allows maintenance of the pure
component database.
1.2.2 Object Definition

Flaresim objects are created by selecting the branch in the Case
Navigator view and then clicking the Add button. Alternatively the
Add
dropdown menu in the Case Navigator can be used.
1-11
1-12
Program Overview
Creation of an object automatically opens its view to allow its data

to be entered. When all the required data has been entered the status
text at the bottom of the view will indicate Ready as shown in Figure
1-2.
Some objects have more data items than will fit on a single form so
their views have been divided into multiple tabs.
For example the Stack view as shown in Figure 1-2 has tabs for
Details and Sterile Area. Individual tabs are selected by clicking on
their name.
Existing objects can be updated by double clicking them in the Case
Navigator view or selecting them in the Case Navigator view and
clicking the View button. When the Case Navigator is closed
existing objects can be displayed by selecting them in the View
dropdown menu.
Figure 1-2, Stack View
1-12
Introduction
1-13
1.2.3 Entering Values

When new values are entered in Flaresim they are checked to ensure
that they lie between a minimum and maximum value designed to
protect the Flaresim calculations from unreasonable values. The fact
that a value falls within the range allowed by Flaresim does not
mean that it is thereby valid - the validity of all values entered are
the responsibility of the user.
1.2.4 Running a Model

In order to run calculations a Flaresim model must contain at least
one of each of the following objects in an active and ready state.
Fluid object
Environment object
Stack object
Tip object
While this is sufficient to perform calculations this will not calculate
any radiation, noise or surface temperature results without addition
of at least one active Receptor Point or Receptor Grid.
Calculations are started by clicking the button at the top of the Case
Navigator. This button is also used to display the progress of
calculations and the status of the model. When the Case Navigator
is closed the
icon can be clicked to run the model. Progress of
calculations and any problems encountered are reported in the right
hand Message window at the bottom of the Flaresim screen.
Results from the calculations may be viewed through the
appropriate tabs in the Tip view, Receptor Point view or Receptor
Grid view. Results may be viewed in tabular or graphical format
where appropriate. Alternatively results can be viewed and printed
through the Print
or Print Graphic Report
buttons in the Case
Navigator tool bar.
Once complete a case can be saved using the Save
buttons in the Case Navigator tool bar.
and Save As
1-13
1-14
Documentation Overview
1.3 Documentation Overview

The printed Flaresim manual contains the following chapters:Chapter 2 - Tutorial with detailed worked examples.
The electronic documentation in the file Flaresim.pdf contains this
material and the following additional chapters which provide a full
detailed description of the program features.
Chapter 3 - Concepts, Flaresim Interface, Menu structure, Log
Panels and File Dialogs.
Chapter 4 - General Setup including Case Navigator, Case
Summary, Preferences and Component Management.
Chapter 5 - Fluid and Assist Fluid views.
Chapter 6 - Environment view.
Chapter 7 - Stack view.
Chapter 8 - Tip view.
Chapter 9 - Receptor Point and Receptor Grid views.
Chapter 10 - Shield view.
Chapter 11 - Dispersion view.
Chapter 12 - Overlay editor view.
Chapter 13 - KO Drum view.
Chapter 14 - Case Study view.
Chapter 15 - Calculation Options view.
Chapter 16 - Report options inc. Print Reports and Graphic Reports.
Chapter 17 - Calculation methods.
Appendix A - Graphic Report Layout File Definition
1-14
Getting Started
2-1
2 Getting Started
Page
2.1
Offshore Flare Stack Design . . . . . . . . . . . .4
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
2.2
Onshore Flare Stack Design . . . . . . . . . . .24
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.3
Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Sizing Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
24
30
32
33
Using Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.4
Objective and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Initial Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Print Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sonic Tip Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Run Sonic Tip & Review Calculations . . . 18
Compare Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Two Tip Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Update Pipe Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Offshore Case - Add Welltest Burner . . . .

Offshore Case - Run Welltest Calcs . . . .
Offshore Case - Add Water Screen. . . . . .
Onshore Case - Workshop Surroundings
Onshore Case - Add Workshop . . . . . . . .
Onshore Case - Add Local Environment .
35
37
37
39
41
43
Using Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2-1
2-2
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
Case Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
Objective and Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Load or Create Base Case . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Jet Dispersion Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Gaussian Dispersion, Contour Plot . . . . . .67
Gaussian Dispersion, Line Plot . . . . . . . . .69
Dispersion Analysis Comments . . . . . . . . .71
KO Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.8.1
2.8.2
2-2
Offshore Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Gas Dispersion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
2.8
Offshore Case Study - Discrete Variable . .51

Onshore Case Study - Increm. Variable. . .55
Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.6.1
2.7
Offshore Case - Flaresim Overlay . . . . . . .45

Onshore Case - External Overlay File . . . .48
Initial Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

KO Drum Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Getting Started
2-3
The purpose of this chapter is to provide an introduction to the use

of Flaresim. The examples show how Flaresim may be used to
calculate thermal radiation, noise and exposed surface temperatures
arising from flaring at one or more flare stacks. Examples of case
studies, dynamic and dispersion calculations are also given. The
examples begin with simple flare stack designs for offshore and
onshore situations which are then refined and expanded. The
examples attempt to highlight some of the critical parameters to be
considered when designing a safe flare system.
The examples build up in stages. If you wish to skip a particular
stage, the folder [Public Documents]\Softbits\Flaresim 4.0\Samples
has model files saved at each stage.
2-3
2-4
Offshore Flare Stack Design
2.1 Offshore Flare Stack Design

2.1.1 Objective and Data
The objective is to design a flare stack for an offshore platform. It is
assumed that an inclined flare boom will be used, mounted on the
side of the platform which faces the prevailing wind. The design is
to be based on thermal radiation limits as follows: 1,500 btu/hr/ft2 at the base of the flare stack.
600 btu/hr/ft2 at the helideck located 150 ft from the side of the
platform and 30 ft above the base of the flare stack.
The following design data is available
Fluid
Material
Hydrocarbon Vapour
Flow
100,000 lb/hr
Mol Wt.
46.1
Vapour Temp.
300 F
Heat of combustion
21,500 btu/lb
Heat Capacity ratio
1.1
Tip Diameter
18 in
Wind Velocity
20 mph
2.1.2 Initial Setup
New File Icon
2-4
1.
Start the Flaresim program through the Windows Start

button in the usual way.
2.
We are going to build our first model through the Setup

Wizard. For a new installation of Flaresim this will open
automatically, ready to build a new model. If this does not
appear then you should select the File - Preferences menu
option and select the Use Setup Wizard for New Cases
check box on the Files & Options tab. Then select File -
Getting Started
2-5
New or the New File icon on the tool bar to create a new
case with the Setup Wizard.
3.
In the opening view of the Setup Wizard, set the unit set to
Default Field as shown. Then click the Next button to move
to the Fluid definition tab.
Figure 2-1, Setup Wizard Opening View
4.
In the Fluid tab of the Setup Wizard, enter the following

data items, using the tab key or the mouse to move from
field to field.
Temperature = 300 F
Mole Weight = 46.1
LHV = 21500 btu/lb
Cp/Cv = 1.1
2-5
2-6
LEL is used only by the

Brzustowski flare radiation
method.
Note that some of these values (e.g Temperature or Cp/Cv)

are originally displayed in purple colour denoting a default
value. When you enter a value the colour changes to blue
denoting a user specified value.
The full list of colours used by Flaresim to display values
is:Purple for a fixed default value
Red for calculated default values
Blue for a user specified value
Grey for a fixed, unchangeable input value
Black for a calculated result
The remaining values for Ref Pressure, LEL and Saturation
can be left at their default values. The finished view is
shown below
Figure 2-2, Setup Wizard Fluid Tab
2-6
Getting Started
2-7
Note that Flaresim requires the lower heating value for a

fluid within its calculations. We are assuming that the value
we have been given is the lower, net heating value rather
than the higher, gross heating value.
Advice on the usage of each input value and the allowable
input range is displayed in the advice panel as you move
through the input fields.
When the entries are complete click the Next button.
5.
In the Tip tab, select the radio button to set the tip type to a
Pipe Tip. In the table including the selection of F Factor
method, select the check box to select the Generic Pipe
method.
The F Factor, i.e. the fraction of heat radiated by the flame,
is a critical design parameter for flare system design. The
Generic Pipe correlation has been developed to predict F
Factors across a range of exit velocities and fluid molecular
weights and is generally recommended for initial calculations. For final designs, we would always recommend consulting a flare system vendor for advice on the appropriate F
Factor for a specific fluid and specific flare tip.
6.
Still in the Tip tab, enter the Fluid Mass Flow Rate as
100,000 lb/hr. After this entry has been completed, the Tip
Diameter field is updated to show the tip diameter required
for the default Mach number of 0.45. In our case we know
the tip diameter is 18 in so we update the calculated value to
18 in. The Mach number will be updated to 0.199 to
indicate the velocity for the new diameter.
When complete the view should be as shown in Figure 2-3.
Click the Next button to move to the next tab.
2-7
2-8
Figure 2-3, Setup Wizard Tip Tab
7.
The humidity value is only

used when calculating the
transmissivity.
In the next tab, the Environment tab, enter the wind speed.
Since the value we have been given is 20 mph, we first click
the entry displaying ft/s and select mph in the drop down
menu before entering the value. If we wish to see the value
in ft/s, click again in the units entry and select ft/s to display
the converted value of 29.33 ft/s.
The remaining items can be left at their default values
namely Wind Direction as 0 (i.e. North), Temperature 59
F, Humidity 10% and the User Transmissivity 1.0, with
the Transmissivity Method set to User specified. Note this
default transmissivity method with a specified transmissivity value of 1.0 is the most conservative option.
The final input is to remove the tick from the check box
labelled Include Solar Radiation which means that the
2-8
Getting Started
2-9
specified solar radiation value will NOT be added to the calculated value of flare radiation.
Including solar radiation leads to a more conservative
design. API 521 states that its inclusion should be considered on a case by case basis. Solar radiation can have a significant impact on the flare design when low radiation
values are considered. Since we are considering a low
design radiation for the Helideck, in this case we will
exclude solar radiation for this example.
The completed view is shown as Figure 2-4. Click the Next
button to continue.
Figure 2-4, Setup Wizard Environment Tab
2-9
2-10
8.
In the Stack tab, select the radio button to set the Vertical
Orientation to 60 degrees from horizontal. Then set the
Stack Horizontal Orientation angle to 0 (i.e. North). The
Stack Length will be left unspecified to let Flaresim
calculate it.
Click the Next button to continue
9.
In the Receptors tab, click on the default receptor point

RP_1 and rename it to Stack Base. Set its Distance
Downwind from Stack to 0 ft and confirm that the
Allowable Radiation for the point is 1500 btu/hr/ft2.
Figure 2-5, Setup Wizard Receptors Tab
Click the Add button to create an additional receptor point

for the radiation at the Helideck. Change the default name
RP_2 to Helideck and enter the location as Northing
-150ft, Easting 0ft, Elevation 30ft. and the radiation limit as
2-10
Getting Started
2-11
600 btu/hr/ft2. The completed form is shown as Figure 2-5

above. Click the Next button to continue.
10.
In the Calculations tab, set Calculation Method check box

to Mixed and the Flame Elements to 25.
As discussed in the Methods chapter, the Mixed method is a
compromise designed to give the best accuracy for calculating radiation both close to and further away from the flame.
As such it is a good default method. 25 flame elements is
usually sufficient to calculate the flame shape with a reasonable degree of accuracy.
The completed view is shown as Figure 2-6. We have completed the Setup Wizard so click the Finish button.
Figure 2-6, Setup Wizard Calculations Tab
11.
When the Finish button is clicked, the Setup Wizard takes

the data we have supplied and uses it to create the Flaresim
2-11
2-12
objects that we need for our initial model. The Case

Navigator view will be displayed to list all of these objects
as shown in Figure 2-7. Note that the
icon is shown
against each object indicating it is ready to calculate and
that the
icon is shown against the key object branches to
indicate that the model has the minimum information
needed to run calculations.
At this point you can open each objects view by double
clicking on them in the Case Navigator to see how the Setup
Wizard has initialised the values.
Figure 2-7, Case Summary
12.
This is a suitable point to save the data we have entered so

far. Click the
button in the tool bar at the top of the Case
Navigator or main tool bar. Since we have not yet saved the
file, a File Save Dialog window will appear to allow us to
specify the location and name of the file. Use the name
Ex1 - Offshore - Ready To Run.
2-12
Getting Started
2-13
2.1.3 Initial Calculations

13.
We are now ready to run the calculations by clicking the

large button labelled Click to Calculate at the top of the
Case Navigator. The button will change to show a progress
bar as the calculation runs. Messages will be output to the
Error/Warnings/Info log as the calculations progress.
When calculations are complete the colour of the log panel
will change to summarise the status of the calculations. A
green colour represents success, yellow represents some
warnings were generated and red represents errors were
encountered.
Figure 2-8, Error/Warnings/Info log
The scroll bars can be used to review earlier messages. The

log window can be resized by dragging the separator bar
above it.
We can now review the results. Click Stack 1 in the Case
Navigator view and click the View button. The view will
show that the stack length has been calculated as 247ft.
Double click the Grid 1 item in the Case Summary view and
then click the Radiation tab. Then select Plot in the Display
drop down. The radiation isopleths are displayed as shown
below.
2-13
2-14
Figure 2-9, Receptor Grid Isopleth Plot
Finally open the Receptor summary view by double clicking the Receptor Point branch label in the Case Navigator.
As shown below, the Radiation Results line shows that our
design radiation limit of 600 btu/h/ft2 has been met for the
Helideck receptor, while the radiation value at the Stack
Base receptor is lower than its allowed value limit at 767
btu/hr/ft2.
2-14
Getting Started
2-15
Figure 2-10, Receptor Point Summary
14.
This completes our initial design. Save the case as Ex1 Offshore - Initial Results.
2.1.4 Print Results

15.
Select the Print button

in the Case Navigator tool bar.
The Report Preview view shown below in Figure 2-11
opens. Note that this will open in a new window,
independent of the main Flaresim view.
16.
Select the report elements you wish to see printed. To see

what the report will look like with the current set of
elements, you will need to click the Refresh button to
update it.
2-15
2-16
Figure 2-11, Report Preview
In order to allow us to compare these results with future

results you will need to ensure that the Stack Configuration,
Tip Results (General and Flame Shape elements) and the
Receptor Point results are included. Once you have set your
preferred report options you can click the Save Options
button to save your report options to a configuration file.
Your chosen options will also be saved with the case.
17.
When you are happy with the options you have chosen click
the Print button to send the report to your default printer.
The standard Printer Dialog view will appear to allow the
printer and other options to be selected.
2-16
Getting Started
2-17
2.1.5 Sonic Tip Design

The design that we have produced meets our design radiation limits
but requires a long 247ft stack. Since we are designing a flare stack
for an offshore platform, we wish to minimise the length and hence
the weight of the flare stack as much as possible. Therefore we will
attempt to reduce the required flare stack length by redesigning the
system with a sonic flare tip.
The fluid data, environmental data and radiation limits are the same
as for Example 1.
1.
If you are continuing from the previous section, you should
save your case before continuing using the
button from
the tool bar at the top of the Case Navigator. Skip to step 3.
2.
Otherwise use the File - Open menu option or the

icon.
In the File Open dialog that appears, browse to the Samples
folder created by your Flaresim installation. This will
usually be in the Softbits\Flaresim 4.0 folder in your
configured Documents folder. Select the file Ex1 - Initial
Result.fsw and click the Open button.
3.
Create a new tip by selecting the Tip branch in the Case

Navigator view and then clicking the Add button or by
selecting the Add - Tip drop down menu option.
4.
After the Tip View opens, enter the following data on the
Details tab:
Name = Sonic Tip
Tip Type = Sonic
Number of Burners = 1
Seal Type = None
Fraction Heat Radiated Method = High Efficiency
5.
On the Noise Input tab of the Tip view enter the following
data:
Combustion Noise Method = Standard Reference.
2-17
2-18
6.
Move to the Location & Dimensions tab and enter the

following data:
On Stack = Stack_1
Length = 3.0ft
Angle to Horizontal = 90
Angle to North = 0
Exit Diameter = 18in
Riser Diameter = 18in
Contraction Coefficient = 1.0 (default)
Exit Loss Coefficient = 1.0 (default)
Roughness = 9.843e-4in (default)
Calc Burner Opening = Selected
7.
Click on the Fluids tab and enter the following:

Fluid Name = Fluid 1
Fluid Mass Flow = 100,000lb/hr
8.
At this point, the Status Text at the bottom of the Tip view
should indicate that the tip data is complete. Close the view.
9.
In the Case Navigator, select the branch labelled Tip 1 and

then click the Ignore button. The icon beside the label
should turn to a
icon to confirm that the tip will not be
included in the calculations.
2.1.6 Run Sonic Tip & Review Calculations

10.
We are now ready to run the calculations. Click the large

button at the top of the Case Navigator.
Once Flaresim has finished calculating, check the Errors/
Warnings/Info log panel to confirm that the expected calculations for the two Receptor Points have been completed.
Note that if any earlier messages in the log panel are causing confusion, you can click the right mouse button over the
log panel to access a pop-up menu. This provides a Clear
option to remove the current log messages.
2-18
Getting Started
11.
We are now ready to review the results. Open the Stack

view for the Main Stack. The new length calculated for the
stack is 68ft.
12.
Open the Receptor Summary view. This indicates that the

Stack Base receptor point is now the controlling limit since
the thermal radiation at this point is calculated as 1500 btu/
hr/ft2. The radiation at the Helideck receptor point is 543
btu/hr/ft2.
13.
Save the new design to a new case name, Ex1 - Offshore Sonic Tip Results.
14.
Generate a report for this new case using the Print tool bar
button.
2-19
2.1.7 Compare Results

Our new design with the sonic flare tip is clearly better since it leads
to a much shorter stack. This will save a great amount of weight and
hence cost over our initial design using the pipe flare tip. It is worth
doing a detailed comparison to understand the difference between
the designs:
15.
Reopen the original case Ex1 - Offshore Initial

Results.fsw and click the Print tool bar button. Since
reports are generated in separate windows then you will
now have two report windows that you can compare side by
side. Note that both cases are open simultaneously in
Flaresim and you can switch between them using the
Windows menu option.
Alternatively you can use your Internet browser to view the
saved report files Ex1 - Offshore Initial Results.html in
the Samples\Ex1 - Offshore Initial Results sub-folder and
Ex1 - Sonic Tip Results.html in the Samples\Ex1 - Offshore Sonic Tip Results sub-folder (usually in [Documents]\Softbits\Flaresim 4.0).
2-19
2-20
16.
Find the Tip Data - Results section in the reports. The

fraction of heat radiated value for the Pipe flare design is
0.35 while that for the Sonic design is 0.1.
The fraction of heat radiated by a flare is a critical parameter in the design. Pipe flares exhibit relatively poor mixing
of air with the flared fluid and as a result the flame contains
many partially combusted luminescent carbon particles that
give it an orange colour and a relatively high fraction of
heat radiated. Sonic flare tips are designed to maximise the
mixing of air and the flared fluid and so burn with a clearer
flame with lower heat radiation.
By selecting the appropriate F Factor method to calculate
the fraction of heat radiated in both our designs, we have
allowed the program to calculate an appropriate value for
the different tips. However since this is such an important
factor in the design, the heat radiation factor to be used
should be confirmed with your flare system vendor prior to
the final design. Should you wish to use a heat radiation
factor supplied by a vendor you should set the method to
User Specified and enter the value.
17.
Still in the Tip Data - Results section of the reports find the
flame length. For the Pipe flare design this is 173 ft, while
for the Sonic flare design the flame length is 88ft. Note that
the flame length calculated by the API method is the same
in both cases.
Sonic flare tips by their design and by their greater gas exit
velocities lead to a flame shape that is shorter and stiffer
compared to that of a pipe flare. As a result the flame is less
affected by wind and stays closer to the tip and thus further
from the platform. This can be seen most clearly by comparing the 3D plot of the Flame Shape in the reports.
Finally in the Tip Results section of the reports, find the tip
back pressure i.e. tip inlet pressure. For the Pipe flare this is
14.7 psi while for the Sonic flare it is 26.0 psi.
2-20
Getting Started
2-21
The fact that the sonic tip is operating at choked conditions

means that the pressure drop over this type of tip is much
higher than for the pipe tip. Thus a sonic tip can only be
used if the resulting back pressure on the flare system is not
so high as to prevent safe relief of the gas.
Comparison of our two designs using the pipe tip and the sonic tip
shows that the sonic tip is much better since it produces a shorter,
stiffer flame with a lower F Factor than the pipe flare. This means
that the flare stack can be much shorter while still meeting radiation
limits. Given the advantages of the sonic tip, it might appear that we
should always specify this type of tip.
However we have also seen that the sonic flare tip results in higher
back pressures on the flare system. In many cases, this additional
back pressure will be too high to allow safe relief from all the
possible relief sources in the process. Therefore it is common to see
designs with both high and low pressure flare systems relieving
through different tips.
2.1.8 Two Tip Design

The relieving sources in our process have been reviewed to check
the new back pressure resulting from the sonic tip is acceptable. The
review has shown that 10,000 lb/h of the material being flared
cannot be relieved safely at the new higher back pressure. As a result
we have decided to split our design so this 10,000 lb/h is relieved
through a low pressure flare system, leading to a pipe tip with the
remaining material flowing through a high pressure flare system to
a sonic tip.
1.
If you are continuing from the previous section you should
save your case before continuing using the Save tool bar
button
2.
in the Case Navigator. Skip to step 3.

icon.
sub-folder of your Flaresim installation (usually [Public
2-21
2-22
Documents]\Softbits\Flaresim 4.0), select the file Ex1 Offshore - Sonic Tip Results.fswand click the Open button.
3.
In the Case Navigator view, double-click the Sonic Tip

branch to open the view for this Tip. On the Fluids tab,
change the flow rate to 90,000 lb/h. Close the view.
4.
Open the view for the Tip 1 by double-clicking this in the

Case Navigator view or by selecting it and then clicking the
View button. Rename the tip to Pipe Tip. On the Fluids
tab, change the flow rate to 10,000 lb/h. Then clear the tick
from the Ignore check box to activate this tip again. Close
the view.
5.

button at the top of the Case Navigator.
Check the Errors/Warnings/Info log panel to confirm that
the expected calculations for the two Receptor Points have
been completed.
6.
Open the Stack view for the Main Stack. The new length
calculated for the stack is 96ft.
2-22
Getting Started
7.
2-23
Open the Receptor Summary view. This indicates that the

Main Stack receptor point is still the controlling limit since
the thermal radiation at this point is still calculated as 1500
btu/hr/ft2.
2.1.9 Update Pipe Tip

In reducing the flow through the Pipe tip we have changed its
performance:
8.
Open the Tip view for the Pipe tip. You will see on the
Details tab that the fraction of heat radiated from this tip has
been calculated as 0.38 whereas before it was 0.35. The
reason for this is the greatly reduced velocity, 0.02 mach,
through the tip which reduces the tips efficiency. For
efficient operation the velocity should be 0.2 mach or
higher.
9.
On the Location & Dimensions tab, click the Size Me

button. Set the Mach number to 0.3 and set Use Nominal
Diam to No and the tip size will be calculated as 4.6 in.
Set Use Nominal Diam back to Yes and a nominal
diameter of 5 inch will be selected. The calculated Mach
Number which be automatically updated and shows 0.25
Mach. This is acceptable, so click the Ok button. The tip
size and riser diameter will automatically be updated to the
new selected diameter.
10.
Now recalculate the case. The new exit velocity is 0.25

Mach and the fraction of heat radiated is now 0.34. The
improvement in efficiency of this flare reduces the
calculated size of the stack to 90ft.
11.
Our two tip design is complete so save the case as Ex1 Offshore - Final Results.
2-23
2-24
Onshore Flare Stack Design
2.2 Onshore Flare Stack Design

2.2.1 Objective
The objective of this tutorial is to calculate the sterile area around an
existing vertical flare located in an onshore facility and evaluate
whether the current design is acceptable during a General Power
Failure (GPF) scenario. The sterile area will be calculated at an
elevation of 2m, which represents the typical head height for
personnel.
2.2.2 Model Setup

1.
Start the Flaresim program through the Windows Start

button in the usual way.
2.
We will build our first model through the Case Navigator.

Close the Setup Wizard that opens automatically when
Flaresim starts up.
3.
Use the File/Preferences option on the main Menu. In the

Units tab, select the European units set and close the view.
4.
Create a new Fluid by selecting the Fluids branch in the

Case Navigator view and then clicking the Add button or by
selecting the Add - Fluid drop down menu option.
5.
On the Properties tab of the Fluid view that opens enter the
following data:
Name = Flare Gas GPF
Calculation Method = REFPROP
Temperature = 160 C
Pressure = 1.5 bar a
6.
2-24
Move to Options tab and enter the information below:
Getting Started
2-25
Correct Temperatures = Yes

Isentropic Efficiency = 0%
Flash Method = PR (default)
When the Isentropic Efficiency is set to 0%, Flaresim will
follow an isenthalpic thermodynamic path to bring the fluid
from the reference T&P down to the pressure at the tip exit.
7.
In the Composition tab add the following components and

the fraction in Mole basis:
Methane
Ethane
Propane
i-Butane
n-Butane
i-Pentane
n-Pentane
n-Hexane
0.20
0.20
0.30
0.10
0.15
0.02
0.02
0.01
Flaresim calculates the fluid properties as shown below. Cp/

Cv and the critical properties will be displayed after running
the model if REFPROP thermo package is selected.
Figure 2-13, Fluid View
2-25
2-26
8.
Create a new Environment by selecting the Environments

branch in the Case Navigator view and then clicking the
Add button or by selecting the Add - Environment drop
down menu option.
9.
On the Overall tab of the Environment view that opens enter

the following data:
Name = 9D - No Solar - No Aten.
Wind Speed = 9 m/s
Wind Direction = 0 (wind blowing from the North)
Include Solar Radiation = No (box unchecked)
API 521 states that solar radiation should be considered on a
case by case basis. Consideration should be given to: the
frequency of the flaring event, the probability of personnel
being present in the exposed location, the ease or difficulty
of escape from the exposed location, etc.
Accounting for these criteria and the fact that the scenario
represents an emergency scenario, the solar radiation will be
excluded in our case.
Transmissivity Method = User Specified
Transmissivity Value = 1
A value of 1 is the most conservative option as it does not
take credit for atmospheric attenuation.
Other Parameters = leave as default
10.
Move to Dispersion Data tab and enter the following data:

Correct W. Speed For Height = Yes
This option will use a wind speed vs height curve to correct
the speed defined in the Overall tab and will have an effect
on both radiation and temperature calculations.
Other Parameters = leave as default
2-26
Getting Started
11.
2-27
Create a new Stack by selecting the Stacks branch in the

Case Navigator view and clicking the Add button or by
selecting the Add - Stack drop down menu option.
On the Details tab of the Stack view that opens enter the following data:
Name = LP Flare
Stack located at the origin:
Northing = 0m
Easting = 0m
Elevation = 0m
Length = 85m
Angle to Horizontal = 90 deg
Angle From North = 0 deg
Size This Stack = No (box unchecked)
12.
Move to Sterile Area tab and enter the following data:

Sterile Area Elevation = 2m (head height)
Calculate Sterile Area = Yes
Update the radiation table with the following limit values:
1.6 kW/m2 (For continuous exposure from API 521)
3.2 kW/m2 (Allowed during emergency escape)
4.7 kW/m2 (For 2min emergency actions from API 521)
13.
Create a new Tip by selecting the Tips branch in the Case

Navigator view and then clicking the Add button or by
selecting the Add - Tip drop down menu option.
On the Details tab of the Tip view that opens enter the following data:
Name = Pipe Flare - GPF 300t-h
Tip Type = Pipe
Number of Burners = 1
Seal Type = None
Fraction Heat Radiated Method = Generic Pipe
2-27
2-28
Generic pipe F factor is a proprietary correlation based on

refitting other methods across a range of exit velocities and
molecular weights and represents a good approach when
modelling gas pipe tips.
14.
On the Noise Input tab of the Tip view, enter the following
data:
Combustion Noise Method = Standard Reference.
15.
Move to the Location & Dimensions tab and enter the

following data:
On Stack = LP Flare
Length = 0m
Angle to Horizontal = 90 deg
Angle to North = 0 deg
Exit Diameter = 36 in
Since the value we have been given is 36in, we first click
the entry displaying "mm" and select "in" in the drop down
menu before entering the value. If we wish to see the value
in "mm" then click again in the units entry and select "mm"
to display the converted value of 914.4 mm
Burner Opening = 100%
Riser Diameter = 36 in
Roughness = 0.025 mm (default)
Calc Burner Opening = No (box unchecked)
16.
Click on the Fluids tab and enter the following:

Fluid Name = "Flare Gas GPF"
Mass Flow = 300,000 kg/h
At this point the Status Text at the bottom of the Tip view
should indicate that the tip data is complete. Close the view.
17.
2-28
Since we are interested in studying the radiation at head

height, we will create a receptor grid to plot the radiation
contours at this height. In the Case Navigator view, select
Getting Started
2-29
the Receptor Grids branch and click the Add button

(alternatively select the Add - Receptor Grid drop down
menu option) to create and open the view for a new
Receptor Grid object.
On the Extent tab enter the following data:
Name = Grid @ Head Height
Grid Plane = Northing-Easting
Elevation Offset = 2m (head height)
Northing Min = -250m
Northing Max = 50m
Northing Points = 41
Easting Min = -150m
Easting Max = 150m
Easting Points = 41
18.
We can customise the isopleth lines displayed on the plot.

On the Radiation tab change the display to Plot and click on
the Customise button to open the plot properties view. Go to
Contour Details tab and select the check boxes to show only
the isopleth values for 1.6, 3.2 and 4.7 kW/m2 as shown
below. Note the colours of each isopleth can be customised
by clicking on the line colour panel and selecting the colour
from the pop-up colour picker dialog. Assign a navy blue
colour to the 1.6 kW/m2 isopleth.
2-29
2-30
Figure 2-14, Customise Isopleths
19.
Finally we need to select a radiation method to perform the

calculations. Open the Calculation Options view in the Case
Navigator, select "Mixed" radiation method and set the No.
Flame Elements to 25.
As discussed in the Methods chapter of the documentation,
the Mixed method is a compromise designed to give the
best accuracy for calculating radiation both close to and further away from the flame. As such it is a good default
method. 25 flame elements are usually sufficient to calculate the flame shape with a reasonable degree of accuracy.
2.2.3 Initial Calculations

20.

Calculate button at the top of the Case Navigator. Once
Flaresim has finished calculating, check the Errors/
Warnings/Info log panel to confirm that the expected
calculations have been completed.
Note that this window is colour coded:
2-30
Getting Started
2-31
Green when calculations are completed without warnings

Yellow when calculations are completed with warnings
Red when errors are detected and results not generated
21.
We are now ready to review the results. Open the "LP Flare"
view and go to the Sterile Area tab. The distances to meet
each of the specified radiation limits are displayed on the
table as shown below in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15, Sterile Area Results
22.
Open the Receptor Grid view to inspect the isopleths plot by

clicking on the Radiation tab and then selecting Plot as the
Display option, see Figure 2-16. It presents the contours for
the radiation limits of interest at head height, the same as the
sterile area calculation.
2-31
2-32
Figure 2-16, Receptor Grid Results
23.
This completes our initial evaluation. Save the case as Ex2

- Onshore - Rating Results.fsw
2.2.4 Sizing Setup

The model that we produced for the existing flare calculated a
distance of 120m from the flare base to the 4.7 kW/m2 radiation
limit. Due to the proximity of process equipment and activities
taking place in the vicinity of the flare, the extent of the calculated
sterile area is not acceptable. The flare height needs increasing to
meet a maximum permitted radiation level 4.7 kW/m2 on a
horizontal plane elevated 2m from ground (head height).
1.
If you are continuing from the previous example you should
save your case before continuing using the Save button
in the Case Navigator. Skip to step 3.
2-32
Getting Started
2.

icon.
folder created by your Flaresim installation. This will
usually be in the Softbits\Flaresim 4.0 folder in your
configured "Documents" folder. Select the file "Ex2 Onshore - Rating Results.fsw" and click the Open button.
3.
Open the "LP Flare" view and enable the Size This Stack
check box under the Details tab.
4.
Open the "Grid @ Head Height" view, select the Max

Radiation tab and enter a Sizing Constraint of 4.7 kW/m2.
Close the view.
5.
We will also create a grid for the vertical cross-section

through the axis of the flare to visualise radiation levels at
different elevations.
2-33
In the Case Navigator view add a new Receptor Grid. On

the Extent tab enter the following data:
Name = Elevation Grid
Grid Plane = Elevation-Northing
Easting Offset = 0m (section through the axis of the flare)
Elevation Min = 0m
Elevation Max = 300m
Elevation Points = 41
Northing Max = 50m
Northing Points = 41
Customise the isopleth lines to show only the isopleth values for 1.6, 3.2 and 4.7 kW/m2 as before.
2.2.5 Run Sizing Calculations

6.
Hit the Calculate button. The log panel is red indicating that
there is an error in the calculations. The flare height needs to
be higher than the maximum height set by default.
2-33
2-34
7.
Open the Calculation Options view from the Case

Navigator, go to the Sizing & Pressure Profile tab and
change the Stack Maximum Length to 150m.
Rerun the case. The sizing calculations are now successful.
8.
Check the results. Open the "LP Flare" view, the stack
height has been increased to 106m to meet the 4.7 kW/m2 at
head height. The location of the maximum radiation point
(at 2m of elevation) is displayed in the Max Radiation tab of
"Grid @ Head Height". The location of this point is at 51m
downwind as shown below.
Figure 2-17, Max Radiation Location
2-34
9.
Open the Radiation tab of "Elevation Grid" and select the

plot option. The 4.7 kW/m2 isopleth is above head height
(2m from ground).
10.
Finally open the Sterile Area tab under the "LP Flare" view.
The 4.7 kW/m2 limit shows a distance indicating that this
value is reached. This is due to the sterile area calculation
using a different solver routine to the sizing calculation.
Increase the radiation limit to 4.701 kW/m2 and recalculate
to remove this discrepancy.
11.
This completes the stack sizing tutorial. Save the case as

Ex2 - Onshore - Sizing Results.fsw.
Getting Started
2-35
2.3 Using Shields

Flaresim includes the ability to model shield sections that will
protect specific locations from the flare radiation. The shield
sections may model solid obstructions blocking all of the radiation
or water curtains that provide a partial block.
Two examples are presented here extending the base examples. For
the offshore example, a welltest burner is added which requires the
use of a water curtain shield to protect the platform. For the onshore
example, a structure and its surroundings are modelled.
2.3.1 Offshore Case - Add Welltest Burner

A welltest burner capable of burning 30,000 lb/hr of liquid is to be
added to our design.
1.
Use the File - Open menu option or the

icon. In the File
Open dialog that appears, browse to the Samples sub-folder
in the Flaresim installation folder (usually [Public Documents]\Softbits\Flaresim 4.0) select the file Ex1 - Offshore
Final Results.fsw and click the Open button.
2.
Change the units preferences to Field in the Preferences

view if required.
3.
In the Case Navigator view, select the Fluids branch and

click the Add button to create a new Fluid and open its view.
Complete the view with the following entries;
Name = Welltest Liquid,
Calculation Method = Flaresim
Temperature = 100 F,
Ref Pressure = 14.7psi
Mole Weight = 52.9 ,
LHV = 19,550 btu/lb,
Cp/Cv = 1.2,
LEL = 1.7%,
Saturation = 100%.
2-35
2-36
Using Shields
The Tc and Pc fields can be left blank.

4.
In the Case Navigator view select the Stacks branch and

then click the Add button to create a new Stack and open its
view. Enter data for the new stack as follows, leaving other
entries at their default values;
Name - Welltest Boom,
Location
Northing = -200ft,
Easting = 0ft,
Elevation = 0ft,
Dimensions section
Length = 55ft,
Angle to Horizontal = 0 deg,
Angle to North = 180 deg.
These entries define the new stack as a horizontal boom on
the opposite side of the platform to the main flare stack.
5.
In the Case Navigator, select the Tips branch and click the
Add button to create and view a new Tip object. Name it
Welltest Tip and enter the following data;
Details tab
Tip Type = Welltest,
Number of Burners = 3,
Fraction Heat Radiated Method = User Specified
Specified Fraction Heat Radiated = 0.3
All other values should be left at their defaults.
Location & Dimensions tab
On Stack = Welltest Boom,
Length = 0ft,
Angle to Horizontal = 0 deg,
Angle from North = 180 deg.
Exit Diameter = 4 in
Note the burner length and orientation fields serve to locate
the precise location of the flame and the initial flame
2-36
Getting Started
2-37
direction. Even when the burner length is 0ft as here, the

orientation fields must still be entered.
Fluids tab
Fluid = Welltest Liquid
Mass flow = 30,000 lb/hr.
6.
Add a new Receptor Point in the usual way. Define the

following data to locate the receptor point at the base of the
welltest burner boom;
Name - Base Welltest Boom,
Northing = -200ft,
Easting = 0ft,
Elevation = 0ft.
All other fields may be left at their default values. Close the
view.
2.3.2 Offshore Case - Run Welltest Calculations

7.
In the Case Navigator view, select the Stack 1 object. Clear

the Size This Stack check box. Now click the Ignore button.
This will exclude the two tips on the main flare stack from
the calculations.
8.
Run the calculations by clicking the large button labelled

Click to Calculate. Check in the Errors/Warnings/Info log
panel that the case has run and calculated correctly.
9.
Open the Receptor Summary view. The results show that

the radiation limits for our original two critical locations
that we have defined are met. The radiation at the base of
the well test burner stack is 1405 btu/hr/ft2.
2.3.3 Offshore Case - Add Water Screen

The radiation calculated at the base of the welltest burner stack is
acceptable for brief exposure only. Since more extended exposure
might be required, it is necessary to reduce the radiation. While this
2-37
2-38
Using Shields
could be achieved by extending the length of the stack this would be

an expensive option due to the added weight. It is normal to reduce
radiation from welltest burners using water screens.
10.
Add a Shield object, either by clicking the Shield branch in

the Case Navigator view and then the Add button, or by
using the Add - Shield menu option according to your
preference.
11.
Enter data in the Details tab of the new Shield view as

follows;
Name = Water Curtain,
Radiation - Type = Water Screen
Radiation - Layer Thickness Calculation = User
Radiation - Layer Thickness = 0.5 in
Noise - Transmissivity = 1.0 [default]
12.
Select the Sections tab. The first section is already created

for you. In the lower half of this view, click the Add Vertex
button 4 times to create a rectangular shield section with 4
corners or vertices.
13.
Enter the following data;

Name - Water Curtain
Vertex 1 = Northing -205 ft, Easting, 50 ft, Elevation 40 ft
Vertex 2 = Northing -205 ft, Easting, 50 ft, Elevation -10 ft
Vertex 3 = Northing -205 ft, Easting, -50 ft, Elevation -10 ft
Vertex 4 = Northing -205 ft, Easting, -50 ft, Elevation 40 ft
Note it is a requirement when entering the locations of the
vertices that each point is directly connected to the next
point in the list as shown below. Flaresim will attempt to
sort the points to meet this criteria if necessary.
2-38
Getting Started
2-39
Figure 2-18, Shield Section Input
14.
The Shield view should now show that the shield data setup
is complete. Run the updated case and inspect the results.
The radiation value at the base of the welltest burner stack
has been reduced to an acceptable value of 264 btu/hr/ft2.
The radiation isopleth for the Receptor Grid, Grid 1 clearly
shows the effect of the shield, see Figure 2-19..
Figure 2-19, Isopleth plot for Helideck Plan View
15.
Save the case as Ex3 - Shields - Water Curtain.fsw
2.3.4 Onshore Case - Workshop Surroundings

After sizing the onshore flare to meet a radiation constraint at head
height, we are now concerned about the surroundings of a workshop
located in the vicinity of the stack. We will calculate the radiation
2-39
2-40
Using Shields
and temperature at a receptor located at the entrance of the workshop

on the downwind side of the structure and study the shielding
effects.
1.

icon. to open the
file "Ex2 - Onshore Sizing Results.fsw" and click the Open
button.
2.
If required, use the Preferences view to set the units to

European.
3.
Add a new Receptor Point in the usual way. Define the

following data to locate the receptor in the South-west
direction from the flare base:
Name = Workshop Entrance
Northing = -111m
Easting = -30m
Elevation = 2m
All other fields may be left at their defaults. Close the view.
4.
The resized flare with a new height of 106m will be used

from this point onwards. Swap to rating mode as follows.
Open the "LP Flare" view and disable the Size This Stack
check box under the Details tab. Set the stack length to
106m. Click the Calculate button to run the model.
5.
Open the Workshop Entrance point to inspect the results.

The radiation at the workshop entrance is 3.8 kW/m2. Note
the surface temperature calculated which is 46 C.
This equilibrium temperature value is based on the default
material properties of the receptor which are appropriate for
a steel plate 3mm thick exposed to radiation on one face.
We will use these properties as representative of exposed
equipment at the workshop entrance.
2-40
Getting Started
2-41
2.3.5 Onshore Case - Add Workshop

While the radiation received at the workshop remains below our
sizing constraint of 4.7 kW/m2 it still exceeds the allowed limit for
continuous exposure of 1.6 kW/m2 and the 3.2 kW/m2 allowed
during emergency escapes.
In order to predict the radiation at the point of interest with more
accuracy we should account for the fact that the workshop will act
as a shield protecting the receptor from radiation.
6.
Add a Shield object, either by clicking the Shields branch in

the Case Navigator view and then the Add button, or by
using the Add - Shield menu option according to your
preference.
7.
Enter data in the Details tab of the new Shield view as

follows:
Name = Workshop
Screen Type = Solid
Note the Radiation Specified Transmissivity is automatically set to 0. This is the value expected for opaque materials such as concrete or metal.
Noise Transmissivity = 1.0 [default]
8.
Move to the Sections tab. Click on the Make Pit/Hut button

and enter the following data in the popup window:
Select Hut radio button
Length = 10m
Width = 4m
Height = 4m
Northing = -105m
Easting = -30m
Elevation = 0m
Click OK.
2-41
2-42
Using Shields
This option automatically adds five sections to the shield:

four walls and the roof.
The Shield View status should now indicate that the shield
is ready to calculate.
9.
Click the Calculate button and review the results. The

radiation at the Workshop Entrance is now 2.0 kW/m2
which allows safe escape during an emergency.
10.
Open the Grid @ Head Height receptor grid and view the
radiation isopleth plot. The shield sections representing the
workshop will be shown on the plot but are rather small.
Click the Zoom button and when the zoom cursor icon
appears, click and drag around the workshop region. The
expanded plot is shown below.
Figure 2-20, Grid Radiation Isopleth
This shows a symmetrical isopleth around the workshop

which is unexpected given that the flare is to the North and
East of the workshop.
This result is due to the fact that the isopleth curves are calculated by interpolation from the points in the grid. These
points are too far apart to allow an accurate calculation of
the isopleths around the small workshop.
2-42
Getting Started
11.
2-43
To plot the isopleths around the workshop in more detail an

additional receptor grid is needed. Copy this receptor grid
and specify the following data in the new grid:
Name = Workshop Surroundings
Orientation = Northing - Easting
Offset = 2m
Northing Max = -95m
Northing Number of points = 41
Easting Min = -40m
Easting Max = -20m
Easting Number of points = 41
Click Calculate and inspect the radiation isopleths for the
Workshop Surroundings grid. As shown below, this now
reveals the expected lower radiation region to the South and
West of the workshop.
Figure 2-21, Workshop Surroundings Isopleth
2.3.6 Onshore Case - Add Local Environment

The workshop does not only protect the entrance area from
radiation, it also protects it from the Northerly wind. This will
reduce the convective cooling of exposed equipment and will result
in higher equilibrium temperatures. We will extend our model to
2-43
2-44
Using Shields
include this effect by adding a local environment with 0 m/s wind

speed for the workshop entrance receptor.
12.
Select the existing Environment in the Case Navigator and

click the Copy button. Rename the new Environment "No
Wind-No Solar - No Aten." Change the wind speed to 0m/s.
13.
The "9D" Environment was automatically ignored since

only one can be active in the model. However we still want
to use a 9m/s wind for the radiation calculations. Click on
the Environment "9D - No Solar - No Aten." item in the
Case Navigator and then click the Activate button.
14.
Copy the Receptor Point "Workshop Entrance" and rename

the new one "Workshop Entrance - No Wind". Move to the
Properties tab and change the Local Environment to "No
Wind - No Solar - No Aten." Creating a copy of this point
will allow us to compare the temperatures with and without
the cooling effect of the wind.
15.
Run the case. Open the Receptor Summary view by double

clicking on the Receptor Points branch in the Case
Navigator and compare the temperatures of the two points.
With the No Wind local environment the equilibrium temperature is 86 C as against 31 C with the base case wind
speed of 9 m/s.
While higher windspeeds often lead to higher radiation values due to greater flame deflection, this shows that studies
of temperature should consider lower wind speeds if a
receptor point is shielded from the wind. This result, at 0m/s
wind speed, considers the worst possible case - it is likely
that some wind will eddy around the workshop.
16.
2-44
Save the case as Ex3 - Shields - Structure.
Getting Started
2-45
2.4 Using Overlays

Flaresim provides Receptor Grid objects to visualise the thermal
radiation around the flare. These calculate the radiation for a grid of
points which are then used to generate isopleth charts showing lines
of constant thermal radiation. Similar isopleth charts can be
displayed for noise and surface temperature results. The usage of
these has already been explained in earlier examples.
The utility of these isopleth plots is greatly enhanced by plotting
them on a plant drawing so that the radiation levels can clearly be
identified at different locations.These examples show how two types
of plant drawings, known in Flaresim as Overlays, can be integrated
with isopleth plots.
2.4.1 Offshore Case - Flaresim Overlay

The first type of overlay available for adding to isopleth plots are
known as Flaresim overlays. These are generated using the internal
overlay editor. In this example, we will create a simple plan view
within Flaresim for integration with the receptor grid isopleth plot in
our offshore example.
1.
Select the File - Open menu item or click the

icon.
Open the case Ex3 - Shield - Water Curtain.fsw which
you should find in the folder [Public Documents]/Softbits/
Flaresim 4.0.
2.
In the Case Navigator, select the Overlay branch and click

the Add button. A new overlay object called Overlay 1 will
be created and displayed. Change the name to Helideck
Plan.
3.
In the Update Details From Grid section of the Details

tab, select the Grid 1 grid and click Update. The Overlay
dimensions are updated with those from the chosen grid.
2-45
2-46
Using Overlays
4.
Select the Editor tab and click the zoom in
and zoom
out
buttons to resize the view until you can see the full
drawing. Check the Show Stacks check box to display the
location of the stack in the drawing to act as a guideline.
Note this will not form part of the drawing.
5.
Now click the Add Rectangle button

and draw a
rectangle to represent the platform outline from the top left
corner [-200,0] to the bottom right corner [50,-200]. This is
done by moving to the first point using the displayed X,Y
coordinates at the left of the view as a guide, clicking and
holding the left mouse button then dragging to the second
point.
6.
Add a second rectangle to represent the helideck from the

points [-50,-100] to [30, -180].
7.
Click the ellipse button

and draw a circle within the
helideck rectangle by moving to the point [-50, -100],
clicking and holding the left mouse button and dragging to
the point [30, -180].
8.
Click the text button

and then click the drawing in the
middle of the helideck circle. A vertical flashing bar will
appear to indicate the text insertion point. Type the letter H
and then hit the enter key to complete the text entry.
If the text is too small, click the select button
and then
select the text you have just entered. A set of selection
points will appear around it to indicate that it has been
selected. Now click the properties drop down menu
and select the Text Font option to open a standard font dialog to allow the text size and style to be defined. A size of
around 24 pt is probably suitable.
If required the selected text can also be moved by clicking
the yellow dot and dragging with it the left mouse button - .
2-46
Getting Started
2-47
The overlay picture is now complete and should look something like the view below.
Figure 2-22, Completed Overlay
9.
Next open the Grid 1 Receptor Grid and go to the Plot

Overlay tab. Select the Use Flaresim Overlay radio button
and then, in the drop down menu that appears, select the
overlay we have just created, Helideck Plan. Finally tick
the Show Overlay check box.
Now go to the radiation tab. The overlay is now displayed
as the background picture to the isopleth as shown below.
2-47
2-48
Using Overlays
Figure 2-23, Isopleth with Overlay
10.
Save the case as Ex4 - Offshore - Flaresim Overlay. The

overlay file we have created will be automatically saved in
the Flaresim case folder (i.e. Ex4 - Offshore - Flaresim
Overlay) with the file extension .fso.
2.4.2 Onshore Case - External Overlay File

The other method of displaying an overlay with your isopleth plots
is to link to an external graphics file. The best type of background
drawing to import is a scaled vector drawing i.e. a Windows metafile
(.wmf) or enhanced metafile (.emf). Bitmap files (.bmp, .png and
.jpg files) can also be used. Given that the locations of the stacks etc.
in your Flaresim model are matched to the drawing on import, the
isopleths will be correctly positioned in relation to the drawing.
The following example is based on the onshore example and shows
how to import the plot plan of our facility as a .bmp file and integrate
it with the radiation isopleths.
1.
2-48

icon. In the File
Open dialog that appears, browse to the [Public Documents]/Softbits\Flaresim 4.0 folder. Select the file "Ex3 Shields - Structure.fsw" and click the Open button.
Getting Started
2.
We know that the drawing represents an area 400m long and

300m wide of our facility. The base of the "LP Flare" is
located at the origin in the Flaresim model (0m, 0m). In the
drawing this is 247.8m North and 179.2m East from the left
bottom corner that we will assume is at 0m North and 0m
East.
3.
Open the Plot Overlay tab of "Grid @ Head Height", ensure

the Details radio button is selected in the External File
Details section and enter the following values:
2-49
File Dimensions
Northing Minimum = 0m
Northing Maximum = 300m
Easting Minimum = 0m
Easting Maximum = 400m
Location of Flaresim Origin in File
Northing = 247.8m
Easting = 179.2m
4.
Click the Browse button to import the background graphics

file. The file to import is called Plot Plan.bmp and is located
in the Samples\Ex4 - Onshore - External Overlay folder.
You will need to select "Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)" in the
"Files of Type" drop down in the File Open view to select
this. Click Ok.
You can now click the Preview File radio button to see the
imported graphic file together, with a blue outline rectangle
which shows the extents of the current grid on the drawing.
5.
Reselect the Details radio button and make sure the Show
Overlay check box is enabled. Hit the Calculate button and
move to the Radiation tab. You should see your overlay
displayed together with the isopleths as shown below.
2-49
2-50
Using Overlays
Figure 2-24, Onshore Case - External Overlay File
6.
Save the case as Ex4 - Onshore - External Overlay.
The key aspects to the success of this process is the accurate

understanding of the dimensions of the overlay file and the location
of the flare stack within it. So for example if it was known that the
Plot Plan bitmap covers the dimensions 150m to 450m N and 100m
to 500m E, then the flare stack would be at 397.8m N and 279.2m E
and this is the information that must be entered.
Be aware that if there is white space surrounding the drawing, this
forms part of the drawing and its extent must be included in the
drawing dimensions and the determination of the flare stack
location.
2-50
Getting Started
2-51
2.5 Case Study

A new feature of Flaresim 4.0 is the ability to define one or more
case study objects. These allow the selection of input variables and
definition of alternate input values. A list of key result variables is
also selected. When the case is calculated, each case study will be
run, automatically updating the model with the different input data
values and recording the key result variables selected. The results
showing their variation with changes in input values are then
available as a table or as a plot.
Two types of Case study can be defined: discrete variable studies
based on single input values and incremental variables studies based
on the variation in input values over a range. Examples of both types
are given here.
2.5.1 Offshore Case - Discrete Variable Case

Study
In this example a discrete variable case study will be added to the
offshore example to compare the performance of the base case
design under different design assumptions and wind direction.
1.
Open the case Ex4 - Offshore - Flaresim Overlay.fsw
which can be found in [Public Documents]/Softbits/
Flaresim 4.0/Samples.
This case is configured for running the welltest burner calculations and needs reconfiguring for rating calculations on
the main stack
2.
Select the Stack called Welltest Boom in the Case

Navigator and click the Ignore button.
3.
Open the view for Stack 1. Clear the check box labelled
Size this Stack and set the stack length to 90 ft, the final
size calculated in the Ex1 sizing example. Finally, clear the
Ignored check box to activate calculations for the stack.
2-51
2-52
Case Study
4.
Select the Shield called Water Curtain in the Case

Navigator and click the Ignore button.
5.
Run the case and open the Receptor Points summary view
to confirm that the radiation values for the Stack Base and
Helideck are 1494 and 574 btu/h/ft2 respectively.
6.
Click the Case Studies branch in the Case Navigator and

click the Add button. In the Case Study view that opens,
ensure that the Study Type radio button Study Discrete
Variables is selected. Enter a name for the case study as
Radiation Case Study.
7.
Click the Add Variable button. In the variable browser

window that appears, select the following options in the
Select Variable view as shown below.
Object = Environment
Name = Environment 1
Variable = Wind Direction
Then click the Add button
Figure 2-25, Case Study Variable Selection
8.
2-52
The variable browser will stay open. Select two more

variables as follows, clicking the Add button after each one.
Getting Started
2-53
Variable = Use Solar Radiation
Variable = Transmissivity Method
After selecting the final variable click the Cancel button to
close the Variable select view
9.
Click the Add Case button 4 times. The discrete variable

input grid will now have 5 rows, all set to the current model
values for the variables selected. Edit the input values for
each case to read
Wind
Direction
Case
Use Solar
Radiation
Transmissivity
Method
Case 0
No
User Specified
Case 1
Yes
User Specified
Case 2
No
CalcNoLimits
Case 3
Yes
CalcNoLimits
Case 4
90.0
No
User Specified
10.
Select the Case description entries one by one and edit the
default name (Case 0 etc) to more descriptive names:
Base Case
inc Solar
inc Transmissivity
inc Solar + Trans
Cross Wind
11.
Select the Result Variables tab and click the Add Variable
button. Using the Select Variable view that appears, select
the following two variables
2-53
2-54
Case Study
Object = Receptor Point

Name = Stack Base
Variable = Radiation
Name = Helideck
Finally close the Select Variable view.
12.
At this point the status display for the Case Study should
indicate that it is ready to calculate. Click the Calculate
button. Check in the status panel that the Case Study
calculations have run. If not, check that they are enabled in
the Calculation Options view.
13.
Open the Results tab of the Case Study view to see the
summary of the input values used and the corresponding
radiation values calculated. This table can be exported to
Excel or a .CSV file by clicking the Export button for easy
inclusion in a report.
14.
Click the Plots tab. In the Variables grid, select the two
radiation results variables by clicking the check boxes
adjacent to them. Select the variable name cells and edit
them to shorter names:
Stack Base
Helideck
2-54
15.
In the Cases grid select all the cases. A bar chart allowing
comparison of the results will be generated. Expand this as
required to allow the full name of the cases to be displayed.
The generated plot is shown in Figure 2-26 below
16.
Note it is possible to display the bar chart horizontally by

clicking the Horizontal Chart check box. This can provide a
more readable plot when multiple cases with longer names
must be displayed.
Getting Started
17.
2-55
Save the case as Ex5 - Offshore Casestudy - Discrete

Variables.
Figure 2-26, Radiation Case Study Plot
2.5.2 Onshore Case - Incremental Variable Case

Study
In this example we will extend the onshore model to use a Case
Study with an incremental variable. This generates a downwind line
plot of radiation vs distance at personnel head height.
1.
Open the case Ex4 - Onshore - External Overlay.fsw
which can be found in [Public Documents]/Softbits/
2.
The first step is to add a new receptor point at 0m Northing

and 2m of elevation (head height). This is the starting point
of the radiation downwind line plot. Enter the following
data:
2-55
2-56
Case Study
Name = Receptor Downwind

Northing = 0m
Easting = 0m
Elevation = 2m
All other fields may be left at their default values. Close the
view.
3.
Add a Case Study object, either by clicking the Case Studies

branch in the Case Navigator view and then the Add button,
or by using the Add - Case Study menu option according to
your preference.
4.
Enter data in the Input Variables tab of the new Case Study
view as follows:
Name = Rad. vs Dist. DW @ Head Height
Study Type = Study Incremental Values
5.
To add a new variable click on <Click to select Variable> or

alternatively hit the Add Variable button. In the Select
Variable view choose:
Variable = Location Northing
Click the OK button.
6.
Enter these values below to customise the plot range and

number of points for the x axis - distance:
Active = Yes
Minimum Value = -200m
Maximum Value = 0m
Number of Points = 21
Note that the Step size will be automatically updated to
10m. Alternatively a Step Size can be specified and the
Number of Points will be calculated.
2-56
Getting Started
7.
2-57
Move to Result Variables tab and add a new variable by

either clicking on <Click to select Variable> or hitting the
Add Variable button. In the Select Variable view choose:
Click the OK button. The Status bar change to green indicating that the object is ready to run.
8.
Before running the case we will ignore the Workshop shield

since it is not relevant now. This will speed up the
calculations. Run the case from the main Calculate button.
9.
The calculated profile of radiation vs distance downwind

the flare stack centre line is displayed on the Results tab
table.
10.
Finally move to the Plots tab and select the Receptor

Downwind: Location Northing as the X variable and
Receptor Downwind: Radiation as the Result variable. to
generate the plot.
11.
Double click on the variable descriptions and edit the text to

shorter values such as Downwind Distance for the Xvariable and Radiation for the result variable. The final
plot is shown as Figure 2-27 below.
12.
Save the case as Ex5 - Onshore Case study - Incremental

Variables.
2-57
2-58
Case Study
Figure 2-27, Downwind Radiation Plot
2-58
Getting Started
2.6
2-59
Dynamics
Flaresim 4.0 includes a new feature that allows dynamic calculations

of flare system results. A curve of flow against time for each tip may
be defined and results generated for the defined receptor points
which show how radiation, temperature and noise vary with time.
Dynamic analysis is particularly useful when considering systems
that have more than one tip flaring and when the peak flows to each
tip are not occurring at the same time.
2.6.1 Offshore Case

Analysis of the Case Study results for the offshore case in section
3.5.1 showed that inclusion of solar radiation caused the radiation
limits at the stack base to be exceeded. Inclusion of the calculated
transmissivity option reduced the extent to which the limit was
exceeded but the results still show a value of 1605 btu/h/ft2 as
against the original design limit of 1500 btu/h/ft2.
In our original design we neglected solar radiation on the
assumption that the flaring duration is short. We will now use
dynamic analysis to test this assumption and see for how long the
radiation limit is exceeded with these new environmental
assumptions.
1.
Open the case Ex5 - Offshore Casestudy - Discrete Variables.fsw from the folder [Public Documents]/Softbits/
2.
Open the Case Study object Radiation Case Study and

move to the Results tab. Double click on the row in the table
labelled inc Solar + Trans. A pop-up window will appear
asking you to confirm that you wish to copy the values for
this case to the main model. Click Ok.
3.
Open the view for Environment 1. Confirm that the Wind

Direction is 0, the Include Solar Radiation check box is
ticked and the Transmissivity method is set to
CalcNoLimits.
2-59
2-60
Dynamics
4.
Click the Calculate button. Open the Stack Base receptor

point and confirm that the radiation is 1605 but/h/ft2.
5.
Open the tip view Sonic Tip and click the

open its Tip Dynamics view.
6.
Enter the following flow against time for this tip on the
Input Data tab.
button to
Flow Basis = Mass

Interpolation Basis = Linear.
Time s
Flow lb/hr
0
0.0
5.0
90,000.0
10.0
90,000.0
60.0
66,000.0
100.0
44,000.0
300.0
11,000.0
900.0
0.0
Note the table will have a single blank row at the start.
Additional rows will be added automatically as you enter
the data. If you miss a row, it can be added at the end of the
table; the data supplied will be sorted into time order when
the case is calculated.
7.
Open the tip view for Pipe Tip, click the

button to
open its dynamics view and define the following data.
Flow Basis = Mass
Interpolation Basis = Linear.
2-60
Getting Started
Time s
8.
2-61
Flow lb/hr
0
0.0
20.0
0.0
30.0
10,000.0
50.0
10,000.0
300.0
2,200.0
900.0
2,200.0
You are now ready to run the case with the dynamics
calculation options. Open the Calculation Options view and
ensure the Run Dynamics check box is selected.
Click the Calculate button
9.
When the calculations are complete, check the Errors /

Warnings log. You should see entries indicating the start and
completion of dynamics calculations.
10.
Open the Stack Base receptor point and click the

button to open the receptor point dynamic view. On the
Results tab, check the radiation levels. The peak value is
1536 btu/h/ft2 at 30 s.
11.
Open the Tips Summary view by double-clicking the Tip

branch header in the Case Navigator. Select the Dynamics
results tab and to see the flow vs. time profile for both tips.
Select the Mach number option to confirm that the flow
through the Sonic tip. This is due to the Calculate burner
opening option being active for the Sonic tip. This is
appropriate for a variable slot sonic tip design but will not
apply to all tips.
12.
The default time resolution for our dynamics results is a

little coarse at 10 s intervals. Open the Calculation Options
view and select the Heat Transfer tab.
2-61
2-62
Dynamics
Change the Dynamics Exposure Time to 200s and the

number of points to 200. This will allow analysis of the initial period of flaring at 1 s intervals.
Click the Calculate button.
13.
The Stack Base dynamic results now show that the

radiation limit of 1500 btu/h/ft2 is exceeded for the period
29s to 40s.
14.
Select the Receptor Points summary view by double

clicking on the Receptor Points branch header in the Case
Navigator. Select the Dynamic Results tab to see a summary
of all the receptor point results as they vary with time as
tables or plots. The radiation plot is shown below.
Figure 2-28, Dynamic Radiation Results
These results show how the radiation rises and then begins
dropping as the flow to the sonic tip passes its peak at
around 20 s. The radiation then rises again as the flow from
the pipe tip rises.
2-62
Getting Started
2-63
The dynamic analysis has shown that the peak radiation values are of short duration. However any decision as to
whether the total radiation experienced would be acceptable
should consider the full duration of the flaring event. For
example, the plot above shows radiation values at the Stack
Base remaining above 1000 btu/h/ft2 for approx 170 s.
15.
Still in the Receptor Points Summary view, select the

Temperature result. The curves show that the temperature is
continuing to rise at the end of the exposure time (200s).
16.
To see the peak temperatures, open the Calculation Options

view and select the Heat Transfer tab. Change the Dynamics
Exposure Time to 800s. Then recalculate.
17.
Inspecting the temperature results in the Receptor Points

Summary view now shows that a peak in temperatures is
reached around the 190s to 240s period.
Figure 2-29, Receptor Point Summary, Peak Temperature Results
18.
Save the case as Ex6 - Offshore Dynamics.
2-63
2-64
Gas Dispersion
2.7 Gas Dispersion

Flaresim includes two types of gas dispersion model intended for
two different types of analysis
A jet dispersion calculation models dispersion of flared
fluid close to the tip, to identify the potential for dangerous
gas concentrations in flame out conditions.
A Gaussian dispersion calculation models dispersion of
flared fluid or combustion products over longer distances.
The aim of this section is to illustrate how to use each of these
models.
2.7.1 Objective and Data

A new case with the following data will be used.
Flared Fluid
Methane
Ethane
H2S
Temperature
Ref Pressure
Flow
0.9 mole frac

0.08 mole frac
0.02 mole frac
75 C
1.013 bar a
50000 kg/hr
Mechanical Data
Tip Type
Tip diameter
Tip length
Stack location
Stack length
Stack orientation
Pipe
387.4mm (15.25in)
1m
At origin, 0, 0, 0
20m
Vertical
Environment Data
Temperature
Wind
2-64
15 C
10 m/s from North
Getting Started
2-65
Our objective will be to analyse the gas dispersion around the flare
in normal operation and flame out conditions.
2.7.2 Load or Create Base Case

1.
If you wish to build the case from scratch then, either select
the File - New menu option, or click the
icon in the tool
bar. The Setup Wizard will appear.
Select the European units set on the opening page for easy
of entering the remaining data. Work through the Fluid, Tip,
Environment and Stack tabs entering the data defined
above. Once you have entered the Stack data, you can click
the Finish button to accept the default data for Receptors
and Calculation options. Skip to step 3.
2.

icon.
sub-folder in the Flaresim installation folder (usually
[Public Documents]\Softbits\Flaresim 4.0) select the file
Ex7- Starter.fsw and click the Open button.
2.7.3 Jet Dispersion Calculation

In this exercise we run a jet dispersion study to study the flammable
gas concentrations around the flare in the event of a flame out.
3.
Before enabling the jet dispersion calculations, we will

create a new Receptor Grid to see the results more clearly.
Select the Receptor Grid branch in the Case Navigator and
click the Add button. In the new view enter the following
data.
Name = Elevation
Grid Plane = Elevation-Northing
Grid Offset = 0m
Elevation Minimum = -100m
Elevation Maximum = 300m
2-65
2-66
Gas Dispersion
Northing Minimum = -300m

Leave remaining values at defaults.
4.
Open the Calculation Options view by selecting it in the

Case Navigator and clicking the view button. Select the
check box labelled Jet Dispersion in the Include Options
section of the General Tab.
Click the Calculate button. The background of the Errors/
Warnings log will be yellow indicating a warning message.
Checking this it warns of the jet interacting with the ground
at a distance of 2152m. This is not a problem.
5.
Return to the view for your Elevation receptor grid and

select the Concentrations tab. You should see a result that
looks something like that shown below.
Figure 2-30, Jet Dispersion Initial Result
2-66
Getting Started
2-67
The jet dispersion calculation shows the concentrations of

the flare fluid in the event of a flame out and is useful for
establishing the regions in which a flammable gas concentration may be obtained.
At first sight, the result above looks unrealistic since the
concentration isopleths do not appear connected to the flare
tip. This is a function of the limited number of points calculated in the default grid.
6.
In your Elevation grid view, go to the Extent tab and set the
number of calculated points to 51 for both Elevation and
Northing dimensions. Click the Calculate button again.
Return to the Concentrations tab and you should see a more
accurate result. Save the case as Ex7 - Jet Dispersion.fsw.
2.7.4 Gaussian Dispersion, Contour Plot

In this exercise we will study the dispersion of H2S from the flare
tip in the event of a flame out.
7.
Create a Dispersion Object by selecting the Dispersion

branch in the Case Navigator and clicking the Add button.
In the Dispersion view enter the following data on the Input
Data tab as shown below.
Name = H2S Contour
Pollutant Source = Unburnt Flared Fluid
Calculation Type = Contour Plot
Contours Height = 0m
Easting Minimum = -500m
Number of points, Northing and Easting = 41
8.
On the Pollutant Data tab, select the H2S component only.

For a contour plot, only one component can be selected.
2-67
2-68
Gas Dispersion
9.
Open the Calculation Options view and select the Gaussian

Dispersion check box to enable these calculations.
Click the Calculate button
10.
Select the Results tab and then the Plot option for the
display. The plot shows the ground level concentration
contours for H2S downwind of the stack as shown below
Figure 2-31, H2S Contour Plot
11.
2-68
The results shown have been calculated at the default

environmental conditions. Atmospheric stability is
characterised as Class D with dispersion coefficients
applicable to Rural terrain around the flare. Open the
Environment view at the Dispersion Data tab and test the
effect on the dispersion results as you change the Atm.
Stability class from A (most turbulent) to F (most stable)
and the effect of changing the terrain from Rural to Urban.
Getting Started
2-69
You will see that the H2S concentrations are higher closer to
the flare when atmosphere is more turbulent and when
urban terrain classification is used. The sensitivity of the
results to these parameters shows the necessity of selecting
the appropriate environment settings for your particular
flare location.
Save the case as Ex7 - Gaussian Dispersion - Contour.fsw
2.7.5 Gaussian Dispersion, Line Plot

In this exercise we will consider the downwind concentrations of
pollutants in the combustion gases of the flare when it is operating.
12.
In the Case Navigator select the Dispersion branch and click

Add to create a new dispersion object. In the Input Data tab
of its view enter the following data.
Name = Combustion Emissions
Pollutant Source = Combustion Gas
Calculation Type = Downwind Line Plot
Line through Point = Origin
Height for Calculation = 0m
Downwind Distance Minimum = 0m
Downwind Distance Maximum = 10000m
Number of points = 41
13.
Select the Pollutant tab. Select the SO2, NO, CO and

Methane pollutants for calculation by checking the box
alongside these components.
Some of the components in this list, the CO2, H2O, SO2 are
calculated directly from combustion of the components in
the flared gas. The Fluid view, Combustion Results tab
shows the stoichiometric fraction of each of these components generated by combustion of the flared gas.
The remaining components, NOx (assumed as NO), CO and
unburnt hydrocarbon (assumed as CH4) are calculated as
typical emissions resulting from hydrocarbon combustion.
2-69
2-70
Gas Dispersion
The quantities of each component generated is calculated by

default, using the global basis defined on the Calculation
Option view Emissions tab. Alternatively in Expert Mode,
the emissions basis for each Tip can be specified on the
Emissions tab of the Tip view.
The quantities of each component in the combustion gases
for each Tip are displayed on the Combustion Results tab of
the Tip view.
14.
Since the dispersion of the combustion gases will be

dependent on the flame temperature, we will now set this.
Open the Tip View and select the Fluids tab. At the bottom
of this view you may input a value for the flame
temperature or clear the specified value to allow it to be
calculated from the specified combustion air ratio.
Set the Combustion Air ratio to 3.0 and clear the specified
flame temperature.
15.
Open the Environment view and set the Atm. Stability Class
to PasquillB.
Click the Calculate button.
16.
Return to the Combustion Gas Results tab of the Tip view to

see the calculated flame temperature of 721 C and the
combustion gas compositions.
In the Combustion Gas dispersion view, go to the results
page and select the plot result to view the results as shown
below. The peak concentration of SO2 is calculated at 67
g/m3 at a distance of approximately 1500m downwind of
the flare tip.
2-70
Getting Started
2-71
Figure 2-32, Combustion Gas Dispersion Downwind Plot Results
17.
As in the previous example, open the Environment view to

the Dispersion Data tab and test the effect of changing the
Atm. Stability Class and Terrain class settings. You will find
that for stable atmospheric conditions, stability classes E
and F, the emission concentrations are still rising at the
maximum downwind distance we have defined (10,000m).
If you wish you can increase the maximum downwind distance on the Input Data tab to calculate the results further
downwind.
Save the case as Ex7 - Gaussian Dispersion - Downwind.fsw
2.7.6 Dispersion Analysis Comments

It is worth making the following general comments on the dispersion
analysis capabilities of Flaresim.
2-71
2-72
Gas Dispersion
The jet dispersion analysis for flammable gas concentrations is

based on the Cleaver & Edwards jet dispersion model. This is
regarded as a reasonable model for concentrations close to the
source. However it does assume dispersion in free air and does not
consider the effect of structures that might modify dispersion
patterns and lead to higher concentrations of flammable gas than
predicted by Flaresim. A more detailed analysis with specialised
software would be required in these situations.
The Gaussian dispersion calculation for combustion gases and flared
fluid over longer distances, is a simpler theoretical model that does
not include detailed terrain effects. As such it should be considered
as suitable for screening calculations to indicate a possible need for
more detailed analysis. Chapter 11 has additional comments on the
implementation of the Gaussian dispersion model in Flaresim.
2-72
Getting Started
2-73
2.8 KO Drum
This tutorial shows how to design a new KO Drum using the sizing
mode. We will then adjust this preliminary design to fit the
manufacturer available sizes and run a rating calculation to confirm
this new design meets the sizing criteria.
2.8.1 Initial Sizing

In this section we will calculate the required vessel dimensions
(length and diameter) to separate liquid droplets larger than 300m
from the gas stream. The drum will also have to provide sufficient
volume to accommodate a 30 min emergency release. The vessel
will be horizontal with Ellipsoidal (2:1 elliptical) heads.
1.
Use the File - New menu option or the

new case. Close the Wizard view.
icon to create a
2.
Add a KO Drum object, either by clicking the KO Drums

branch in the Case Navigator view and then the Add button,
or by using the Add - KO Drum menu option according to
your preference.
3.
Enter this information in the Fluid Data tab:

Name = KO Drum - Prelim.
Gas Mass Flow = 75000 kg/h
Liquid Mass Flow = 15000 kg/h
Pump Out Mass Flow = 0 kg/h
Fluid Property Source = User Specified
Gas Density = 3 kg/m3
Gas Viscosity = 0.01 cP
Liquid Density = 500 kg/m3
Note that the fluid properties can also be calculated from a
specified fluid composition using the REFPROP thermo
package.
2-73
2-74
KO Drum
4.
Move to the Vessel Data tab and change the Initial Liquid
level to 15% (this accounts for the slop and drain volume).
Leave the other fields at their default values.
Note that either L/D or diameter can be specified. The
former is more common in new designs.
5.
Now open the Nozzle Data view to input:

Inlet Nozzle
Use Nominal Diameter = No
Design Velocity = 10 m/s
Schedule = STD
Outlet Nozzle
Use Nominal Diameter = No
Design Velocity = 20 m/s
Schedule = STD
Note Nominal Diameter automatically changes to <Not
Set> when the Use Nominal Diameter option is set to No.
Normally the KO Drum nozzles are sized to meet velocity
constraints. The values used here are based on common
engineering practises. Alternatively the nozzle diameter can
also be specified.
6.
Go back to the Vessel Data tab and click on the Calculate

button at the bottom of the KO Drum view. This option
allows generating results for the KO Drum object without
the need of calling the main calculations. Another local
Calculate button can be found under the Fluid Data tab.
Although we are creating a case containing only KO Drum
objects, it is possible to add KO Drum objects to any
Flaresim model. KO Drum calculations are also performed
when running the case from the general Calculate button.
7.
2-74
The drum dimensions are displayed in the Vessel Data view.

Now move to the Results tab to inspect the Operating and
Separation output data. Flaresim has sized a vessel of 2.45m
Getting Started
2-75
in diameter and 7.35m in length in order to meet the

constraints: 300m droplet size and sufficient holdup to
accommodate the volume during a 30 min emergency relief.
The resulting liquid level of 48.5% is below the 75% limit
which indicates that the particle size is the controlling
constraint in this initial design.
2.8.2 KO Drum Rating

Based on the manufacturer available sizes, we will now adjust the
initial design dimensions presented in the previous chapter and recalculate in rating mode to recheck if the new design still meets the
sizing criteria.
8.
Copy the existing KO Drum object and rename the new one
"KO Drum - Final".
9.
Move to the Vessel Data tab and select Rating in the

Calculation Type drop down. Note that the Vessel Input
Data section has changed to display the Rating parameters.
Input the following values:
Tan Tan Length = 7m
Diameter = 2.5m
Liquid Level = leave blank
Rest of fields as default
10.
Update the Nozzle Data as below:

Inlet Nozzle
Use Nominal Diameter = Yes
Outlet Nozzle
Use Nominal Diameter = Yes
When the Use Nominal Diameter option is set to Yes, any
existing Internal Diameter is used to set the Nominal diameter to the nearest available nominal size in the selected
schedule. The exit velocity is then updated.
2-75
2-76
KO Drum
In our case the inlet nozzle nominal diameter is selected as

38in and updated nozzle velocity is 9.9 m/s. For the outlet
nozzle the nominal diameter is 28in and the calculated
velocity is 18.5 m/s.
11.
Rerun the calculation from the local button in the Vessel

Data view. The minimum droplet size has increased slightly
to 319m whereas the liquid level remains at 48.5%
allowing an extra 25 min holdup. This new design presented
in Figure 2-33 is regarded as acceptable.
12.
Save the case as Ex8 - KO Drum
Figure 2-33, KO Drum Results
2-76
Interface
3-1
3 Interface
Page
3.1
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.2
Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.3
Multiple Case Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4
Tool Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.4.1
3.4.2
Main Window Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Case View Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5
Log Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.6
File Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
File Save Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

File Open Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recent Files Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Messages During File Open . . . . .
16
18
19
20
3.7
About View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.8
Radiation Limits View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.9
Flaresim Update View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3-1
3-2
3-2
Interface
3-3
The Flaresim interface has been designed to give you a great deal of
flexibility in the way in which you enter, modify and view the data
and results which comprise your flare models. This chapter
describes the various components of the Flaresim interface. If you
need help with any particular task, the on-line help can give you
step-by-step instructions.
3.1 Terminology
The following view of the Flaresim screen shows most of the
interface components that you will encounter.
Figure 3-1, Flaresim Screen
Popup menu
3-3
3-4
Terminology
Menu Bar
The menu bar provides access to various program functions that are
not specific to a particular Case. The options are described in more
detail in section 3.2.
Tool Bars
The tool bar is a row of icons that provide quick access to the more
commonly used program functions. Flaresim has one tool bar for the
main program and each Case has a tool bar with options specific to
it in the Case Navigator. The options are described in more detail in
section 3.4.
Throughout the manual,

Clicking a button or other item
means using the Left mouse
button unless stated otherwise.
Multiple Case Views

Flaresim 4.0 allows multiple individual cases to be open at once for
easier comparison and switching between different models. The
multiple case views are managed using standard Windows
conventions. Case Views may be expanded to full screen if required.
Case Navigator
The Case Navigator provides a summary view of all of the objects
in a Flaresim Case displayed in a tree structure. It also provides a
local tool bar of program options that are specific to the case as well
as buttons to access various program functions such as adding,
deleting, copying, viewing, activating and ignoring objects as well
as starting calculations.
Active Button
Buttons appear on most forms and may be clicked with the left
mouse button to perform the action indicated. Active buttons are
those where the label type is black.
Greyed Button
Buttons which have an action that cannot be performed at a
particular time are displayed with the label type in grey.
File Message Log
This area of the Case View displays a record of file saving and
retrieval activity. See section 3.5 for more information.
3-4
Interface
3-5
Errors / Warnings Log

This area of the screen displays a record of error messages, warning
messages and other information generated by Flaresim calculations.
See section 3.5 for more information.
PopUp Menu
PopUp menus are used to display additional choices in response to
clicking buttons or clicking the right mouse button.
View
This is the term used to describe a window containing a group of
data entry fields for a specific element of the program. Views in
Flaresim are generally non-modal which means that multiple views
can be open and used at the same time.
Views may be resized, minimised, maximised and moved within the
Flaresim Case View in the same way as standard windows.
Status Text
Many views have a status field at the bottom to indicate whether all
the necessary entries have been made. The background to this text
indicates the status, green indicates ready to calculate, red indicates
missing data, yellow indicates that the object is ignored.
Tabs
Some views have more data entry items than will fit on a typical size
window. Tabs are a way of subdividing the entries into groups
within the view. Clicking a tab heading displays the group.
Input Tables
The majority of data for Flaresim cases is entered through Input
Tables. These group together related items which may either be
values with associated units, drop down selection menus, check
boxes or simple text. Generally the values entered will be checked
for validity on leaving each cell in the Table.
Value With Units
Input items with associated engineering units are entered through a
pair of Input Table cells, the first defining the unit, the second the
value.
3-5
3-6
Terminology
The units initially displayed by an Input Table are the default units
defined through the Preferences View, see section 4.4. The current
units for an individual value can be reselected at any time to display
the value converted to that unit. The current displayed unit will be
used to convert any number input to the internal units used by
Flaresim. When an Input Table is completely refreshed e.g.
following a calculation, the default units will be displayed again.
This allows values to be entered in a mixture of units.
For example in a field expecting a wind speed value when the
default unit display is ft/s you can enter a value of 20 mph by first
changing the displayed unit to mph and then entering the value of
20. The displayed unit will be reset to ft/s and the converted value
of 29.33 ft/s will be displayed when the Input Table is next
refreshed.
All new values are checked as they are entered to ensure that they lie
between minimum and maximum values. The range limits used are
intended to prevent entry of unreasonable values that would cause
calculations failures but are relatively broad to allow maximum
flexibility in the use of Flaresim. The fact that any given value falls
within the range allowed by Flaresim does not mean that the value
is appropriate for any given calculation - the validity of the values
entered is the responsibility of the user.
Drop Down List Box
This type of edit box provides a downward pointing arrow to the
right which may be clicked to allow a choice to be made from a set
of options.
Check Box
A check box is used to select options that can be either on or off.
Clicking a check box once will display a tick in the box indicating
that the option is on, also known as setting the check box. Clicking
the box again will clear the tick indicating that the option is off.
Radio Buttons
Radio buttons are used to select one option from a group of mutually
exclusive options. Clicking one radio button in a group will select
that option and automatically deselect all the other options.
3-6
Interface
3-7
Scroll Bars
Where a list or a view is not large enough to display all the items
required scroll bars will appear. The up and down arrows may be
clicked to move through the view to display all the items.
3-7
3-8
Menu Bar
3.2 Menu Bar

Figure 3-2, Menu Bar
The Menu Bar provides access to the Flaresim program actions. The
row of main menu items at the top of the main Flaresim window
provides access to drop down menus as shown in Figure 3-2.
Main menu items are selected by clicking on them or by holding
down the Alt key and first letter of the menu name. Once the submenu has opened the sub-menu items can be selected by clicking
them or by using the up and down arrow keys and then hitting enter.
Menu items may also have a shortcut key combination displayed
against them which can be used to select the action without using the
menu.
Flaresim provides the following menu items.
3-8
Interface
Main Menu
File
Windows
Sub Menu
3-9
Description
New
Creates a new Flaresim case
Open
Loads a Flaresim case from disk
Save Case
Save current selected case
Save As
Open save file dialog to save current selected

case with a new name.
Save All
Saves all open cases to disk
Print Report
Create report for current selected case
Select
Graphic
Report
Printer
Display printer dialog to select the printer

that will be used to output graphic reports.
Selection will be remembered if appropriate
option is set in Preferences.
Graphic
Report Page
Settings
Displays dialog to select page size and margins for graphic report output.
Print
Graphic
Report
Open graphic report view for current selected

case.
Preferences
Opens the Preferences view
Exit
Quits the Flaresim program
Recent files
List of recently opened files that can be reopened directly by selecting the name.
New
Window
Creates a new Flaresim case
Cascade
Organises the open case views into a cascade

of overlapped windows
Tile Vertical
Organises the open case views into a set of

side by side windows
Tile
Horizontal
Organises the open case views into a set of

stacked windows
Close All
Close all case views
3-9
3-10
Menu Bar
Main Menu
Help
3-10
Sub Menu
Description
Arrange
Icons
Organises icons for minimised case icons
Open
Windows
List of currently open case views
Contents
Opens Flaresim help file at contents page
Index
Opens Flaresim help file at index
Search
Opens Flaresim help file in search mode
Radiation
Limits Info
Displays an information window showing

common radiation design limits
Technical
Support
Displays information on sources of technical

support
Check For
Updates
Checks whether an update to the current version is available
About
Version information about Flaresim
Interface
3-11
3.3 Multiple Case Views

Flaresim 4.0 allows multiple cases to be open at once. Each case will
have its own view window that will be contained within the main
Flaresim window. A new case can be created at any time using the
File - New menu item or by clicking the
tool bar button. A an
existing case opened by using the File - Open menu item or clicking
the
tool bar button.
Once open an individual Case View can be minimised, maximised
or closed using the standard set of window control buttons display in
the top right of the window.
Clicking the
button of this set minimises the case view to just
an icon at the bottom of the Flaresim view. In the icon view the left
button changes to
and clicking this restores the case view to
its previous size. Clicking the
button maximises the case view
to the full size of the Flaresim window, covering any other case
views that might be open. Again the button will be replaced by a
button and clicking this will restore the standard window size.
Finally the
button will close the case.
The Preferences view, Files and Options tab includes an option
which controls whether new cases and freshly opened cases are
automatically display at the maximised size.
The Windows menu (see above) provides a list of the currently open
cases and allows rapid switching between them. It also provides
options for arranging the case view windows on the screen.
3-11
3-12
Tool Bars
3.4 Tool Bars

A Tool Bar provides a row of icons that may be clicked to provide
rapid access to some commonly used actions. Flaresim has tool bars
in both the main Flaresim window and the Case Views.
3.4.1 Main Window Tool Bar

Flaresim provides these options on the main window Tool Bar.
This icon creates a new Flaresim case.
This icon retrieves a Flaresim case from disk.
This icon saves the current selected case. If the case has an
name and has already been saved it will be overwritten. If it
is a new case a File - Save As dialog will open. A message
indicating success or failure will be written to the File
Management Log.
This icon saves the current selected case with a new name. A
File - Save As dialog will open to allow the file name to be
specified. A message indicating success or failure will be
written to the File Management Log.
This icon saves all open Flaresim cases to the disk.
This icon opens the Report View for the current selected case
and to allow printing of the case.
This icon opens the Print Graphic Report View to allows
selection, saving or printing of the graphic reports for the
current selected case.
This icon opens the Preferences view.
3-12
Interface
3-13
3.4.2 Case View Tool Bar

Flaresim provides the following options on the Case View tool bar
at the top of the Case Navigator.
This large button starts the calculations for the case. Once
started, the button displays a progress bar for the
calculations. On completion the background colour shows
the status of the calculation results, green for success, red for
failure. A pale orange background indicates that data has
changed since the last calculation.
This icon opens a drop down menu offering a list of objects
that can be added to the case. It is equivalent to selecting the
object type branch in the Navigator tree view and clicking
the Add button.
This icon saves the case. If the case has an name and has
already been saved it will be overwritten. If it is a new case
a File - Save As dialog will open. A message indicating
success or failure will be written to the File Management
Log.
This icon saves the case with a new name. A File - Save As
dialog will open to allow the file name to be specified. A
message indicating success or failure will be written to the
File Management Log.
This icon opens the Report View to allow selection of the
print options for the case and to allow printing of the case.
case.
3-13
3-14
Tool Bars
This icon collapses the Case Navigator into a summary view

that consists of a vertical tool bar.
This icon stops the calculations. It is only visible while
calculations are running.
Vertical tool bar buttons in the Case Navigator summary are the
same as in the standard Case Navigator with the following additions.
This icon expands the Case Navigator to its normal size.
This icon starts the calculations for the case. The colour of
the tool bar background indicates the case status, green for
calculated with results available and pale orange for not
calculated.
This icon displays a pop up menu of the objects in the current
case. Selecting an object will display its view.
3-14
Interface
3-15
3.5 Log Panels

Figure 3-3, Log Panels
The log panels at the bottom of the Flaresim main window are used
to output messages from the program. There are two panels.
The left panel is known as the File Message Log and records details
of file creation, file retrieval and file saving actions.
The right panel is known as the Errors/Warnings Log and records
messages generated by Flaresim as it calculates. Once calculations
are complete the background colour of the panel shows the
calculation status: Green - Calculations completed without problems
Yellow - Calculations completed with warnings
Red - Calculations failed.
The size of the log panels can be set by moving the cursor to the top
boundary of the panels or the boundary between the panels. At the
point where the cursor changes to a pair of resizing arrows, the left
mouse button may be clicked and dragged to resize the panel.
Both panels provide a popup menu with local options that can be
opened by clicking the right mouse button. The popup menu
provides the following options:
Clear - clears all messages from the log.
Save Messages - displays a standard file dialog to allow the current
message list to be saved to an external log file.
3-15
3-16
File Dialogs
3.6 File Dialogs

Flaresim uses standard Windows file dialogs to save and retrieve
files.
3.6.1 File Save Dialog

The File Save Dialog appears when you select the File - Save As
menu item or the File - Save menu item or Save tool bar icon for an
unnamed case. The dialog also appears when you click the Export
button or Save button on other Flaresim views e.g. to export results
data from Receptor Grid views.
Figure 3-4, File Save Dialog
The main elements on this Dialog are:

Filename
Combo box
Allows you to enter the name of the file to save the Flaresim model
to. As you type the name, the drop down list element of the combo
3-16
Interface
3-17
box allows you to select an existing file that matches the name to
overwrite if you wish.
The file name entered will be given the extension type specified in
the Save As Type field unless you enter a different file extension.
Save As Type
Drop down List of allowed file types
Allows you to select the required file type.
File Description
Model Files
Allowed Types
Flaresim for Windows files .FSW
XML data files .XML
Table Export
Comma separated value files .CSV

Excel files .XLS
Graphics Export
JPEG files .JPG

Portable network graphic files .PNG
Windows bitmap files .BMP
Windows meta files .WMF
Enhance windows meta files .EMF
Save In
Drop down List of available storage locations
Allows you to select from the list of available storage locations
configured for your computer system.
File List
List Box
Shows the files and folders in the current folder. The list may be
used to navigate the folder tree or to select files.
Folders can be opened and made the new current folder by double
clicking on them. You can move up the folder tree by clicking the
Previous Folder icon. New folders can be created by clicking the
New Folder icon and entering the new folder name in the File List.
3-17
3-18
File Dialogs
Files can be selected for overwriting by clicking on them.

Save
Button
Saves the file once you have entered the name or selected a file to
overwrite. If the file selected already exists you will be asked to
confirm that it should be overwritten.
Cancel
Button
Cancels the file save.
New Folder
Text Link
Creates a new sub-folder in the current folder. The folder will be
created with the default name New Folder and you will then be
able to rename as required.
3.6.2 File Open Dialog

The File Open Dialog appears when you select the File - Open menu
item or click the Open icon
on the tool bar.
3-18
Interface
3-19
Figure 3-5, File Open Dialog
The elements of this dialog are essentially the same as the File Save
Dialog with the exception that the Save button is replaced by an
Open button.
3.6.3 Recent Files Menu

The File Menu displays a list of recently used files which can be
used to re-open one of these files directly by selecting it from the
menu.
3-19
3-20
File Dialogs
Figure 3-6, Recent Files Menu
3.6.4 Update Messages During File Open

When opening a file from earlier versions of Flaresim it is possible
that the program will detect parameters that have changed in the
current version or detect results that will be changed as a result of
changes in the program. When this happens a dialog will be
displayed and the user will be asked to acknowledge the information
or possibly make a decision between a number of choices.
Further information on these dialogs can usually be found in the help
system by pressing F1.
3-20
Interface
3-21
3.7 About View

The About View is opened using the Help - About menu option.
Figure 3-7, About View
The purpose of this view is to provide information on the version of

the program that may be required when seeking Technical support.
Ok
Button
Closes the About view.
3-21
3-22
Radiation Limits View
3.8 Radiation Limits View

The Radiation Limits view is displayed using the Help - Radiation
Limits menu option.
Its purpose is to provide a quick guide to the most commonly
considered radiation limits in flare design.
Figure 3-8, Radiation Limits View
Close
Button
Closes the Radiation Limits view.
3-22
Interface
3-23
3.9 Flaresim Update View

The Flaresim Update view indicates whether an update to your
working version of Flaresim is available. It is opened using the Help
- Check For Update menu option.
Figure 3-9, Flaresim Update View
If your Flaresim version is up to date you will see the view shown
above. Otherwise if an update is available you will see release
information and links to allow you to download the latest version.
Ok
Button
Closes the Flaresim Update view.
3-23
3-24
3-24
Flaresim Update View
General Setup
4-1
4 General Setup
Page
4.1
Case Navigator View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.2
Case Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
Setup Wizard - Common Items . . . . . . . . .

Setup Wizard - Opening View . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Wizard - Fluid Page . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Wizard - Tip Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Wizard - Environment Page . . . . . .
Setup Wizard - Stack Page . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Wizard - Receptors Page . . . . . . . .
Setup Wizard - Calculations Page . . . . . .
12
14
15
19
21
23
25
27
Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.5
Case Description Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Active Case Study Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.4
Command Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Tool Bar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Tree Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Units Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Files & Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plots Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sterile Area Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
32
36
43
Component Management View . . . . . . . . . 45

4-1
General Setup
4-2
Page
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-4
Case Navigator View
4.1 Case Navigator View

The Case Navigator view, shown in Figure 4-1, provides a summary
view of the Flaresim model, showing the objects that have been
added to the model and their status. It also provides quick access to
any of the object views and enables objects to be added to and
deleted from the model.
Figure 4-1, Case Navigator View
The Case Navigator view shows the Flaresim model as a tree with
the branches showing the different types of object that make up the
model.
The Case Navigator is used by clicking a branch of the tree to select
it and then clicking one of the command buttons to perform that
action on the selected object. For example to open the Pipe Tip in
4-4
General Setup
4-5
navigator view displayed above, click Pipe Tip then click the View
button. A branch can also be double-clicked which will act the same
way as the View action.
If a branch with sub branches is double-clicked or Viewed it will
open a summary view for that object type if it is available. Summary
views are available for Environments, Stacks, Tips and Receptor
Points.
4.1.1 Command Buttons

The Case Navigator command buttons have the following
functions:Calculate
This button at the top of the Case Navigator view may be labelled
Click to Calculate, Rating Complete or Sizing Complete
depending on the current state of the case. It may be clicked at any
time to start calculations.
While the case is calculating the surface of the button changes to
show a progress bar indicating progress of the calculations.
Messages will also be output to the Error/Warnings Log as
calculations proceed.
View
Opens the view for the selected object to allow its data to be viewed
or updated.
Add
Creates a new object of the selected type and opens its view ready
for data input. If an existing object is selected in the tree rather than
the parent branch, a new object of the same type is created.
Activate
Clears the ignored status for the selected object which restores it to
the calculations. Not all objects can be ignored and restored and this
button will be greyed out if the action cannot be applied to the
selected object.
4-5
4-6
Case Navigator View
Ignore
Sets the ignored status for the selected object which means that it
will not be included in the calculations. Not all objects can be
ignored and restored and this button will be greyed out if the action
cannot be applied to the selected object.
Copy
A new object of the same type as the selected object will be created
and its contents set to the same values as the selected object. Not all
objects can be copied and this button will be greyed out if the action
cannot be applied to the selected object.
Delete
Deletes the selected object. No confirmation is required. Not all
objects can be deleted and this button will be greyed out if the
selected object is a permanent part of the case e.g. the Case
Description.
4.1.2 Tool Bar Buttons

The following buttons appear on the Case Navigator tool bar.
This icon opens a drop down menu offering a list of objects
that can be added to the case. It is equivalent to selecting the
object type branch in the Navigator tree view and clicking
the Add button.
This icon saves the case. If the case has an name and has
already been saved it will be overwritten. If it is a new case
a File - Save As dialog will open. A message indicating
success or failure will be written to the File Management
Log.
This icon saves the case with a new name. A File - Save As
dialog will open to allow the file name to be specified. A
message indicating success or failure will be written to the
File Management Log.
4-6
General Setup
4-7
This icon opens the Report View to allow selection of the

print options for the case and to allow printing of the case.
case.
This icon collapses the Case Navigator into a summary view
that consists of a vertical tool bar.
Vertical tool bar buttons in the Case Navigator summary are the
same as in the standard Case Navigator with the following additions.
This icon expands the Case Navigator to its normal size.
This icon starts the calculations for the case. The colour of
the tool bar background is
This icon displays a pop up menu of the objects in the current
case. Selecting an object will display its view.
4.1.3 Tree Icons

The icons displayed against each branch and object in the Case
Navigator view have the following meanings.
This icon identifies a branch of the model tree that contains
a single object that is a permanent part of the model and
cannot be added or deleted. Examples of this type of object
are the Case Description and Calculation Options object.
When a branch of this type is selected the Add, Delete, Copy
Activate and Ignore buttons are greyed out since they are not
applicable.
This icon identifies branches of the model that contain
objects that are not essential to the running of the model.
Examples of this type of object are the Receptor Point and
Assist Fluid objects.
4-7
4-8
Case Navigator View
This icon indicates a branch of the model that contains

objects that are essential to the calculation of the model
where the required objects are either missing or have
incomplete data. Examples of this type of object are the Tip
and Stack objects.
This icon indicates a branch of the model that contains
objects that are essential to the calculation of the model
where the required objects are complete and ready for
calculation. Examples of this type of object are the Tip and
Stack objects.
This icon indicates an object that has been set to an ignored
status. Ignored objects are not included in the calculations.
Normally where multiple objects may be defined e.g. Tips
and Stacks, multiple objects may be ignored as long as there
is at least one left active for calculations. The exception is the
Environment object where only one can be active; all the
others being set to ignored.
This icon indicates an object whose data is incomplete or in
error in some way.
This icon indicates an object whose data is complete and
ready to calculate.
This icon indicates a branch that has sub-branch objects
defined that are not currently displayed. Clicking this icon
will expand the tree to show the sub-branch objects.
This icon appears against a branch with displayed subbranch objects. Clicking it will collapse the branch and hide
the sub-branch objects.
4-8
General Setup
4-9
4.2 Case Summary View

The Case Summary view (see Figure 4-2) allows the user to enter
information to describe the Flaresim model. It also displays
information about any Case Study used to update the main model.
The Case Summary view is opened by selecting it in the Case
Navigator view and clicking the View button or by double clicking
on it in the Case Navigator.
4.2.1 Case Description Tab

Figure 4-2, Case Summary View, Case Description Tab
Case Data - Title

Text
Text entered in this field will be printed as the model title on reports.
4-9
4-10
Case Summary View
Case Data - Author

Text
Identifies the author of this Flaresim file.
Case Data - Revision
Text
Identifies the revision of the Flaresim file.
Case Data - Checked By
Text
Identifies the person responsible for checking the model.
Description
Text
Descriptive information relevant to the model. For example it is
good practice to note sources of environmental data and the
contingencies represented by the fluid data.
File Details - Last Calculated
Calculated Value
Tracks the date and time that the model was last calculated. It is
automatically updated each time the model is calculated and cannot
be manually updated.
File Details - Last Saved
Calculated Value
Tracks the date that the model was last saved. It is automatically
updated each time the model is saved and cannot be manually
updated.
File Details - File Version
Calculated Value
Tracks version of Flaresim that was used when the file was last
saved.
File Details - Last Saved As
Calculated Value
Tracks the name that was used when the file was last saved.
4-10
General Setup
4-11
4.2.2 Active Case Study Tab

The Active Case Study tab records the update of the base model
when a set of input data is double-clicked in a Case Study.
Figure 4-3, Case Summary, Active Case Study Tab
Case Study Name

Calculated Value
This is the name of the Case Study used to update the base case.
Case Tag
Calculated Value
This is the short tag name of the individual case within the Case
Study that was used to update the base case.
Last Copied
Calculated Value
This is the date and time at which the base case was updated from
the Case Study.
4-11
4-12
Case Summary View
Description
Calculated Value
This is the descriptive information defined in the Case Study for the
case that was used to update the base case.
Clear Active Case Study Information
Button
Clicking this removes all the Case Study information from the
Active Case tab.
4-12
General Setup
4-13
4.3 Setup Wizard

The Setup Wizard view provides a step by step guide to setting up a
basic Flaresim model. It is intended for use by new users to provide
the simplest possible interface for defining a new model.
The Setup Wizard provides pages or tabs that allow the user to
define in turn the fluid to be flared, details of the flare tip,
environment details, details of the flare stack, location of critical
receptor points and the calculation options to be used. Each page
must be completed before the user can move to the next page. Where
possible default data values and options are provided to allow the
setup of a new case to be made as simple as possible. When the final
page is completed and the Finish button is selected the wizard will
automatically create the Flaresim objects required to define the case.
By default, the Setup Wizard will be automatically displayed when
starting Flaresim or when creating a new case. If the user does not
want to use the Setup Wizard then its view can be simply closed.
Experienced users who do not wish to use the Setup Wizard at all
can select this option on the Files&Options tab of the Preferences
view, see section 4.4.2
4.3.1 Setup Wizard - Common Items

Figure 4-4 below shows the Fluid page of the Setup Wizard and
indicates the main areas of the view as follows.
Summary Panel
This provides a summary of the data input provided so far.
Data Entry Panel
This region will change to provide the data entry fields required for
the current item.
Help Panel
This region provides additional information about the selected data
entry field and will change as different fields are selected. The
4-13
4-14
Setup Wizard
information provided may explain why the data item is required and
indicate the range of values allowed as well as typical values.
Command buttons
These allow the user to move from page to page of the Setup Wizard.
The Finish button is only available when all of the required
information has been entered
Figure 4-4, Setup Wizard View
Page Tabs
These display the status of each section of the Setup Wizard. The
icons used,
and
have the same meanings as in the Case
Navigator view, section 4.1. The Page Tabs also allow the user to
move between completed pages of the Setup Wizard.
4-14
General Setup
4-15
4.3.2 Setup Wizard - Opening View

The opening view of the Setup Wizard is shown below.
Figure 4-5, Setup Wizard - Opening View
Unit set to use

Drop down list: Available Unit Sets
This field selects the units that will be used by Flaresim.
The drop down list only allows selection from existing unit sets. To
create and customise the contents of units sets the File - Preferences
menu option can be used, see section 4.4
4-15
4-16
Setup Wizard
4.3.3 Setup Wizard - Fluid Page

The second page of the Setup Wizard is the Fluid page shown below.
Figure 4-6, Setup Wizard - Fluid Page
Fluid Conditions - Temperature

Range: 0 to 1000 K
This field defines the temperature of the fluid going to the flare.
Fluid Conditions - Ref. Pressure
Range: 0.001 to 100 bar a
This field defines the reference pressure at which the temperature of
the fluid is specified. Where the operating pressure of the flare
differs from the reference pressure, the fluid temperature may be
corrected for the pressure change. By default this correction is
disabled in Flaresim 4.0. The user can choose to apply this
correction through the Options tab of the Fluid view, see chapter 6.
4-16
General Setup
4-17
Property Calculation
Radio buttons: Specified Properties/From Composition
These buttons control how the fluid properties are to be obtained. If
the Specified Properties option is selected then the bulk properties
of the fluid must be input using the Fluid Properties table as shown
in Figure 4-6. Otherwise if the From Composition option is selected
the view will change to allow the fluid composition to be specified
from which the fluid properties will be calculated.
Fluid Properties - Molecular Weight
Range: 2 to 1000
The molecular weight of the fluid. It is a required entry.
Fluid Properties - LHV
Range: 0 to 100 MJ/kg
This defines the Lower Heating Value of the fluid, also known as the
net heating value. It is a required entry.
Fluid Properties - Cp/Cv
Range: 1 to 5
This defines the ratio of the specific heat capacities of the fluid. A
default value of 1.2 is provided which may be used where this value
is unknown.
Fluid Properties - LEL
Range: 0 to 100%
This defines the Lower Explosive Limit of the fluid. A default value
of 2% is provided which may be used where this value is unknown.
The LEL is only used by the Brzustowski radiation method so the
value can safely be left at the default value when other calculation
methods are used.
Fluid Properties - Saturation
Range: 0 to 100%
This defines the degree of saturation of the hydrocarbons in the
fluid. The default value of 100% assumes that all the fluid is
paraffinic hydrocarbon. The saturation is only used by the High
Efficiency F Factor method and may safely be left at the default
value when other F Factor methods are used.
4-17
4-18
Setup Wizard
Fluid Properties - Pc
This defines the critical pressure of the fluid. It is used in the
calculation of fluid temperatures and densities. Entry of this value is
optional as an internal correlation will be used to estimate the fluids
Pc if this value is not provided.
Fluid Properties - Tc
Range: 2 to 1000 K
This defines the critical temperature of the fluid. It is used in the
calculation of fluid temperatures and densities. Entry of this value is
optional as an internal correlation will be used to estimate the fluids
Tc if this value is not provided.
When the Compositional radio button is selected the fluid page is
updated to so the Fluid composition table as shown below.
Figure 4-7, Setup Wizard - Fluid Page Compositions
4-18
General Setup
4-19
Composition Basis
Radio buttons: Mole/Mass
These buttons select the composition input basis either Mole
fraction or Mass fraction
Normalise Composition
Button
Clicking this button will normalise the current composition.
Unspecified component fractions will be set to 0.0 and the remainder
normalised so to give a total fraction of 1.0.
Fluid Composition - Fraction
Range: 0 to 1.0
The component composition.
4-19
4-20
Setup Wizard
4.3.4 Setup Wizard - Tip Page

The Tip page of the Setup Wizard is shown below.
Figure 4-8, Setup Wizard - Tip Page
Tip Type
Radio buttons: Pipe Tip / Sonic Tip
This allows selection of the tip type to be used either a Pipe Tip or
Sonic Tip. If unknown the default Pipe Tip will provide the most
conservative option.
Tip Sizing - Fluid Mass Flow Rate
Range: 0 to 10000 kg/s
Defines the mass flow rate of the fluid to be flared.
4-20
General Setup
4-21
Tip Sizing - Tip Diameter

Range: 0.0 to 10 m
Defines the diameter of the tip. When the mass flow rate is defined
the tip diameter will be automatically updated to show the tip
diameter required for the current Mach number. Updating the tip
diameter with a specified value will automatically update the Mach
number value.
Tip Sizing - Mach Number
Range: 0 to 1
Defines the tip exit Mach number i.e. the tip exit velocity as a
fraction of the sonic velocity. This is defaulted to 0.45 Mach which
is a reasonable default for an efficient pipe flare. Updating the Mach
number will recalculate the required tip diameter as long as the fluid
mass flow rate is known. Alternatively, updating the tip diameter
with a specified value will automatically update the Mach number
value.
F Factor Method
Check box
Selects the method that will be used to calculate the fraction of
combustion heat that will be radiated from the flame. The F Factor
is sometimes known as the emissivity of the flame. The default
Generic Pipe method is a conservative general purpose method. The
High Efficiency method should only be used for high efficiency tips
in good condition burning low molecular weight fluids.
4-21
4-22
Setup Wizard
4.3.5 Setup Wizard - Environment Page

The Environment page which is the fourth page of the Setup Wizard
is shown below.
Figure 4-9, Setup Wizard - Environment Page
Environment - Wind Speed

Range: 0 to 100 m/s
The wind speed to be used for the calculations. A default wind speed
of 20 m/s is defined.
Environment - Wind Direction
Range: 0 to 360
The angle from which the wind is blowing. 0 degrees is North, 90
East, 180 South and 270 West. It is common to do calculations
relative to a wind from the North so 0 degrees is the default.
4-22
General Setup
4-23
Environment - Temperature
Range: 10 to 500 K
The environmental temperature. The value is used in surface
temperature calculations and gas dispersion calculations.
Environment - Humidity
Range: 4 to 100%
The environmental humidity. The humidity value is used in
calculations of the attenuation in radiation due to the atmosphere i.e.
the transmissivity calculation. It is used when the Transmissivity is
to be calculated i.e. when the Transmissivity is not set to User
Specified. The default value of 10% is reasonably conservative.
Environment - Transmissivity Spec
Range: 0 to 1
The value for atmospheric transmissivity to be used if the
Transmissivity method is set to User Defined. The default value of
1.0 is conservative and does not allow for any attenuation of
radiation when passing through the atmosphere.
Environment - Transmissivity Method
Drop down: UserSpecified / Calculated / CalcNoLimits / Wayne
The method to be used for the calculation of the factor for correcting
the transmissivity of radiation through the atmosphere. The Default
is UserSpecified method which with a specified transmissivity value
of 1 is the most conservative. The Calculated and CalcNoLimits
methods calculate the transmissivity as a function of the distance
travelled by the radiation through the atmosphere and the
atmospheric humidity, the difference between them being whether
the distance limits applicable to the Hottel derived equation are used
(see Methods chapter). The Wayne method calculates transmissivity
as a function of both atmospheric temperature and humidity.
4-23
4-24
Setup Wizard
4.3.6 Setup Wizard - Stack Page

The Stack page of the Setup Wizard is shown below
Figure 4-10, Setup Wizard - Environment Page
Stack Angle To Vertical

Check box
This set of check boxes allows rapid selection of some standard
angles for the stack which will be updated in the Vertical Angle
entry. In general onshore flare stacks are vertical while flare stacks
on offshore platforms are often angled at 45 or 60 degrees to
Horizontal. If your stack is not a standard angle then select the User
check box to input the angle in the table below.
Angle To Vertical
Range: 0 to 90 degrees
The angle of the stack to the horizontal. Use this field if your stack
is not at one of the standard angles.
4-24
General Setup
4-25
Angle from North

The direction in which the stack points. This field is important for
non-vertical stacks and should be set with regard to the specified
wind direction. It is normal for stacks to be oriented to point into the
prevailing wind so if the wind is from the East (90degrees) then it
would be normal to set the stack horizontal orientation to 90 degrees
as well.
Stack Length
Range: 0 to 1000m
The length of the stack. Leaving the value empty will cause the
Setup Wizard to create a Sizing case where the stack length will be
calculated to meet a defined limiting value for the radiation.
4-25
4-26
Setup Wizard
4.3.7 Setup Wizard - Receptors Page

The Receptors page of the Setup Wizard is shown below
Figure 4-11, Setup Wizard - Receptors Page
Receptor ID
Text
The default name provided e.g. RP_1 can be updated with a more
descriptive name e.g. Stack Base.
Northing
Range: -1000 to 1000m
The location of the receptor point in the Northing direction.
In general the points of maximum radiation are found directly
downwind of the stack. So if the wind is from the North you will
generally be entering Northing locations with a negative value. For
example a Northing value of -10m will be a point 10m down wind.
4-26
General Setup
4-27
Easting
Range: -1000 to 1000m
The location of the receptor point Easting direction.
Elevation
Range: -500 to 500m
The height of the receptor point. Cases defined through the Setup
Wizard define the 0 elevation point as the base of the stack so this is
the height of the receptor point above or below the stack base.
Allowable Radiation
Range: 0 to 31560 W/m2
The radiation that is allowed at the receptor point. The table of
typical design values shown on this page provides a general guide to
the selection of appropriate values.
Add Button
Button
Clicking this button adds a new receptor point to the model.
Delete Button
Button
Clicking this button deletes the current selected receptor point.
4-27
4-28
Setup Wizard
4.3.8 Setup Wizard - Calculations Page

The Calculations page of the Setup Wizard is shown below.
Figure 4-12, Setup Wizard - Calculations Page
Calculation Method
Check box
This allows selection of the calculation method to be used. The
default Flaresim API method should generally give a conservative
result using industry standard methods. The Mixed method with 25
Flame elements is recommended as a good general alternative.
4-28
General Setup
4-29
4.4 Preferences
The File - Preferences menu item provides access to the Preferences
View to allow setup of the preferred units, file locations and
graphical plot elements.
Figure 4-13, Units Tab
Read Preference File

Button
Reads a preference file. A File Open dialog will be opened to allow
the location of the preference file to be specified.
Save Preference File
Button
Saves the current preferences. A File Save dialog will be opened to
allow the location of the preferences file to be specified. Preference
files are saved as files of type XML.
4-29
4-30
Preferences
On startup, Flaresim first searches for a file called Preferences.xml

in the folder User Documents\Softbits\Flaresim 4.0 . If not found the
default Preferences.xml file is read from the SharedProgramData
folder.
The SharedProgramData folder referred to above is typically the
folder C:\Documents and Settings\All User\Application Data\
Softbits\Flaresim 4.0 on a Windows XP system or the folder
C:\ProgramData\Softbits\Flaresim 4.0 on a Vista, Windows 7 or
Windows 8 system.
4.4.1 Units Tab

The Units tab of the Preferences view (see Figure 4-13) is used to
define the units of measure used to display and interpret values on
the data entry views.
Flaresim uses the concept of a Unit Set which defines all of the units
to be used for a single case. Two Unit Sets, the Default SI and
Default Field sets are provided as basic sets that cannot be changed.
A third European unit set is provided which can be modified. New
Unit Sets can be created by copying an existing Unit Set and then
customising it.
A default range of units is provided for each type of unit used by
Flaresim. The Units tab also allows new units to be defined by
defining their name and conversion to the internal unit used by
Flaresim.
Unit Sets - List
List box
Shows the Unit Sets that have already been defined in the
Preferences file. A Unit Set may be activated by selecting it in this
list. On activation all open data views are immediately updated to
display values in the new units.
4-30
General Setup
4-31
Unit Sets - Rename Unit Set

Text
Allows the name of a user defined Unit Set to be updated. The names
of the default Unit Sets cannot be changed.
Unit Sets - Copy Unit Set
Button
Copies the selected Unit Set to create a new one. The new Unit set
will be given a default name that can then be updated to describe it.
Unit Sets - Delete Unit Set
Button
Deletes the selected Unit Set. The default internal Unit Sets cannot
be deleted and this button will be inactive when these are selected.
Unit Select - Table
Table
Shows a list of the unit types used in Flaresim with the current unit
defined for the selected Unit Set and the current format specifier. To
update the unit or format used for a particular unit type e.g.
Temperature, move to the appropriate row and then select the
required unit in the Selected Unit column and update the format
specifier in the Format column.
Unit Select Table - Selected Unit Column
Drop down list: Available Units
Allows selection of the unit to be used for the currently selected unit
type. As the selection is changed the conversion factors for the unit
are displayed in the Unit Definition fields at the bottom of the view.
Unit Select Table - Format
Text
Allows the output format of the selected unit type to be specified.
Format specifiers should be of the form:###0.000
where the # symbol denotes the space allowed for leading digits and
the 0.000 section denotes the number of decimal places that will be
used for output.
4-31
4-32
Preferences
Unit Select - Add

Button
Allows new units to be defined for a particular unit type. Clicking
the button displays a pop up window to allow the new unit name to
be defined as shown below.
Figure 4-14, New Unit Name Window
Clicking the OK button on this window activates the Unit Definition

fields and the Accept button.
Unit Select - Delete
Button
Allows units to be deleted. Clicking the button will delete the
currently selected unit. A confirmation dialog will be displayed to
confirm the action. Only user added units can be deleted and the
button will be greyed out if the selected unit is not a user added unit.
Unit Select - Accept
Button
Accepts the updated unit information.
Unit Definition - Multiplier
Number
Defines the multiplication constant required to convert the new unit
to the internal default unit which is displayed.
Unit Definition - Offset
Number
Defines the offset to be added to convert the new unit to the internal
default unit which is displayed. Note the offset is added after
multiplication.
4-32
General Setup
4-33
4.4.2 Files & Options Tab

The Files&Options tab of the Preferences view allows the location
of the units and components files to be specified along with other
options.
Figure 4-15, Files Tab
Default Files - Units

File name
Defines the name of the unit conversion factors file, normally
Units.xml. If no folder path is specified Flaresim will expect to find
this in the SharedProgramData folder. The Browse button allows
the file to be located using a standard File Dialog.
Default Files - Component Library
File name
Defines the name of the component library file, normally
Librarycomponents.xml. If no folder path is specified Flaresim will
4-33
4-34
Preferences
expect to find this in the SharedProgramData folder. The Browse

button allows the file to be located using a standard File Dialog.
This allows the user to create dedicated component files to be
created and used for specialised applications.
Default Files - Report Layout File
File name
Defines the name of the style sheet file (XSL file) that will be used
to layout printed reports. By default this will be Flaresim.xsl. If no
folder path is specified Flaresim will expect to find this in the
SharedProgramData folder. Clients are able to create customised
report style sheets using standard XSL language to change the layout
of Flaresim reports.
Default Files - Graphic Report Layout
File name
Defines the name of the graphic report layout file to be used by
default. Standard graphic report layout files have a .lay extension
and are defined for A4 and US Letter paper sizes and for systems
with one or more stacks and one or more tips. If no folder path is
specified Flaresim will expect to find the file in the
SharedProgramData folder.
The default layout file selected here can be reset for individual
receptor grids or dispersion objects on the Graphic Report tab of the
relevant view.
The contents of the.lay files describe the location and formatting of
isopleth charts and accompanying data items and descriptive text
using XML syntax. The XML elements recognised in these files are
described in Appendix A of this manual.
Default Files - Wizard Help File
File name
Defines the name of the file containing the help information
displayed on the Setup Wizard. By default this file is called
WizardHelp.xml. Flaresim will expect to find this file in the
SharedProgramData folder.
4-34
General Setup
4-35
Default Files - Error Log File

File name
Defines the name of the file which will be used to record any errors
generated as you run Flaresim. By default the file will be saved in
the SharedProgramData folder. Error messages will only be
recorded if the Use Error Log option is selected.
Default Files - Pipe Schedules
File name
Defines the name of the file containing Pipe Schedule data, normally
PipeSizes.xml. If no folder path is specified Flaresim will expect to
find this in the SharedProgramData folder. The Browse button
allows the file to be located using a standard File Dialog.
Option Settings - Use Setup Wizard
Check box
When selected, Flaresim will display the Setup Wizard whenever
Flaresim is opened without specifying a file to load or when a new
Flaresim case is created. The Setup Wizard provides a step by step
guide to creating a basic Flaresim model. Use of the Setup Wizard is
described in section 4.3.
Option Settings - Use Specified Formats
Check box
When selected, Flaresim will use the defined Format values for each
unit when displaying values in the Input Tables on the various
views. Otherwise values will be displayed to 3 significant figures.
Option Settings - Use US Number Formats
Check box
When selected, Flaresim will display and accept values using US
number formats i.e. 123.1234. When cleared, numbers will be
displayed and accepted using the number format defined by the
current Windows language settings.
Option Settings - Log Errors to File
Check box
When selected, Flaresim will record all the exception errors
displayed to the log file defined in the Files section.
4-35
4-36
Preferences
Option Settings - Maximise View

Check box
When selected, Flaresim will display all newly opened or created
cases in a maximise Case View, overlaying the previously visible
view.
Option Settings - Remember Graphic Printer Selection
Check box
When selected, Flaresim will store the name of the printer selected
for output of graphic reports and will automatically reselect it next
time Flaresim is run. Page settings are always remembered.
Option Settings - Save Isopleth Points
Check box
When selected, Flaresim will store the coordinates for the isopleth
results within the .fsw file when the case is saved. Selecting this
option may increase the size of the .fsw significantly.
Option Settings - Check For Updates
Check box
When selected Flaresim will automatically check for program
updates every 7 days as it starts up. A manual check for updates
using the Help - Check For Updates menu option can be done at any
time and is not affected by this setting.
4-36
General Setup
4-37
4.4.3 Plots Tab

The Plots tab of the Preferences view is used to customise the
appearance of the isopleth plots in the Receptor Grid view and the
plots in the Graphical Reports.
Figure 4-16, Plots Tab
Plot Type
Drop down list: Radiation Isopleth / Noise Isopleth / Temperature
Isopleth / Concentration Isopleth / Dispersion Plot / Wind Rose Plot
This drop down list selects the type of plot that the customisation
options displayed will be applied to.
Update Existing Grids, Points and Dispersion Objects
Button
Clicking this button applies the current plot preference settings to all
existing receptor grid isopleth plots, Gaussian dispersion isopleth
plots and receptor point windrose plots. The update applies in all
open cases.
4-37
4-38
Preferences
A typical use for this button would be to apply settings from a

preference file to an open case i.e. read the preference file and then
click this button.
The customisation options are viewed and updated through three sub
tabs, for Plot Details, Contour Details and Text Details.
On the Plot Details tab, see Figure 4-16, it is possible to set the
following options.
Plot Options - Display Grid
Check box
When selected plots will show a background grid.
Plot Options - Display Flame
Check box
When selected isopleth plots will show a line representing the shape
of the flames from any active flare tips.
Plot Options - Display Stack
Check box
When selected isopleth plots will show lines representing the size
and orientation of active flare stacks.
Plot Options - Display Tip
Check box
and orientation of active flare tips.
Plot Options - Display Shield
Check box
When selected isopleth plots will show lines representing the
intersection of active shield sections with the plane of the isopleth.
Note that it is the intersection that is displayed not the projection of
the shield on the isopleth. If plan view isopleth is at ground level i.e.
0m then the shields will require at least one point with an elevation
dimension < 0m in order to intersect with the isopleth plane.
4-38
General Setup
4-39
Plot Parameter - Number of lines

Integer range: 1 to 9
This value determines the number of grid lines that will be displayed
for each axis of the isopleth plots.
Plot Parameter - Flame Thickness
This values defines the width in pixels of the line that will be drawn
to represent the flame shape.
Plot Parameter - Stack Thickness
to represent each active stack on the isopleth plots.
Plot Parameter - Tip Thickness
to represent the each active tip on the isopleth plots.
Plot Parameter - Shield Thickness
to represent the shield sections on the isopleth plots.
Plot Colour - Grid Colour
Colour dialog
This shows the colour that will be used for the background of the
isopleth plots. The colour may be selected by double-clicking the
sample panel to display the Flaresim colour dialog.
4-39
4-40
Preferences
Figure 4-17, Colour Dialog
Colours are selected in the dialog by clicking on the colour required

and then clicking the Ok button. To close the dialog without
changing the colour click the Cancel button.
Plot Options - Flame Colour
Colour dialog
This shows the colour that will be used to draw the line representing
the flame shape on the isopleth plots. The colour may be selected by
double-clicking the sample panel to display the Flaresim colour
dialog.
Plot Options - Stack Colour
Colour dialog
the flare stacks on the isopleth plots. The colour may be selected by
dialog.
Plot Options - Tip Colour
Colour dialog
dialog.
4-40
General Setup
4-41
Plot Options - Colour

Colour dialog
the shield sections on the isopleth plots. The colour may be selected
by double-clicking the sample panel to display the Flaresim colour
dialog.
On the Contour Details tab, see Figure 4-18, it is possible to select
the following options for the 10 contour lines that are available for
each type of plot.
Figure 4-18, Contour Details
Contour Details - Value

Number
This column defines the value for the selected isopleth contour in the
units defined at the head of the column.
4-41
4-42
Preferences
Contour Details - Display

Check box
This column specifies whether the selected isopleth contour will be
displayed. Set the check box to display the contour, clear it to hide
the contour. Contours
Contour Details - Colour
Colour dialog
This column defines the colour to be used for the selected isopleth
contour. Double click the sample panel to open the Flaresim colour
dialog to change the colour.
Contour Details - Width
Number
This column defines the line width used to draw the selected isopleth
contour.
Drop down list: Solid / Dash / Dot / DashDot / DashDotDot
This column selects the line style used to draw the selected isopleth
contour.
The Text Details tab, see Figure 4-19, allows the following settings
to be defined.
Figure 4-19, Isopleth Text Details
4-42
General Setup
4-43
Text Options - Select Text Item

Select Row
The rows of this table describe the different text elements that can
appear on an isopleth plot. The display properties of each different
text element can be set by selecting the row and then using the fields
below to modify the properties.
Not all of the defined properties may be supported for all of the text
elements. Where a property cannot be set it will be greyed out while
that text element is selected.
Text Options - Display Item
Check box
This controls whether the selected text element will be displayed.
Set the check box to display the item, clear it to hide it.
Text Options - Sample
Font dialog
The Sample column displays a sample of the font style that is
currently defined for the selected text item. Double clicking the
sample text opens a standard windows font dialog to allow the
family, size and style of the font to be set for the selected text item.
Figure 4-20, Font Dialog
4-43
4-44
Preferences
Text Options - Spacing

Integer Range: 1 to 20
This determines the spacing between the selected text element and
the item it describes e.g the spacing between the X-Axis of the
isopleth plot and the X-Axis of the graph. The value is expressed as
a percentage of the dimensions of the isopleth plot.
4.4.4 Sterile Area Tab

The Sterile Area tab of the Preferences view, see below, is used to
define the default radiation and noise limits to be specified for the
sterile area calculation as a new Stack object is created.
Figure 4-21, Preferences View - Sterile Area Tab
The view provides the following options.
4-44
General Setup
4-45
Sterile Area Limits - Radiation Limits

Range: 0 to 1.0e9 W/m2
Up to 10 radiation values can be defined. The sterile area calculation
for each stack will calculate the distance downwind of the stack
required for the radiation to drop below each defined limit.
Noise Limits
Range: 0 to 150 Db
Up to 10 noise values can be defined. The sterile area calculation for
each stack will calculate the distance downwind of the stack
required for the noise to drop below each defined limit.
Update Existing Stack Objects
Button
Clicking this button copies the current preference settings for the
sterile area radiation limits and noise limits to existing stack objects.
4-45
4-46
Component Management View
4.5 Component Management View

The Component Management view (see Figure 4-22) is used to
maintain and update the library of component data that may be used
to allow fluid properties to be calculated from their component
composition. The Component Management view is opened by
selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking the View button.
Figure 4-22, Component Management View
The list of components defined for the model is shown in the

Available Components list. Selecting a component in this list will
display its properties in the three tabbed pages at the bottom of the
view. If the component selected is a user added component the
Remove Selected Component and Edit Selected component
command buttons will be activated.
New components can be added to the component library by clicking
the Add New Component button. This displays a pop-up window
4-46
General Setup
4-47
(see Figure 4-23) to allow the entry of the new components name.
When this has been entered click the OK button and the component
will be added to the list in the Component Manager view. and its
properties will be displayed ready for entry.
Figure 4-23, Component Name Popup
Data for a new component or existing data for a user added

component is updated through the three tabbed views, Properties,
Structure and Enthalpy coefficients as described below. While data
is being updated an Edit Component information panel will be
displayed below the command buttons.
The options on the Properties tab are shown in Figure 4-22 above.
Mole Weight
Range: 2 to 1000
The molecular weight of the component.
LHV
Range: 0 to 200MJ/kg
The net, or lower heating value of the component. It is a common
error in the design of flare systems to use the gross heating value.
For most hydrocarbon components this value will be of the order of
46 MJ/kg
Cp / Cv
Range: 1.01 to 5.0
The ratio of the specific heat capacities of the component. If the
value is unknown we would recommend using a value of 1.2.
4-47
4-48
Saturation
Range: 0 to 100%
The percentage saturation of the component.
LEL
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
The lower flammability limit of the component as a volume
percentage.
Critical Temperature
Range: 10 to 10,000 K
The critical temperature of the component.
Critical Pressure
Range: 0.01 to 1,000 bar a
The critical pressure of the component.
Data File
Text: File Name
The name of the REFPROP data file containing data for this
component.
On the Structure tab of the component data entry view the number
of atoms of each listed atom in the component should be entered, an
example for Methane is shown below.
Figure 4-24, Component Structure Input
This number is used in the calculation of combustion products. The

list of atoms cannot be updated. If other atoms are needed they must
4-48
General Setup
4-49
be defined in the LibraryComponents.xml file along with details of

their combustion products.
The final tab of the Component data entry is the enthalpy
coefficients tab as shown below.
Figure 4-25, Enthalpy Coefficients Data Entry
Flaresim calculates the enthalpy of fluids and combustion gases by

summing the contributions made by each component. The
individual component enthalpy contributions are calculated using
the following polynomial equation.
2
3
4
5
E = A+BT+CT +DT +ET +FT
where
E is the enthalpy in J/kg
T is the temperature in K
A, B, C, D, E, F are constants
The data entry table for the enthalpy coefficients allows the enthalpy
unit for each constant to be selected but the values entered will
always be based on a temperature in K.
Once the component property data has been defined click the Accept
Edit button to complete definition of the new component. If for any
reason you wish to abandon creation of a new component at the
property data entry stage then click the Cancel Edit button.
4-49
4-50
Components that have been added by the user may be updated by

selecting it in the list and clicking the Edit Component Data button.
This option is not available for components from the Flaresim
database.
To remove a component from the library, select it in the list and click
the Remove Selected Component button.
4-50
Fluids
5-1
5 Fluids
Page
5.1
Fluid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.2
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Composition Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Combustion Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Assist Fluid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5-1
5-2
5-2
Fluids
5-3
The Fluid object defines the properties of the fluids to be flared

through a flare tip. The fluid properties may either be entered
directly or calculated from a defined composition. A single set of
fluid properties can be assigned to one or more flare tips.
Fluid objects may be created using the Fluid option from the Add
drop down menu or by selecting the Fluid branch in the Case
Navigator view and clicking the Add button.
An existing Fluid object may be viewed by double clicking it in the
Case Navigator view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator view
and clicking the View button.
Fluid objects will be included in the calculations when they are
assigned to a flare tip through the Tip view. A Fluid may be assigned
to more than one flare tip. Unassigned fluids take no part in the
calculations.
A Fluid object can be deleted either by clicking the Delete button on
its view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking
the Delete button on this view.
The Assist Fluid object both identifies the additional fluids that may
be fed to a flare tip to improve combustion and also defines the
information needed to calculate the flow of the assist fluid required.
Like Fluid objects, Assist Fluids are included in the calculations
only when assigned to a flare tip.
Assist Fluid objects may be created using the Assist Fluid menu
option from the Add drop down menu or by selecting the Assist
Fluid branch in the Case Navigator view and clicking the Add
button.
An existing Assist Fluid object may be viewed by double clicking it
in the Case Navigator view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator
view and clicking the View button. Assist Fluid objects may be
deleted either through the Case Navigator view or by using the
Delete button on the Assist Fluid view.
5-3
5-4
Fluid View
5.1 Fluid View

The following figure shows the Fluid view for entering and updating
fluid data.
Figure 5-1, Fluid View
5.1.1 Common Fields

Name
Text
Enter text to identify this Fluid object.
Status Text
Status message
The message displayed in this field and its colour indicates whether
the data for this fluid object is complete and ready for calculation.
5.1.2 Properties Tab

The Properties tab of the Fluid view, see Figure 5-1, has the
following data entry fields. Note that all of these fields except the
5-4
Fluids
5-5
temperature and reference pressure will be calculated from the fluid

composition if this is entered.
Method - Calculation Method
Drop down list: Flaresim/REFPROP
Selects the method that will be used to calculate the fluid properties
used during the calculations.
The Flaresim method selects the correlations used by Flaresim 3.0
and earlier. It does not require the composition of the fluid to be
defined; the properties of the fluid can be defined directly. If a
composition is supplied then the properties are calculated from the
composition by summing the contributions of each component as
appropriate.
The REFPROP method is based on the REFPROP physical
properties package from NIST. A fluid composition is required and
will be used to calculate properties such as CpCv, Tc and Pc. Other
properties such as MolWt, LHV, LEL and saturation will be
calculated from the composition by summing the contributions of
each component.
Conditions - Temperature
Range: 10 to 1000K
The temperature of the fluid at the tip exit. Note that this is the
temperature of the fluid at the defined reference pressure.
If either a Steam or Air assisted flare tip is being used this
temperature is the fluid temperature before mixing with the steam or
air flow.
Conditions - Ref. Pressure
Range: 100 to 2000000 Pa
The reference pressure at which the fluid temperature is defined.
The fluid temperature can be corrected from this pressure to other
pressures assuming adiabatic isentropic compression/expansion if
the temperature correction calculation option is set.
5-5
5-6
Fluid View
Properties - Mole Weight

Range: 2 to 1000
The molecular weight of the fluid being flared.
Properties - Lower Heating Value
Range: 0 to 200MJ/kg
The net or lower heating value of the fluid. It is a common error in
the design of flare systems to use the gross heating value of the fluid.
We are interested in the net heat released by the flame.
For most hydrocarbon fluids without inerts this value will be of the
order of 46 MJ/kg.
Properties - Cp / Cv
Range: 1.0 to 5.0
This field defines the ratio of the specific heat capacities of the fluid.
It is only required and used when the fluid is a vapour.
If the value is unknown we would recommend using a value of 1.2.
Properties - LEL
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
The lower flammability limit of the fluid as a volume percentage.
This property is used by the Brzustowski method for calculation of
flame shape. It is not used by any of the other methods, in which case
any value may be entered.
Properties - Saturation
Range: 0 to 100%
The percentage of saturated hydrocarbon molecules in the fluid on a
mole basis. This is used by the Flaresim method for estimation of the
fraction of heat radiated by a flame (emissivity). It is not used by any
of the other methods in which case any value may be entered.
For inert or non-hydrocarbon fluids and components assume 100%
saturation since this leads to combustion with a flame of lower
luminosity.
5-6
Fluids
5-7
Critical Properties - Critical Temperature

Range: 10 to 1000K
The critical temperature of the fluid. It is used in the calculation of
the compressibility factor which in turn is used in the calculation of
the fluid density. If a value is not supplied, the fluids critical
temperature will be estimated using an internal correlation based on
mole weight.
Critical Properties - Critical Pressure
The critical pressure of the fluid. It is used in the calculation of the
compressibility factor which in turn is used in the calculation of the
fluid density. If a value is not supplied, the fluids critical pressure
will be estimated using an internal correlation based on mole weight.
5.1.3 Options Tab

The Options tab is used to input data that is specific to each fluid
property method. For the Flaresim method the view is as shown
below.
Figure 5-2, Options Tab, Flaresim Method
5-7
5-8
Fluid View
Options - Correct Temperatures

Drop down list: Yes/No
When set to Yes the temperature of the fluid in the tip or stack riser
will be corrected for the calculated pressure at each point. The
correction will assume isentropic adiabatic compression or
expansion from the defined fluid reference pressure to the
calculation pressure. When set to No all calculations will be
isothermal at the specified fluid temperature.
The true nature of the expansion of gas across a PSV is between
isentropic and isenthalpic. The use of an isentropic expansion
correction in will give a worst case temperature correction. The
default value is off.
In versions of Flaresim prior to 4.0 this option was located on the
Calculation Options view and applied to all fluids.
Options - R-K Z Factor
When set to Yes the fluid compressibility factor or Z factor is
calculated using the Redlich Kwong method. If set to No the method
used is the Berthelot equation.
The results of the two methods will be similar at low pressures (< 5
bar). At higher pressures the Redlich-Kwong method is more
accurate so it is set to be the default method for all new cases from
Version 1.1 onwards.
Prior to Flaresim version 4.0 this option was located on the
Calculation Options view and applied to all fluids.
When the REFPROP fluid properties method is selected the Options
tab will display the following view.
5-8
Fluids
5-9
Figure 5-3, Options Tab, REFPROP Method
Options - Correct Temperatures

When set to Yes the temperature of the fluid in the tip or stack riser
will be corrected for the calculated pressure at each point. The
correction will assume an adiabatic compression or expansion from
the defined fluid reference pressure to the calculation pressure.
When set to No all calculations will be isothermal at the specified
fluid temperature.
The calculation will use the specified isentropic efficiency when
correcting for the pressure change between the reference pressure
and the tip exit pressure. For pressures changes from the tip exit to
the stack base, an isenthalpic calculation will be used i.e. an
isentropic efficiency of 0%.
Options - Isentropic Efficiency
Range: 0 to 100%
The isentropic efficiency used in when correcting the fluid
temperature from the reference pressure defined to the tip exit
pressure.
5-9
5-10
Fluid View
The appropriate value to use will depend on location at which the

reference temperature and pressure are defined. Depressuring of a
vessel is often modelled as isentropic ie. an efficiency of 100%.
Expansion due to pressure drop down a pipe is generally considered
to be isenthalpic i.e. an efficiency of 0%. Expansion across a PSV is
between isentropic and isenthalpic.
The greatest change in temperatures will be seen with an isentropic
efficiency of 100%.
Options - Flash Method
Drop down list: PR/NIST
This sets the flash method that will be used by the REFPROP
package. The default PR or Peng Robinson method is widely used in
the hydrocarbon industry. The NIST method is the default method
provided by the REFPROP package.
The PR method is significantly faster than the NIST method.
Results - Fluid State
Calculated Value
This displays the fluid state calculated after flashing the fluid at the
reference temperature and pressure. If the fluid state is two phase or
liquid then If the fluid state is two phase or liquid then the current
version of Flaresim will not be able to use this fluid in its
calculations. It is planned to remove this restriction to allow use of
two phase fluids and liquids in Welltest burners in future versions.
Results - Vapour Fraction
Calculated Value
This displays the calculated vapour fraction after flashing the fluid
at the reference temperature and pressure.
5-10
Fluids
5-11
5.1.4 Composition Tab

Figure 5-4, Composition Tab
Table - Component Name

Selected components
Shows the list of components selected for use in the model.
Components are added to the list by clicking the Add Component
button to open the Component List view; see Figure 5-5. Highlight
one or more components in the list that you wish to add and click the
OK button. The required components will be added to the
component list and the Component List view will close.
Components are removed from the list by clicking the Remove
Component button to open the Component List view; see Figure 55. Then select one or more components that you wish to remove and
click the OK button. The selected components will be removed from
the current component list and the Component List view will close.
5-11
5-12
Fluid View
Figure 5-5, Component List view
Table - Composition Values

Range: 0 to 1.0
Specifies the fraction of each component in fluid on either a mole or
a mass basis as determined by the radio button selection to the right
of the table.
Composition Basis
Radio button: Mass/Mole
This radio button selects the basis for the composition data. Note
that changing it does not convert any existing component fraction
data to the new basis.
As component fractions are updated, the running total of the
fractions is updated. A composition can be completed by clicking
either the Normalise button to set remaining fractions to 0.0 and
normalise current totals to add to 1.0 or by clicking the Calculate
Last Fraction button to set a single unspecified component fraction
to the value required to make the overall fraction equal to 1.0.
5-12
Fluids
5-13
5.1.5 Combustion Results Tab

The following figure shows the Combustion Results tab. This view
displays the combustion results calculated for the fluid.
Figure 5-6, Fluid View, Combustion Results
These results are calculated directly from the specified composition

when this is available. When the composition has not been specified,
a composition is calculated for the Fluid using the defined mole
weight as the basis. Essentially the composition is assumed by
selecting the two straight chain hydrocarbon components, C1
through C10 from the data base that have mole weights immediately
lower than and higher than the specified mole weight. The
proportion of these two components is then calculated to provide the
same mole weight.
Fluid Ideal Enthalpies - At Fluid Temp
Calculated Value: J/kg
The ideal enthalpy of the fluid at the specified temperature.
5-13
5-14
Fluid View
Fluid Ideal Enthalpies - At 25C

Calculated Value: J/kg
The ideal enthalpy of the fluid at 25C.
Flue Gas Results - Flue Gas Flow
Calculated Value: mole/mole
The flow of flue gas generated by complete combustion of 1 mole of
the fluid with the stoichiometric quantity of oxygen.
Flue Gas Results - O2 Required
Calculated Value: mole/mole
The stoichiometric quantity of oxygen required for combustion of 1
mole of the fluid.
Stoichiometric Flue Gas Composition
Calculated Value: mole fraction
The composition of the flue gas resulting from stoichiometric
combustion of the fluid.
5-14
Fluids
5-15
5.2 Assist Fluid View

The following figure shows the Assist Fluid view for entering and
updating assist fluid data.
Figure 5-7, Assist Fluid View
Name
Text
Enter a name to identify this assist fluid.
Status Text
Status message
the data for this Assist Fluid object is complete and ready for
calculation.
Type
Drop down list: Air / Steam/Water
Selects the type of assist fluid to be used. Steam/Water indicates that
Steam will be used with vapour flares and Water with liquid flares.
Flow Calculations
Drop down list: User / Smokeless
If this is set to User then a specific flow rate for the Assist Fluid will
need to be specified when the Assist Fluid is assigned to a Tip. If set
to Smokeless then the flow rate of the Assist Fluid will be calculated
according to the following settings as shown in Figure 5-8.
5-15
5-16
Assist Fluid View
Figure 5-8, Assist Fluid View for Smokeless Operation
Smokeless Method
Drop down list: Flaresim/API/UserRatio
Selects the method to be used by Flaresim to calculate the flow of
assist fluid required for smokeless operation. The Flaresim method
is a proprietary correlation supplied by National Air Oil. The API
method is the method described in API RP521. The UserRatio
allows the user to specify the flow ratio of assist fluid required for
smokeless operation.
The validity of these options varies with the type of assist fluid
selected.
Air
The allowed methods are Flaresim and UserRatio. If
the API method is selected an error message will
displayed when the model is calculated.
Steam/Water Any of the allowed methods may be used.
Smokeless Flow Ratio
Range: 0.001 to 100.0 but see description
Specifies the ratio of the mass flow of the assist fluid to the mass
flow of the fluid being flared. This field is displayed when the
UserRatio smokeless method is selected.
When Air is the assist fluid, high ratios of 5.0 or more may be used.
When Steam/Water is the assist fluid the mass ratio should not
exceed 0.5 since this would lead to flame instability and a potential
flameout.
5-16
Fluids
5-17
Apply Correction to Fraction Heat Radiated

Check box
If selected, Flaresim will calculate a correction to the flame length
resulting from the assist fluid.
Apply Correction to Flame Length
Check box
If selected, Flaresim will calculate a correction to the flame length
resulting from the assist fluid.
5-17
5-18
5-18
Assist Fluid View
Environment
6-1
6 Environment
Page
6.1
Environment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.2
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overall Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Wind Rose Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Dispersion Data Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Environment Summary View. . . . . . . . . . .15
6-1
6-2
6-2
Environment
6-3
The Environment object allows the definition of the data needed to

model flares in different environmental conditions. The data allows
characterisation of different geographical locations ranging from
desert conditions to Arctic conditions or characterisation of different
weather conditions at a single location.
An individual Flaresim run is always carried out for a single set of
environmental data. A Flaresim model file can contain multiple
Environment objects to allow rapid recalculation of the model with
a different set of environmental data.
Environment objects may be created using the Environment option
in the Add Item drop down menu or by selecting the Environment
branch in the Case Navigator and clicking the Add button.
An existing Environment object may be viewed by selecting it in the
View drop down menu option, by double clicking it in the Case
Navigator or by selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the
View button.
The Environment object to be used for calculations is set by
selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the Activate button.
Since only one set of environmental data can be active at a time, all
other Environment objects will be set to Ignored. An Environment
object can also be Ignored by selecting the check box on its view.
One Environment object must be active and complete to allow
calculations to proceed.
An Environment object can be deleted either by clicking the Delete
button on its view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator and
clicking the Delete button on this view.
A summary view showing the main details of all of the Environment
objects in a case can be displayed by double-clicking the
Environment branch header in the Case Navigator or by selecting
the Environment branch and clicking the View button.
6-3
6-4
Environment View
6.1 Environment View

The figure below shows the Environment view for defining and
updating environmental data.
Figure 6-1, Environment view
6.1.1 Common Fields

Name
Text
A descriptive name to identify this Environment object. The name
supplied will be processed to remove illegal characters.
Ignored
Check box
Clear to select this Environment object for calculations or set it to
ignore this Environment object. Only one Environment can be active
for calculations so activating an Environment object by clearing the
6-4
Environment
6-5
ignored check box will automatically set all the other Environments
in the model to ignored.
Status Text
Status message
the data for this Environment object is complete and ready for
calculation.
6.1.2 Overall Tab

The data items in the Overall tab of the Environment view are shown
in Figure 6-1 above.
Wind - Speed
Range: 0 to 100 m/s
A constant wind speed is assumed.
In theory the windspeed varies with elevation. This variation is
ignored in the calculation of the flame profile since it is not generally
included in published flame shape calculation methods. The
variation in wind speed with elevation is included in gas dispersion
calculations - see Dispersion Data tab.
The following table gives standard wind speed conversions. Note
the Beaufort scale wind speed cannot be entered directly since there
is no continuous or linear conversion to other windspeed
measurements.
knots
mph
ft/s
m/s
Beaufort
Scale
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.3
3.3
1.0
4.6
6.6
2.0
9.2
13.5
4.1
12
13.8
20.3
6.2
6-5
6-6
Environment View
knots
mph
ft/s
m/s
Beaufort
Scale
18
20.7
30.5
9.3
24
27.6
40.7
12.4
28
32.2
47.2
14.4
34
39.1
57.4
17.5
40
46.0
67.6
20.6
Wind - Direction
Range: 0 to 360 from North
The direction from which the wind blows. Generally the worst or
most prevalent wind direction can be determined by examination of
the wind rose for the site in question.
Atmosphere - Temperature
Range: 10 to 500K
The ambient temperature of the atmosphere is used in the calculation
of the equilibrium surface temperatures of metallic surfaces exposed
to the flares thermal radiation. It is also used in gas dispersion
calculations.
Atmosphere - Humidity
Range: 4 to 100%
The relative humidity defines the water content of the atmosphere in
terms of the partial pressure of water vapour in the air relative to the
vapour pressure of water at the same temperature. Standard charts
are available relating the wet and dry bulb temperature
measurements to the relative humidity, an example of which can be
found in The Chemical Engineers Handbook. The humidity value
is used in calculation of Transmissivity as described below.
Atmosphere - Pressure
Range: 0.01 to 10.0 bar a
The atmospheric pressure is used to calculate the exit density of the
flared gas and hence its exit velocity.
6-6
Environment
6-7
Background - Solar Radiation

Range: 0 to 100,000 W/m2
The incident solar radiation for the site. Typical values for different
geographical locations are given in the following table.
Location
Solar Radiation
(W/m2)
North Sea
475-630
Middle East
945-1050
UK Land
630-800
Background - Noise
Range: 0 to 150 dB
The background noise is used as a reference noise level to which the
noise from the flare system is added.
The following table gives typical noise levels for everyday
situations.
Intensity (dB)
Situation
Threshold of hearing
10
Virtual silence
20
Quiet room
30
Watch ticking at 1m
40
Quiet street
50
Quiet conversation
60
Quiet motor at 1m
70
Loud conversation
80
Door slamming
90
Busy typing room
100
Near loud motor horn
6-7
6-8
Environment View
Intensity (dB)
Situation
110
Pneumatic drill
120
Near aeroplane engine
130
Threshold of pain
Include Solar Radiation

Check box
Select this check box to include solar radiation in the calculation of
radiation received at a point.
The decision on whether to include solar radiation when designing
flare systems is one for the user. API 521 recommends that this be
considered on a case by case basis. Some consider it more realistic
to exclude solar radiation in calculations.
In deciding whether to include solar radiation consideration should
be given to the frequency and duration of the flaring event, the
probability of personnel being present in the exposed location, the
possibility of sun and flare radiation impinging from the same
general direction, the likelihood of protective clothing being worn
and the ease or difficulty of escape from the exposed location.
Including solar radiation leads to more conservative designs and its
impact can be significant if the flare system design is controlled by
low total radiation limits at longer distances from the flare.
Determining whether solar radiation has been included or excluded
is important when comparing flare system designs.
Include Background Noise
Check box
Select this check box to include background noise in the calculation
of total noise received at a point.
Transmissivity - Method
Drop down list: User/Calculated/CalcNoLimits/Wayne
The value for the atmospheric transmissivity may be either specified
by the user or calculated. The calculation method used is described
in section 14.1.5 and estimates transmissivity as a function of the
6-8
Environment
6-9
relative humidity at the site and the distance of the receptor from the
flame. The correlation is strictly valid for distances between 30-164
m (100-500 ft) and for relative humidities greater than 10%. Outside
of these ranges the correlation may still give acceptable results.
If User is selected the value for the atmospheric transmissivity must
be entered.
If Calculated is selected the value for the relative humidity at the site
must be entered. The transmissivity will be calculated, enforcing the
distance limits of the correlation i.e. distances less than 30m will be
set to 30m (100ft) and distances greater than 164m (500 ft) set to
164m. The minimum and maximum values of transmissivity used
during the calculations will be displayed.
If CalcNoLimits is selected the value for the relative humidity at the
site must be entered. The calculation will be done without enforcing
the distance limits of the correlation. The mi nu mum and maximum
values of transmissivity used during the calculations will be
displayed after calculations are complete.
If Wayne is selected the transmissivity is calculated using a method
that includes the effect of both relative humidity and ambient
temperature - see section 14.
Note a single value of calculated transmissivity cannot be displayed
since in a typical Flaresim run multiple distances between individual
flame elements and multiple receptor points will be considered.
Tracking of each transmissivity value used would be of limited use
so the compromise is to show the minimum and maximum value
calculated.
Calculated atmospheric transmissivities should not be selected if
you are modelling hydrogen or hydrogen sulphide flares which burn
with little or no luminous radiation.
Transmissivity - Value
Range: 0 to 1.0
Atmospheric transmissivity defines the degree of attenuation of the
thermal radiation due to atmospheric conditions. It is expressed as
6-9
6-10
Environment View
the fraction of the radiation which is received at the receptor point.

It must be specified if the Transmissivity Method is set to User.
A value of 1.0 should normally be taken unless exceptional
circumstances are deemed applicable. A specified value of 1.0 for
the transmissivity will mean no attenuation of radiation in the
atmosphere and lead to a more conservative design.
Transmissivity - Min Value
Calculated Value
The minimum value of transmissivity calculated when the
Transmissivity Method is not set to User.
Transmissivity - Max Value
Calculated Value
The maximum value of transmissivity calculated when the
Transmissivity method is not set to User.
6.1.3 Wind Rose Tab

The Wind Rose tab of the environment view allows a range of wind
speeds from different directions to be modelled and the results
plotted on a single graph for a each receptor point.
There are two methods of setting up the matrix of wind speeds
against direction, either for all directions at a range of wind speeds
or for a specific wind speed for each direction. It is also possible to
enable sizing calculations based on the Wind Rose data to calculate
the sizing for each defined wind speed and direction to find the worst
case.
No wind rose calculations
Radio button
Selecting this button disables wind rose calculations.
Run calculations on all wind directions for specified speeds
Radio button
Selecting this option activates Wind Rose calculations for all wind
directions for the specified range of wind speeds. The view will
6-10
Environment
6-11
change to display a table to enter the wind speeds to be used as

shown below.
Figure 6-2, Wind Rose Tab, Range of speeds for all directions
When this option is selected, multiple lines, one for each wind speed
will appear on the Wind Rose plots for each Receptor point.
Wind Speed Table
Range: 0 to 100 m/s
Define the wind speeds for which wind rose calculations are
required. At least one value must be defined.
Run each wind direction with a specific speed
Radio button
When this option is selected Wind Rose calculations will be
activated for a specific wind speed for each wind direction. The view
will change to allow the matrix of wind speeds to be defined as
shown below.
6-11
6-12
Environment View
When this option is selected, a single line will appear on the Wind
Rose plots for each Receptor point.
Figure 6-3, Wind Rose Tab, Specified speed for each direction
Wind Speed Table

Range: 0 to 100 m/s
Define the wind speed for each wind rose direction. A value must be
defined for each direction to complete the data input.
Use wind rose data for stack sizing
Check box
This option is available when wind rose calculations are enabled.
Selecting this option will use the selected wind rose data and method
during sizing calculations. Instead of the stack being sized solely to
meet the wind speed and direction defined on the Overall tab of the
Environment view, multiple sizing calculations will be done for
each of the wind rose data points defined. The wind direction and
speed used for the final sizing can be viewed on the Sizing tab of the
Calculation Options view.
6-12
Environment
6-13
Note this option will slow the calculations significantly.
6.1.4 Dispersion Data Tab

The entries on the Dispersion Data tab are shown below.
Figure 6-4, Dispersion Data Tab
Dispersion Data - Atm. Stability Class

Drop down list: PasquillA through PasquillF
This defines the atmospheric stability class to be used to characterise
the atmospheric turbulence for both gaussian and jet dispersion
calculations.
Flaresim uses the widely used Pasquill stability class designation
from A to F where A is the most turbulent or most unstable
atmosphere and F the least turbulent or most stable.
6-13
6-14
Environment View
Dispersion Data - Terrain Class

Drop down list: Rural / Urban
This parameter characterises the terrain roughness to be used in the
gaussian dispersion calculations.
Dispersion Data - Surface Roughness
Range: 0.0001 to 0.3 m/s
This defines the surface roughness used in jet dispersion
calculations.
Wind Data - Wind Reference Height
Range: 0.1 to 200 m
The reference height at which the wind speed is specified. This will
be used together with the atmosphere and terrain characterisation
information to calculate the wind speed at a given height when
required.
Wind Data - Correct Wind Speed For Height
When set to Yes the wind speed is corrected for the elevation in all
calculations including radiation and temperature calculations. When
set to No this correction is not applied. For dispersion calculations
the correction is always applied regardless of this setting.
This option is new in Flaresim version 4.0. Previous versions did not
correct the wind speed for elevation in radiation and temperature
calculations. The default setting for this option is No to provide
consistency with earlier versions of Flaresim.
6-14
Environment
6-15
6.2 Environment Summary View

The Environment Summary view is shown below. It may be opened
by selecting Environment collection branch in the Case Navigator
and clicking the View button or by double-clicking the Environment
collection branch.
Figure 6-5, Environment Summary View
The view provides a summary of the basic information for all the
Environment Objects in the case and can be used to update input
data items as well as review results.
Export Table
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialog to allow the
Environments summary table to be saved as a comma separated
value (CSV) file, an Excel format file (XLS) or tab separated text
file (TXT).
6-15
6-16
6-16
Environment Summary View
Stacks
7-1
7 Stacks
Page
7.1
Stack View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.2
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Stack View - Details Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Stack View - Sterile Area Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Stack Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
7-1
7-2
7-2
Stacks
7-3
The Stack object allows definition of data to describe each flare

Stack. A flare Stack or boom acts as the support for one or more flare
tips and its length and orientation is a critical part of the design of a
safe flare system. Flaresim offers a sizing calculation option where
the length of a single flare stack can be calculated to meet a defined
thermal radiation limit at a point in the site.
Stack objects also provide an option for calculating the sterile area
around them. This is the distance from the stack base to defined
radiation and noise limits downwind of the stack.
A Flaresim model may contain multiple Stack objects allowing the
modelling of sites containing multiple flares.
Stack objects may be created selecting the Stack menu option in the
Add Items drop down menu or by selecting the Stack branch in the
Case Navigator and clicking the Add button.
An existing Stack object may be viewed by selecting it in the View
drop down menu option; by double clicking it in the Case Navigator
or by selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the View button.
All defined Stack objects will be included in the calculations unless
they have been set to Ignored. A Stack may be set to ignored by
selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the Ignore button. An
Ignored Stack object can be restored to the calculations by selecting
it in the Case Navigator and clicking the Activate button.
Alternatively a Stack object can be ignored and restored by setting
or clearing the Ignored check box on its view. Ignoring a stack will
exclude all the tips located on it from Flaresims calculations.
A Stack object can be deleted either by clicking the Delete button on
its view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the
Case Navigator Delete button.
A Stack Summary view showing the main details of all of the Stack
objects in a case can be displayed by double-clicking the Stack
collection branch in the Case Navigator or by selecting the Stack
collection branch and clicking the Case Navigator View button.
7-3
7-4
Stack View
7.1 Stack View

The following figure shows the Stack view for entering and updating
stack data.
7.1.1 Common Fields

Name
Text
Enter a name to identify this stack object. The entry will be
automatically processed to remove any characters that are not
allowed in file names.
Ignored
Check box
Clear to include this stack in the calculations or set to ignore this
stack when calculating. The effect of setting this check box will be
7-4
Stacks
7-5
to exclude the stack and all of the tips that are located on it from the
calculations.
Status Text
Status message
the data for this stack object is complete and ready for calculation.
7.1.2 Stack View - Details Tab

The Details tab of the Stack View is shown in Figure 8-1 above. The
options on this view are.
Location - Relative To
Drop down list of existing locations
Allows the location of the stack base to be defined relative to another
object in the model, for example another stack. If left blank the
location is relative to the base point of the model at 0,0,0.
The following fields then define the location of the stack base
relative to this location in either Cartesian or polar coordinates.
Location - Northing
Range: -100,000 to 100,000m
The distance of the base of the stack North of the selected reference
location. Updates made to this value will automatically update the
polar coordinate values.
Location - Easting
Range: -100,000 to 100,000m
The distance of the base of the stack East of the selected reference
Location - Elevation
Range: -100,000 to 100,000m
The height of the base of the stack above or below the selected
reference location. Updates made to this value will automatically
update the polar coordinate values.
7-5
7-6
Stack View
Location - Radius
Range: 0 to 100,000m
The distance to the base of the stack from the selected reference
Cartesian coordinate values.
Location - Angle to Horizontal
Range: 0 to 90
The angle to the horizontal of a line from the base of the stack to the
selected reference location. Updates made to this value will
automatically update the Cartesian coordinate values.
Location - Angle from North
Range: -0 to 360
The angle from North of a line from the base of the stack to the
automatically update the Cartesian coordinate values.
Dimensions - Length
Range: 0 to 500m
The centre line length of the stack from the base to the tip support
platform. If the stack is selected for sizing this value will be ignored
and replaced by the calculated size after a successful sizing
calculation.
Dimensions - Angle to Horizontal
Range: 0 to 90
The orientation of the stack relative to the horizontal.
Horizontal stacks (0 ) are usually used for liquid flares on offshore
platforms. Angled booms (30 , 45 , 60 ) stacks are commonly
used for gas flares on offshore platforms. Vertical stacks (90 ) will
be used for most onshore installations.
Dimensions - Angle from North
Range: 0 to 360
The orientation of the stack relative to North. Flaresim works on a
360 compass base thus 90 corresponds to a stack or boom
pointing due East, 180 to due South etc.
7-6
Stacks
7-7
It is important to set the direction of the stack correctly relative to the

wind direction since this will have a significant impact on the
results. For most design purposes, specifying both the stack angle
from North as 0 and wind direction as 0 will give a flame blowing
back along the stack axis which will generally give the worst case
radiation values for design of the installation.
Size Me
Check box
Setting this check box automatically selects this stack for a sizing
calculation. Note that only one stack can be selected for sizing at a
time so this check box will be cleared on all other stacks when it is
set. The stack that is currently being sized can be viewed on the
Sizing tab of the Calculation Options view.
7.1.3 Stack View - Sterile Area Tab

The Sterile Area tab of the Stack View is shown below.
Figure 7-2, Stack View - Sterile Area Tab
7-7
7-8
Stack View
This view allows the calculation of the sterile area around the stack.
The sterile area is the distance downwind of the stack to a defined
radiation or noise limit. The calculations are made at a defined
elevation and in the case of the noise limits for a defined noise basis.
The calculations are carried out for each stack individually. In a
model with 2 or more stacks the sterile area for each stack will be
calculated after setting all the other stacks to Ignored. If you need
to see the sterile area for multiple stacks then this can be calculated
using the Receptor Grid object (see chapter 10).
The options on the Sterile Area tab as follows.
Options - Sterile Area Elevation
Range: -1000 to 1000 m
This defines the elevation to be used for the calculation of the sterile
area distances. Note that the stack base location will be used as
defined.
Options - Noise Basis
Drop down list: Noise/NoiseA/Average Noise
This selects whether the sterile area for the noise limits is to be
calculated on a Noise, A-weighted Noise or Average Noise basis.
Options - Calculate Sterile Area
When set to Yes the sterile area calculations will be performed.
When set to No the sterile area calculations will be omitted.
Sterile Area - Radiation / Noise
Radio buttons: Radiation / Noise
This selects whether the sterile area table displays the Radiation
limits and distances or Noise limits and distances
Sterile Area - Radiation Limit
Range: 0 to 1.0e9 W/m2
This defines each radiation limit at which the sterile area will be
calculated. Up to 10 values can be entered and the list will be sorted
automatically from lowest to highest.
7-8
Stacks
7-9
The default values for the radiation limits in a new Stack object will
be taken from the values defined in the Sterile Area tab of the
Preferences view.
Sterile Area - Noise Limit
Range: 0 to 150.0 Db
This defines each noise limit at which the sterile area will be
calculated. Up to 10 values can be entered and the list will be sorted
automatically from lowest to highest.
The default values for the noise limits in a new Stack object will be
taken from the values defined in the Sterile Area tab of the
Preferences view.
Sterile Area - Distance To Limit
Calculated Value: m
This displays the calculated downwind distance from the stack base
to the defined radiation or noise limit. If the limit was not exceeded
at any point downwind of the stack the words Limit not reached
are displayed.
Export
Button
Clicking this button displays a File Save dialog allowing the current
sterile area table to exported to comma separated value (CSV) file,
an Excel format file (XLS) or tab separated text file(TXT).
7-9
7-10
Stack Summary View
7.2 Stack Summary View

The Stack Summary view is shown below. It may be opened by
selecting Stack collection branch in the Case Navigator view and
clicking the View button or by double-clicking the Stack collection
branch.
Figure 7-3, Stack Summary View
The Stack Summary view shows the input data and results for all of
the stacks in the case. Data input values can be updated through the
summary view if required.
Export Table
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialog to allow the Stacks
summary table to be saved as a comma separated value (CSV) file,
7-10
Tips
8-1
8 Tips
Page
8.1
Tip View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
8.1.7
8.1.8
8.1.9
8.1.10
8.1.11
8.2
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Noise Input Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Location & Dimensions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fluids Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Emissions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Noise Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Flame Shape Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Combustion Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Purge Gas Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Tip Dynamic View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
Tip Dynamic View, Input Data Tab . . . . . . 35

Tip Dynamic View - Results Tab . . . . . . . . 37
Tip Dynamic View - Plots Tab . . . . . . . . . . 38
8.3
Size Tip View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.4
Tip Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
8.4.1
8.4.2
Tip Summary View - Summary Tab. . . . . . 42

Tip Summary View - Dynamic Results Tab 43
8-1
8-2
8-2
Tips
8-3
The Tip object allows definition of data to describe each flare tip. A
flare tip acts as the disposal point for a single fluid. Multiple flare
tips on one or more stacks may be present in a flare system to dispose
separately of fluids due to incompatible properties e.g. warm and
cold fluids, high and low pressure fluids, dry and wet fluids.
Tip objects may be created using the Add-Tip drop down menu
option or by selecting the Tip branch in the Case Navigator view and
clicking the Add button.
An existing Tip object may be viewed by double clicking it in the
All defined Tip objects will be included in the calculations unless
they have been set to Ignored. A Tip may be set to ignored by
selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking the Ignore
button. An Ignored Tip object can be restored to the calculations by
selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking the Activate
button. Alternatively a Tip object can be ignored and restored by
setting or clearing the check box on its view.
A Tip object can be deleted either by clicking the Delete button on
its view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking
Tip objects also have dynamic input data showing how flare flow
varies with time and dynamic results for changing velocities, F
Factor etc calculated from this. This data is accessed through a Tip
Dynamics view which can be opened from the dynamics button in
the tip view.
A Tip Summary view showing the main details of all of the Tip
objects in a case can be displayed by double-clicking the Tip
collection branch in the Case Navigator or by selecting the Tip
collection branch and clicking the Case Navigator View button. The
Tip Summary view has a dynamics tab which shows the dynamic
flow input data and dynamic results across all the tips.
8-3
8-4
Tip View
8.1 Tip View

The following figure shows the Tip view for entering and updating
tip data.
Figure 8-1, Tip Details View
8.1.1 Common Fields

Name
Text
Enter text to identify this Tip object.
Dynamics View
Button
Clicking the
button that is visible on all the pages of the tip
view will open the Tip Dynamics view, see section 8.2
8-4
Tips
8-5
Status Text
Status message
the data for this tip object is complete and ready for calculation.
Ignored
Check box
Clear to include this tip in the calculations or set to ignore this tip
when calculating.
8.1.2 Details Tab

The Details tab of the Tip view, Figure 8-1, has the following data
entry fields.
Details - Tip Type
Drop down list: Pipe / Sonic / Welltest / Combined HP/LP
Selects the type of flare tip required. The nature of the fluid being
flared through the tip will generally determine the type of tip
selected.
For gases, either the pipe or sonic tip types may be selected. Pipe
flares are the simplest type of tip and may be specified for both high
and low pressure gases. If the pressure available is greater than 2 bar
(30 psi) at the tip then a sonic tip can be utilised. Sonic flare tips have
the advantage of low flame emissivities due to more efficient
combustion of the flare gas. For lower pressures a pipe flare is
generally used possibly with steam or air assistance (see 5.2).
Where a combined HP/LP tips is selected the HP tip is assumed to
be a sonic tip and the LP a sub-sonic one. The flow ratio of HP to LP
fluids should be 3 or greater.
For liquids a Welltest tip type should be selected.
Details - Number of Burners
Range: 1 to 1000 for certain sonic flares otherwise 1
The number of individual burners which make up the tip assembly.
This should be set to 1 for all tips unless the tip being used produces
8-5
8-6
Tip View
distinct, separate flames for each burner e.g. the Mardair sonic flare
tip or some types of welltest burners.
Details - Seal Type
Drop down list: None / Fluidic1 / Fluidic2 / Fluidic3 / Molec.1 /
Molec.2
Defines the type of seal. The riser diameter (see Location and
Dimensions tab) and seal type are used solely for calculation of the
pressure at the base of the stack. The values calculated are to be used
for preliminary review purposes only. The seal pressure drop
calculations are based on proprietary data obtained from a flare
vendor.
There are two basic types of seal, Fluidic or Molecular:Figure 8-2 shows the general design concept for the fluidic seal. The
type selection is a function of the opening as defined below
Fluidic1:
50% of total area
Fluidic2:
40% of total area
Fluidic3:
35% of total area.
Figure 8-2, Fluidic Seal
Opening
Diameter
8-6
Tips
8-7
Figure 8-3 shows the general design concept for the molecular seal.
The type selection is a function of the diameter as defined below:Molec.1:
Traditional design. Maximum diameter is 1.7 times
the tip diameter. The pressure drop correlation is
based on a design which gives a body length of 5.5m
(18ft) regardless of the tip diameter.
Molec.2:
Low pressure drop design. Maximum diameter is 2
times the tip diameter. The pressure drop correlation
is based on a design which gives a body length which
is a function of the tip diameter.
Figure 8-3, Molecular Seal
Diameter
The fluidic seal has a number of advantages over the traditional

molecular seal: Lower purge gas requirements and consequent operating costs.
The seal still operates with a high efficiency even if rain water or
chunks of refractory material drop into the baffles. In fact the
water is quickly dissipated because the fluidic seal is located at a
high temperature section of the flare stack.
Lower cost due to the simple construction and light weight. A
48" fluidic seal will typically weigh less than half the weight of a
6" molecular seal.
8-7
8-8
Tip View
Seals are only appropriate for pipe and sonic flare tips. If the tip type
is set to Welltest the seal type will be set to None automatically.
Radiation Method - Method
Drop down list: Global / Flaresim API / Point / Diffuse / Mixed /
Brzustowski / M.Point Brzustowski / Strict API / Chamberlain
Defines the methods to be used to calculate the radiation flux at a
point for this flare tip. This option is only available for use if the
Expert Mode option has been enabled in the Calculation Options
view.
It is normal to use the same radiation calculation method for all of
the flares in a single model. However there may be occasions when
it is desirable to use a particular radiation calculation method for a
specific tip. Since the radiation flux from flare tip to a receptor point
is always calculated tip by tip and then summed there is no
theoretical barrier to using a different radiation method for each tip.
Radiation Method - No. Flame Elements
Range: 1 to 100
Defines the number of flame elements to be used to calculate the
flame shape for this flare tip. This option is only available for use if
the Expert Mode option has been enabled in the Calculation Options
view.
Some radiation methods have a requirement for a fixed number of
flame elements so this input is not available for all methods.
Radiation Method - Element Position
Range: 0 to 100%
Defines the position within a flame element to be used as the source
of the radiation flux. This option is only available for use if the
Expert Mode option has been enabled in the Calculation Options
view.
This input is not available for all radiation methods. Even where it is
possible to update it, this entry should normally be left at its default
value of 50%.
8-8
Tips
8-9
F Factor Details - Method

Drop down list: User specified / Natural Gas / Kent / Tan / High
Efficiency / Cook / Generic Pipe / Modified Chamberlain
Defines the method used to calculate the fraction of the total net heat
release from the flame which is radiated. This was labelled
emissivity in Flaresim prior to version 1.1. It is also known as the F
Factor.
The User specified option allows specification of the value by the
user. Otherwise it is calculated by the selected correlation as
follows:Natural gas: Correlation based on tip exit velocity assuming a
natural gas fluid of molecular weight 19.
Tan:
Correlation based on mole weight
Kent:
High Efficiency:Proprietary correlation between tip type, exit

velocity, fluid molecular weight and degree of
hydrocarbon saturation. Formally known as the
Flaresim method in versions prior to 1.2.
Cook:
Correlation based on exit velocity.
Generic Pipe: Correlation based on refitting Kent, Tan, Natural gas

and Cook methods across a range of exit velocities
and molecular weights.
Modified. Chamberlain:
Correlation based on mole weight and exit velocity.
Where flare vendor data is available it should be used in
preference to a correlation. In the absence of vendor data, the
Generic Pipe method is recommended for a conservative design. For
clean burning, smokeless flares from well designed flare tips in good
condition the High Efficiency method can be used. In practice this
means flares burning paraffinic hydrocarbons of low molecular
8-9
8-10
Tip View
weight fluid (<60) at reasonable exit velocities (> 0.2 mach). For
fluids other than paraffinic hydrocarbons vendor advice should be
sought. In the absence of advice, user specified F Factors of 0.3 to
0.4 are generally reasonable.
Fraction Heat Radiated - Specified/Calculated Value
Range: 0.01 to 1.0
If the Fraction Heat Radiated Method is set to User Specified then
the required value for the fraction of heat radiated must be entered
here. Otherwise the calculated result for the selected calculation
method will be displayed after the model has been run.
Typical values for different types of flare tip are given in the
following table.
Tip Type
Pipe flare
Single Burner Sonic
Multiple Burner Sonic
Fraction Heat Radiated

0.25 to 0.4
0.10
0.05 to 0.1
Unsaturated hydrocarbons burn with higher quantities of

luminescent carbon particles leading to values typically 10-20%
greater than for saturated hydrocarbons.
Correct User F Factor
Drop down list: Yes / No
This entry determines whether a User Specified F Factor should be
corrected by the internal correlations for HP/LP tips or when an
Assist Fluid is defined with the F Factor correction option enabled.
This entry is only visible when a User Specfied F Factor is selected
and is only active when the Expert Mode option is selected in the
Calculation Options view.
The application of corrections to User Specified F Factors was
always enabled in Flaresim version 2.1 and earlier but this changed
to always disabled in Flaresim 3.0 and 3.0.1. This option is new in
Flaresim 3.0.2 to provide user control of the correction. The option
8-10
Tips
8-11
is always automatically set to Yes and the user informed as required

when a version 2.1 case is loaded.
Fraction Heat Radiated - Max Value
Range: 0.01 to 1.0
Defines the maximum value of the heat radiation fraction to be used
for a combined flame and overrides any higher value calculated by
a correlation. This field is only visible when the flare tip is a
Combined HP/LP type.
Flame Length Method
Drop down list: API / Flaresim / Brzustowski / User Specified A/
User Specified B/Integrated
This field selects the method to be used for calculating the length of
the flame. This field is only activated when the Expert Mode option
is enabled in the Calculation Options view. Otherwise the flame
length method will be automatically selected when the Calculation
Method is selected in the Calculation Options view.
The allowed options are:API
Flame length is calculated from heat released
according to equation presented in API 521.
Flaresim
Flame length is calculated from heat released using

following equation.
I2
Q
L = I 1 ---N
where
L is flame length in m
Q is heat release in J/s
N is number of tips
The constants I1 and I2 take the following values for
different tip types.
8-11
8-12
Tip View
Tip Type
I1
I2
Pipe flare
0.00331
0.4776
Single Burner Sonic
0.00241
0.4600
0.00129
0.5000
Brzustowski
Flame length is calculated from flammability limits

using Brzustowski & Sommer method.
User Specified A
User Specified B
User defined constants can be supplied for use with
Flaresim equation given above. The difference
between the A and the B method lies in the internal
method used to calculate the flame shape. Both
methods use the Flaresim vector method where the
flames axial velocity reduces along the length of the
flame based on a reference flame length.
In the User Specified A method the API flame length
is used as the reference when the flame length
calculated from the user defined constants is shorter
than the API flame length. In effect the axial velocity
at the end of the flame will be greater than 0. The
calculated flame is used as the reference when it is
longer than the API length.
In the User Specified B method the flame length
calculated by the user defined constants is always
used as the reference in the calculation. In effect the
axial velocity at the end of the flame is always
assumed to be 0.
Flame shapes calculated using User Specified A
method will be less deflected than those calculated
using the User Specified B method when the
calculated flame length is less than the API flame
8-12
Tips
8-13
length. When the calculated flame length is longer

than the API flame length both methods will give the
same flame shape.
Integrated
Where the flame length calculation is integrated with

the radiation method and it is not appropriate to
select an alternative e.g. Chamberlain method.
User Multiplier
Range: 0 to 2
User defined value of constant I1 for flame length equation given
above. This entry is only accessible when a User Specified flame
length method is selected.
User Power
Range: 0 to 2
User defined value of constant I2 for flame length equation given
above. This entry is only accessible when a User Specified flame
length method is selected.
8-13
8-14
Tip View
8.1.3 Noise Input Tab

The Noise Input tab of the Tip view is shown below.
Figure 8-4, Noise Input Tab
Combustion Noise - Method

Drop down list: Acoustic Efficiency / Low Noise Reference /
Standard Reference / User Reference
Selects the noise calculation method to be used. The Acoustic
efficiency method is described in section 11.3. The other methods
are based on a reference spectrum of noise at a known heat release.
8-14
Tips
8-15
When the Acoustic Efficiency method is selected the following

additional fields are displayed.
Figure 8-5, Acoustic Efficiency Data
Peak Frequency
Drop down list: 62.5/125/250/500/1000/2000 Hz
This defines the sound frequency band at which the peak noise is
generated. The total sound power calculated at this frequency will be
distributed across the other sound frequency bands.
Efficiency
Range 1.0e-10 to 1.0%
The efficiency at which combustion energy is converted to sound
power.
Jet Noise Method
Drop down list: None / Flaresim
The method used to calculate the jet noise contribution.
When the jet noise method is set to Flaresim the noise contribution
from the flare jet is calculated from a correlation based on the exit
velocity. When set to None there is no separate jet noise
contribution.
If the Combustion Noise method is set to Standard Reference or Low
Noise Reference or User Reference the combustion sound power
generated in each frequency band is calculated from a reference
value at a reference combustion duty. The Standard Reference and
Low Noise Reference data used in the calculation are proprietary
data supplied by a flare system vendor.
8-15
8-16
Tip View
Selecting a User Reference method displays the Reference Duty and

Sound Power Table fields shown in Figure 8-4 above and described
below to allow this data to be entered
Reference. Duty
Range: 1 to 1,000 MW
Defines the reference heat release corresponding to the sound power
data defined in the Sound Power Table.
User Reference Spectrum
Range: 1 to 200 dB
Allows the user to define the sound power level at each frequency
band corresponding to the heat release specified in the Reference
Duty field.
When a vendor supplied noise curve is available the information
available can be entered by selecting User Reference for the
Combustion Noise method and None for the Jet Noise method.
8-16
Tips
8-17
8.1.4 Location & Dimensions Tab

Figure 8-6, Location & Dimensions Tab
Tip Location - On Stack

Drop down list: Defined stack names
Defines which stack the tip is located on. The drop down list shows
the currently defined stacks.
Tip Dimensions - Length
Range: 0 to 100m
The physical length of the burner tip. The value is used in calculating
the true gas exit point for flame length calculations and gas
dispersion calculations.
Note if the length is set to 0m the defined tip angles to horizontal and
vertical will still be used to calculate the vector for the fluid jet
leaving the tip, not the stack angles.
8-17
8-18
Tip View
Tip Dimensions - Angle to Horizontal

Range: -90 to 90
The orientation of the tip relative to the horizontal.
Vertical installation of flare tips prevents burn back on the tip and
consequent reduction in tip life. The use of inclined tips on inclined
booms does have the advantage of directing both the flame and any
liquid carryover away from the main platform structure.
Tip Dimensions - Angle from North
Range: 0 to 360
The orientation of the tip relative to the North.
It is not unusual in offshore flares for the tip to be oriented along a
different axis to the boom.
Tip Dimensions - Diameter
Range: 0.001 to 10m
The internal diameter of the burner assembly.
For sonic flares the equivalent diameter is calculated for resolution
of the fluid jet vectors when calculating the flame shape.
Tip Dimensions - Effective Area
Range: 0.0001 to 100%
The actual percentage of the area calculated from the tip diameter
which is available for flow of the gas or liquid.
A value of 100% is generally used for pipe flares. For sonic flares
the value should be adjusted to ensure that the exit velocity is just
sonic at the design flare rate. For liquid burners the value should be
adjusted to calculate the correct exit velocity.
Tip Dimensions - Riser Diameter
Range: 0.001 to 10m
The internal diameter of the pipe from the base of the stack to the tip.
Tip Dimensions - Roughness
Range: 0 to 0.001m
The roughness of the riser to this tip to be used in calculating the
riser pressure drop.
8-18
Tips
8-19
Tip Exit Settings - Contraction Coefficient

Range: 0.01 to 1.0
The ratio of the diameter of the vena contractor to the diameter of the
discharge orifice (tip). If not specified this will be calculated and the
result displayed on the Results tab.
Tip Exit Settings - Exit Loss Coefficient
Range: 1 to 1000
The number of velocity heads which defines the exit loss for the tip.
For a sonic tip the value should always be 1.0. Note that if the exit
loss coefficient is specified the outlet pressure field cannot also be
specified.
Tip Exit Settings - Outlet Pressure
Range: 10 to 10,000kPa
The static pressure at the outlet of the tip, i.e at the point where the
fluid emerges from the tip. Normally this will be calculated and
displayed on the results tab. If specified the exit loss coefficient must
be left unspecified and will be calculated.
The tip exit pressure is used to calculate the properties of the gas at
the exit and hence the velocity of the fluid.
Calculate Burner Opening
Check box
Selection of the Calculate Burner Opening check box causes will
result in the burner opening of a sonic tip being adjusted until the tip
exit velocity is just sonic.
Size Me
Button
The Size Me button opens a pop up window to allow the diameter of
the tip to be sized for a specific exit velocity, optionally using
standard pipe sizes. See section 8.3 for details.
8-19
8-20
Tip View
8.1.5 Fluids Tab

Figure 8-7, Fluids Tab
Primary Fluid - Name

Drop down list: Defined Fluids
Allows one of the defined fluids in your model to be assigned to the
flare tip
Primary Fluid - Mass Flow
Range: 0 to 10,000 kg/s
The mass flow rate of the fluid fed to this tip. The molar flow entry
will be updated automatically.
Primary Fluid - Mole Flow
Range: 0 to 10,000 kgmole/s
The molar flow rate of the fluid fed to this tip. The mass flow entry
will be updated automatically.
8-20
Tips
8-21
The following Secondary Fluid entries will be visible if the selected

Tip type is set to Combined HP/LP.
Secondary Fluid - Name
Drop down list: Defined Fluids
Allows one of the defined fluids in your model to be assigned to LP
flare tip of a Combined HP/LP tip.
Secondary Fluid - Mass Flow
The mass flow rate of the fluid fed to the LP tip of a Combined HP/
LP tip. The molar flow entry will be updated automatically.
Secondary Fluid - Mole Flow
The molar flow rate of the fluid fed to the LP tip of a Combined HP/
LP tip. The mass flow entry will be updated automatically.
Assist Fluid - Name
Drop down list: Defined Assist Fluids
Allows one of the defined assist fluids in your model to be assigned
to this flare tip.
Assist Fluid - Mass Flow
Range: 0 to 10,000 kg/s or Calculated
Defines the flow of assist fluid to the tip. When the assist fluid has
been set to Smokeless Operation then this value will be calculated.
Otherwise either this value or the ratio must be specified.
Assist Fluid - Flow Ratio
Range: 0 to 100 or Calculated
The ratio of assist fluid to fluid being flared. When the assist fluid
has been set to Smokeless Operation then this value will be
calculated. Otherwise either this value or the flow must be specified.
Flow vs Time
Button
Clicking this button opens the Tip Dynamic View which allows the
change in flare flow with time to be defined for dynamic
calculations. See section 8.2 below.
8-21
8-22
Tip View
Combustion Input - Air Ratio

Range: 1 to 10
This is the ratio of combustion air drawn into the flame to the
stoichiometric quantity of air required for complete combustion. It
should not include any air added as an assist fluid. Typical values
might be 2.0 to 3.0.
The value is used in the calculation of the flame temperature.
Combustion Gases - Flame Temperature
Range 0 to 5000 K or Calculated
This is the temperature of the flame that will be used to calculate the
transmission of radiation through water shields and in gas dispersion
calculations for the combustion gases. If the value is left blank it will
be calculated from the heat of combustion and the specified
combustion air ratio.
8.1.6 Emissions Tab

Figure 8-8, Emissions Tab Default
The view above shows the default view of the Emissions tab of the
Tip Object. By default the emissions data for a case is defined for all
tips on the Emissions page of the Calculation Options view.
8-22
Tips
8-23
If the Expert Mode option is set on the General tab of the Calculation
Options view then the emissions input data can be updated on a tip
by tip basis and the view will change to the one shown below.
Figure 8-9, Emissions Tab Data Input
NOx Emission - Basis

Drop down list: Mass/Heat Release / Mass/Mass Flared Fluid /
Mass/Moles Flared Fluid / Sintef Method
This field defines the basis used to calculate the NOx emission rate.
This is either as a ratio to the heat released by the flare, the mass of
flared fluid or the moles (volume) of flared fluid. Alternatively it can
be calculated by the Sintef method as a function of exit velocity and
tip diameter as described in the Methods chapter.
NOx Emission - Rate
Range depends on basis
The generation rate for NOx emissions for the defined basis.
8-23
8-24
Tip View
CO Emission - Basis
Mass/Moles Flared Fluid
This field defines the basis used to calculate the CO emission rate.
This is either as a ratio to the heat released by the flare, the mass of
flared fluid or the moles (volume) of flared fluid.
CO Emission - Rate
The generation rate for CO emissions for the defined basis.
Unburnt HC Emission - Basis
Mass/Moles Flared Fluid
This field defines the basis used to calculate the unburnt
hydrocarbon emission rate. This is either as a ratio to the heat
released by the flare, the mass of flared fluid or the moles (volume)
of flared fluid.
Unburnt HC Emission - Rate
The generation rate for unburnt hydrocarbon emissions for the
defined basis.
8-24
Tips
8-25
8.1.7 Results Tab

Figure 8-10, Results Tab
Exit Properties - Velocity

Calculated value
The calculated exit velocity from this flare tip.
Exit Properties - Mach Number
Calculated value
The calculated exit velocity from this flare tip expressed as a Mach
number.
Exit Properties - Volume Flow
Calculated value
The volume flow rate of the fluid leaving the tip at the tip conditions.
Exit Properties - Calculated F Factor
Calculated value
The final corrected F Factor used in calculations.
8-25
8-26
Tip View
Exit Properties - Contraction Coefficient

Calculated value
The calculated contraction coefficient.
Exit Properties - Exit Temperature
Calculated value
The calculated fluid exit temperature.
Flame Results - Heat Release
Calculated value
The total heat released by the flame from this flare tip.
Flame Results - Flame Length
Calculated value
The flame length calculated for the tip and used to determine the
flames position for the radiation calculations. For a Pipe flare this
will be the same as the API Flame Length. For Sonic flares the flame
length will normally be significantly less than the API value.
Flame Results - API Length
Calculated value
The length of the flame calculated using the method outlined in API
RP521. The method assumes a pipe flare.
Pressure Profile - Table
Calculated values
The pressure profile results table shows the calculated static and
total pressures from the tip exit through to the base of the stack. The
table also includes the pressure drop across the tip, seal and stack.
The Total pressure reported is the static pressure plus the pressure
resulting from the fluids momentum.
The seal pressure drop includes any pressure drop or recovery
resulting from the change in diameter between stack and tip.
Pressure profiles are not calculated for Welltest or Combined HP/LP
tips.
8-26
Tips
8-27
8.1.8 Noise Results Tab

Figure 8-11, Noise Results Tab
Total Noise - SPL

Calculated value
The sound pressure level calculated summing the individual
contributions at the different frequencies.
Total Noise - Ref Distance
Calculated value
Displays the reference distance at which the sound pressure level is
calculated. It is a fixed value and cannot be changed.
Display
Drop down list: Table / Plot
Selects whether the noise spectrum results are displayed as a table or
as a graph.
8-27
8-28
Tip View
Noise Spectrum
Calculated values
This table or graph shows the noise generated as a function of the
sound frequency. The results show the contribution from
combustion noise and jet noise as well as the total noise at each
defined frequency.
Export
Button
Allows the noise spectrum data to be saved. If the noise spectrum is
currently displayed as a table, a standard file dialog box will be
displayed to allow the data to be saved as an Excel XLS file or a
comma separated CSV file. If the data is displayed as a plot it may
be saved as a graphics file. A standard file dialog box will appear to
allow the name and file type to be entered. The allowed file types are
JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF.
8-28
Tips
8-29
8.1.9 Flame Shape Tab

Figure 8-12, Flame Shape Tab
End of Tip - Northing

Calculated value
The distance north of the end of this tip from the origin.
End of Tip - Easting
Calculated value
The distance east of the end of this tip from the origin.
End of Tip - Elevation
Calculated value
The height of the end of this tip relative to the origin.
8-29
8-30
Tip View
End of Tip - Windspeed At Tip

Calculated value
The calculated wind speed at the tip exit. This may be different from
the Active Environment when wind speed correction is enabled.
Display
Drop down list: Table / 3D Plot / 2D Plot - North vs. East / 2D Plot
- North vs. Elevation / 2D Plot - East vs. Elevation
Allows selection of the display method for the flame shape results.
The flame shape is calculated using the calculation method and
number of elements specified by the user in the Calculation Options
view.
Export
Button
Allows the flame shape data to be saved to an external file. If the
data is displayed as a table it may be saved to an Excel XLS file or
a comma separated CSV file. If it is displayed as a plot, the data may
be saved to a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file. In either
case a standard file dialog box will appear to allow the name and file
type to be entered.
8-30
Tips
8-31
8.1.10 Combustion Results Tab

Figure 8-13, Combustion Results Tab
Flame Temperatures - Adiabatic Flame Temp

Calculated value
The flame temperature calculated by combustion of the fluid at the
combustion air ratio defined on the fluids tab. Any air assist fluid
flow is in addition to the combustion air. The adiabatic temperature
calculation assumes no radiant heat losses from the flame.
Flame Temperatures - Calculated Flame Temp
Calculated value
The flame temperature calculated by combustion of the fluid after
allowing for heat loss from the flame due to radiation. The F Factor
calculated or defined on the Details tab is used to calculate the heat
loss due to radiation. The calculation is based on the combustion air
ratio defined on the fluids tab with any air assist fluid flow being an
addition to the combustion air.
8-31
8-32
Tip View
Combustion Gases - Mass Flow

Calculated values
This table presents the calculated combustion gas mass flows. There
are three types of combustion gas result presented.
The basic combustion gases, CO2, H2O and others such as SO2 are
calculated directly from the defined fluid composition. The number
of each type of atom in each component is defined in their structure
in the component database. The combustion products for each atom
type are in the component library and this is used to determine the
quantity of combustion gases generated. Any additional steam assist
fluid is added to the quantity of H2O present.
In the event that a flared fluid is defined by bulk properties data, a
composition is derived from the defined mole weight. Essentially
the composition is assumed by selecting the two straight chain
hydrocarbon components, C1 through C10 from the data base that
have mole weights immediately lower than and higher than the
specified mole weight. The proportion of these two components is
then calculated to provide a fluid with the same mole weight.
The air components O2 and N2 are calculated based on the
combustion air ratio and assist air if any.
Finally the emissions components NO, CO and unburnt
hydrocarbon which is expressed as CH4 are calculated according to
the emissions data provided on the Emissions tab of the Tip object
or the global emissions data provided on the Emissions tab of the
Calculation Options object.
Combustion Gases - Mole Flow
Calculated values
This table presents the calculated combustion gas molar flows.
These are derived from the mass flows using a simple mole weight
conversion.
8-32
Tips
8-33
8.1.11 Purge Gas Tab

Figure 8-14, Purge Gas Tab
Purge Input Data - Purge Fluid

Drop down list of allowed purge fluids
This selects the purge fluid that is to be used. The list displays all of
the fluids defined in the case together with Nitrogen and Methane.
Purge Input Data - Fixed Velocity
Range: 0 to 10 m/s
This defines a fixed purge velocity that is to be maintained. The flow
of purge gas required to give this velocity will be calculated.
Purge Input Data - Fixed Flow
Range: 0 to 10 m3/s
This defines a fixed volumetric purge flow rate that is to be
maintained. The purge gas velocity and mass flow rate required to
meet this target will be calculated.
Purge Input Data - HUSA O2
Range: 0 to 100%
This defines the percentage of oxygen that is to be used in the full
HUSA method calculation for purge gas flow see methods chapter.
8-33
8-34
Tip View
The default value of 6% is suggested in HUSAs papers as being

generally appropriate for hydrocarbon flare gas fluids with
molecular weights of methane and above.
Purge Input Data - HUSA Height
Range: 0 to 500 m
This defines the distance from the top of the stack in the full HUSA
method calculation for purge gas flow. The default value of 25 ft is
suggested in HUSAs papers (see methods chapter for references) as
an acceptable value that will reduce the quantity of purge gas
required without leading to an unsafe condition. Note that this
default does assume that it is acceptable to have a potentially
explosive mixture in the top 25ft of the flare stack.
Purge Results - Table
Calculated Values
This table shows the purge gas velocities and mass flows calculated
by the different purge gas methods.
Note that all calculations are based on the stack diameter not the tip
diameter using purge gas properties calculated at the temperature
and pressure defined for the currently selected environment.
Update Purge Calcs
Button
Clicking this button causes the purge gas calculations to be updated
for the current tip without recalculating the entire Flaresim case.
8-34
Tips
8-35
8.2 Tip Dynamic View

The Tip Dynamic view provides for the input of flow verses time
data to support dynamic calculations. It also provides for display and
plotting of dynamic results for the tip.
Figure 8-15, Tip Dynamic View
The Tip Dynamic view is opened by clicking the

button on the
parent tip view or the Flow vs Time button on the fluids tab.
8.2.1 Tip Dynamic View, Input Data Tab

When the Tip Dynamic view is opened for the first time the Time vs
Flow table will be contain a single blank row as shown in Figure 816 below. New rows in the table are created by adding new time vs
flow data values to the table.
8-35
8-36
Tip Dynamic View
Figure 8-16, Tip Dynamic View, Starting View
Flow Basis
Radio buttons: Mass / Mole
Selects the flow basis for the input data
Interpolation Basis
Radio buttons: Linear / Spline
Selects the interpolation method used to calculate the flows at times
between the points defined in the time vs. flow table.
Care should be taken when using the Spline method if step changes
in flow are defined since extreme values of flow can be calculated as
the method tries to calculate a smooth curve between data points.
Clear Selected Row
Button
Removes the currently selected row from the input data table.
Clear All Data
Button
Removes all the data from the input data table, returning it to the
starting state.
8-36
Tips
8-37
Input Data Table - Time

Range: 0 to 10,000s
The time at which the flow is defined.
Input Data Table - Flow
Range: 0 to 10,000 kg/s or 0 to 10,000 kgmole/s
The flow in the selected basis.
Note if the tip type is set to Combined HP/LP then there will be two
flow data columns, one for the primary HP flow and one for the
secondary LP flow.
It is possible to add data by pasting in data copied from a spreadsheet
using the standard CTRL-V key. If the data being pasted has more
rows than are in the table then press the CTRL-V key repeatedly to
add the data line by line.
The data values in the table will be sorted in order of time during
dynamic calculations so new time verses flow values can be added
to the table in any order.
The overall time for the dynamic calculations is defined as the
Exposure time on the Heat Transfer tab of the Calculation Options
view, see section 15.2.3. If the data supplied in the time verses flow
table does not cover the exposure time then the last flow value
provided will be taken as the flow for the unspecified period of the
run. For example if the exposure time is 900 s (the default) and the
last flow value specified is 10,000 kg/h at 300 s then the flow for the
period from 300 s to 900 s will be taken as 10,000 kg/h.
If dynamic calculations are run including a tip that has no time
verses flow data then the base case flow defined on the Fluids tab of
the Tip view will be used as a constant value for the full exposure
time.
8.2.2 Tip Dynamic View - Results Tab

The Results tab of the Tip Dynamic view is shown below. This
provides the interpolated flows for each time step considered in the
8-37
8-38
Tip Dynamic View
dynamic calculation along with key calculated tip results including

exit velocity, Mach number, F factor, volume flow and heat release
Figure 8-17, Tip Dynamic View, Results Tab
Export Results
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialog to allow the tip
dynamic results table to be saved as a comma separated value (CSV)
file, an Excel file (XLS) or tab separated text file (TXT).
8.2.3 Tip Dynamic View - Plots Tab

This tab allows a plot to be generated showing the variation of a
selected variable with time as shown below.
8-38
Tips
8-39
Figure 8-18, Tip Dynamic View, Plots Tab
Plot Selection
Check box
Selects the result variable to be plotted.
Export Plot
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialog to allow the current
plot to be saved as a graphics file. The graphic file types that can be
generated are JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF.
8-39
8-40
Size Tip View
8.3 Size Tip View

The Size Tip view appears when the Size Me button on the Location
& Dimensions tab of the Tip view is selected. The Size Tip view is
modal and must be closed before you can interact with other
Flaresim views.
Figure 8-19, Size Tip View
Fluid Data - Mass Flow

This field defines the mass flow that the tip is to be sized for. The
value specified here will default to the value entered on the Fluids
tab of the Tip view. If changed and the Ok button is used to exit the
Size Tip view the mass flow on the Fluids tab will be updated.
Fluid Data - Mole Flow
This field defines the molar flow that the tip is to be sized for. The
value specified here will default to the value entered on the Fluids
tab of the Tip view. If changed and the Ok button is used to exit the
Size Tip view the molar flow on the Fluids tab will be updated.
Fluid Data - Design Mach Number
Range: 0 to 1
This field defines the Mach number that the tip is to be sized for. The
value is stored with the case. The tip diameter will be recalculated
each time this value is updated.
8-40
Tips
8-41
Diameter Data - Use Nominal Diameters

Set this to Yes to constrain the tip diameters selected to those
appropriate for nominal pipe diameters.
Diameter Data - Schedule
Drop down list: Available schedules in pipe database
Set this to the required pipe schedule.
When the pipe schedule is changed the new pipe schedule is
searched for a nominal diameter that provides the same or greater
internal diameter to that defined for the previously selected pipe.
This can cause the nominal diameter to change. The calculated Mach
number. is then updated.
Diameter Data - Nominal Diameter
Drop down list: Nominal pipe diameters for selected schedule
This list box can be used to select the nominal diameter for the Tip
from the selected pipe. The actual diameter will then be set by look
up from the nominal diameter and the calculated Mach number will
be updated. This entry will only be active when the Use Nominal
Diameter setting is set to Yes.
Diameter Data - Tip Internal Diameter
Range: 0.001 to 10m
The internal diameter of the tip. If the Mach number is specified then
the calculated tip diameter is displayed here. Otherwise the tip
diameter can be specified to calculate the Mach number. This field
will be only be active when the Use Nominal Diameter entry is set
to No.
Diameter Data - Calc. Mach No
Calculated value
The tip Mach number calculated at the current tip diameter. Note
that when a nominal diameter is selected the calculated Mach
number will differ from the design Mach number.
8-41
8-42
Tip Summary View
8.4 Tip Summary View

The Tip Summary view is shown below. It may be opened by
selecting Tip collection branch in the Case Navigator and clicking
the View button or by double-clicking the Tip collection branch.
Figure 8-20, Tip Summary View
The Tip Summary view provides two tabs. The Summary tab
provides a view of the main input data items and results for all of the
Tips in a case. Input data items can be updated through this tab. The
Dynamic Results tab provides access to the results of the dynamic
calculations for all of the tips in the case.
8.4.1 Tip Summary View - Summary Tab

The Summary tab is shown above as Figure 8-20 above. The table
provides for update of the main tip input data variables and display
of the main results. See section 8.1 for descriptions of each variable.
8-42
Tips
8-43
Export Table
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialog to allow the tips
an Excel file (XLS) or tab separated text file (TXT).
8.4.2 Tip Summary View - Dynamic Results Tab

The Dynamics Results tab of the Tip Summary view is shown
below. It displays the dynamic calculation results for a selected
variable for all the tips in a case as either a table or a plot.
Figure 8-21, Summary View, Dynamic Results Tab
Result Selection
Check box
Selects the result variable to be displayed.
Result Selection
Radio buttons: Table / Plot
Selects whether the selected the results are to be displayed as a table
or a plot.
8-43
8-44
Tip Summary View
Export Dynamic Results

Button
plot to be saved. If the results are currently displayed as a table the
file can be saved s a comma separated value (CSV) file, an Excel file
(XLS) or tab separated text file (TXT). If the results are displayed as
a plot he graphic file types that can be generated are JPG, PNG,
BMP, WMF or EMF.
8-44
Receptors
9-1
9 Receptors
Page
9.1
Receptor Point View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.2
Receptor Point Dynamics View . . . . . . . . 20
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.3
Receptor Point Dynamics - Results Tab . 20

Receptor Point Dynamics - Plots Tab. . . . 21
Receptor Point Summary View . . . . . . . . . 22
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.4
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Point Definition Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Point Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Point Results Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Noise Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Wind Rose Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Point Summary - Summary Tab . . . . . . . . 22

Point Summary - Dynamic Results Tab . . 23
Receptor Grid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
9.4.7
9.4.8
9.4.9
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid Extent Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid Radiation Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid Noise Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid Temperature Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid Concentration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid Maximum Radiation Tab . . . . . . . . . .
Grid Plot Overlay Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid Graphic Report Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
35
39
9-1
Receptors
9-2
Page
9-2
Receptors
9-3
Receptors are the points at which Flaresim will calculate the thermal
radiation, noise, surface temperatures and flammable gas
concentrations resulting from the operation of one or more flare tips.
Flaresim provides the ability to define Receptor Point objects which
define a single point for the calculations and Receptor Grid objects
which define a rectangular set of points in a plane.
Receptor Point objects may be created using the Add-Receptor Point
drop down menu option or by selecting the Receptor Points branch
in the Case Navigator view and clicking the Add button.
An existing Receptor Point object may be viewed by double clicking
it in the Case Navigator view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator
view and clicking the View button.
Receptor Point objects will be calculated unless they have been set
to Ignored. A Receptor Point may be set to ignored by selecting it in
the Case Navigator view and clicking the Ignore button.or restored
to the calculations clicking the Activate button. Alternatively a
Receptor Point object can be ignored and restored by setting or
clearing the check box on its view.
A Receptor Point object can be deleted either by clicking the Delete
button on its view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator view and
Receptor Point views provide access to a Receptor Point Dynamic
view which displays dynamic calculations results for the receptor
point as tables or plots.
A Receptor Point Summary view provides a summary of all the
Receptor Points in a model, showing both base case and dynamic
results. It can be opened by double clicking the Receptor Points
branch in the Case Navigator.
Receptor Grid objects may be created using the Add-Receptor Grid
drop down menu option. A Receptor Grid can be deleted using the
Delete button on its view. Alternatively a Receptor Grid can be
created, viewed or deleted using the Case Navigator view in the
usual way.
9-3
9-4
In addition to calculating radiation, noise, temperature and gas

concentration results for each point in the grid of receptor points, the
Receptor Grid object also calculates the value and location of the
point of maximum radiation within its plane.
Like receptor points, Receptor Grid objects will be calculated unless
they have been set to Ignored. Receptor Grid objects can be ignored
and restored though the check box on the Receptor Grid view or
through the Case Navigator view.
Receptor Grid objects provide a graphical report option to allow
isopleth reports of radiation, noise hectic to be output alongside a
summary of key model parameters.
9-4
Receptors
9-5
9.1 Receptor Point View

The following figure show the Receptor Point view for entering
and updating stack data.
Figure 9-1, Receptor Point View
9.1.1 Common Fields

Name
Text
Enter text to identify this Receptor Point object.
Dynamics View
Button
Clicking the
button that is visible on all the pages of the
receptor point view will open the Receptor Point Dynamics view,
see section
9-5
9-6
Receptor Point View
Status Text
Status message
the data for this Receptor Point object is complete and ready for
calculation.
Ignored
Check box
Clear to calculate the results for this Receptor Point or set to ignore
this point when calculating.
9.1.2 Point Definition Tab

The Definition tab of the Receptor Point view, see Figure 9-1, has
the following data entry fields.
Location - Relative To
Drop down list of existing locations
Allows the location of the receptor point to be defined relative to
another object in the model, for example the base of a stack. If left
blank the location is relative to the origin point of the model at 0,0,0.
The following fields then define the location of the stack base
relative to this location in either cartesian or polar coordinates.
Cartesian Coordinates - Northing
Range: -100,000 to 100,000m
The distance of the receptor point North of the selected reference
Cartesian Coordinates - Easting
Range: -100,000 to 100,000m
The distance of the receptor point East of the selected reference
9-6
Receptors
9-7
Cartesian Coordinates - Elevation

Range: -100,000 to 100,000m
The distance of the receptor point above or below the selected
Polar Coordinates - Radius
Range: 0 to 100,000m
The distance to the receptor point from the selected reference
cartesian coordinate values.
Polar Coordinates - Angle to Horizontal
Range: 0 to 90
The angle to the horizontal of a line from the receptor point to the
automatically update the polar coordinate values.
Polar Coordinates - Angle from North
Range: 0 to 360
The angle from North of a line from the receptor point to the selected
Sizing Constraints - Radiation
Range: 0 to 100,000 W/m2
The maximum thermal radiation to be allowed at this point when
performing sizing calculations.
The following table provides typical values for design levels of
radiation at different locations.
Design
Radiation
W/m2
15,780
Conditions
On structures and in areas where operators are not likely to

be performing duties and where shelter from radiant heat is
available e.g. behind equipment.
9-7
9-8
Receptor Point View
Design
Radiation
W/m2
Conditions
9,470
At design flare release at any location to which personnel

have access e.g. at grade below the flare or on a service platform of a nearby tower. Exposure must be limited to a few
seconds, sufficient for escape only.
6,310
In areas where emergency actions lasting up to 1 minute

may be required by personnel without shielding but with
appropriate clothing.
4,730
In areas where emergency actions lasting several minutes

may be require by personnel without shielding but with
appropriate clothing.
1,890
At design flare release on the helideck of an offshore platform. This value is suggested by the Civil Aviation Authority where the helicopter rotors are stationary. If the rotors
remain turning then a limit of 4,730 W/m2 can apply.
1,580
At design flare release at any location where personnel with

appropriate clothing are continuously exposed.
Sizing Constraints - SPL

Range: 60 to 200 dB
The maximum sound pressure level to be allowed at this point when
Sizing Constraints - SPLA
Range: 60 to 200 dBA
The maximum A-weighted sound pressure level to be allowed at this
point when performing sizing calculations.
Sizing Constraints - Average SPL
Range: 60 to 200 dB
The maximum average sound pressure level to be allowed at this
point when performing sizing calculations.
9-8
Receptors
9-9
Sizing Constraints - Max Temperature

Range: 100 to 600 K
The maximum temperature to be allowed at this point when
Observed Values - Radiation
Range: 0 to 100,000 W/m2
This field allows observed values of radiation at this receptor point
to be defined so that they can be used by the F Factor fitting process.
See Calculations chapter.
9.1.3 Point Properties Tab

Figure 9-2, Receptor Point Properties Tab
9-9
9-10
Receptor Point View
Point Properties - Emissivity

Range: 0.0001 to 1.0
The emissivity of the point which will be used in the heat balance
calculations to determine surface temperature. The emissivity is
used to calculate the radiative heat loss from the receptor point.
A typical value for steel is 0.7.
Point Properties - Absorbtivity
Range: 0.0001 to 1.0
The absorbtivity of the point which will be used in the heat balance
calculations to determine surface temperature. It is the fraction of the
radiation incident on the point that will be absorbed. A typical value
for steel is 0.7.
Point Properties - Area Ratio
Range: 0.0001 to 10,000
The ratio of the area available to allow the receptor to lose heat to
the area of the receptor exposed to the thermal radiation.
A plate with one face exposed to a flare would have an Area Ratio
of 2.0.
Point Properties - Mass
Range: 0 to 1,000,000 kg/m2
The mass per unit area at the point to be used in the calculation of
the rate of surface temperature rise.
Properties - Mass Cp
Range: 0.1 to 10,000 J/kg/K
The mass specific heat capacity of the material at the point to be used
in the calculation of the rate of surface temperature rise.
Properties - Initial Temperature
Range: 10 to 1000 K
The initial temperature of the receptor point.
9-10
Receptors
9-11
Local Environment
Drop down list: Global / Available environments
When set to Global the environment data used for the receptor point
temperature calculations will be the same as that used for the main
model. Otherwise an alternative environment object can be selected
to specify environment data that is specific to this receptor point.
For example if a particular receptor point is shaded from solar
radiation it might be appropriate to link the point to an environment
object that specifies a lower solar radiation. Other examples where a
specific environment object might be useful would be to specify an
environment with low or zero wind speed to account for protected
points where convective cooling might be restricted.
On Plane
Drop down list: None / Northing-Easting / Northing-Elevation /
Easting-Elevation / Maximum / User Defined
This entry sets the orientation of the receptor point and it is used to
calculate the angle of incidence of the thermal radiation on the
receptor.
The default setting is None which means that no correction for angle
of incidence will be applied and the full radiation falling on the point
at any angle will be calculated. This is the most conservative option.
The other options are only active when the Expert Mode option is set
in the Calculation Options view.
Setting On Plane to Northing-Easting, Northing-Elevation or
Easting-Elevation sets the point to lie in that plane. Setting the On
Plane entry to Maximum will cause Flaresim to iterate on the
receptor plane angle to find the angle of maximum radiation. This is
not the same as None since with a multiple element flame or multiple
tips radiation will strike the receptor at varying angles leading to a
reduced total radiation. This option can require significant
calculation time.
9-11
9-12
Receptor Point View
Selecting the final option, User Defined, will display the following
table to allow the angle of the receptor point plane to be defined.
Figure 9-3, Receptor Point Plane Angle
Receptor Plane - Rotation about North - South Axis

Range: -90 to 90
The angle of the receptor point plane to the North - South axis.
Receptor Plane - Rotation about East - West
Range: -90 to 90
The angle of the receptor point plane to the East - West axis.
Changing the setting of the receptor point plane angle can
significantly reduce the radiation result for a point when compared
to the default setting of None. Whether it is appropriate to change
this setting will depend on the nature of the point and the radiation
constraint being considered.
For example if the radiation constraint is for personnel exposure it
would be less appropriate to change the setting since people are
mobile and rounded and so effectively receive radiation from
multiple directions. If the constraint is for a fixed structure in a
known orientation however it would be more appropriate to set the
receptor plane orientation.
As always it is the engineers judgement to make the appropriate
selection.
9-12
Receptors
9-13
9.1.4 Point Results Tab.

Figure 9-4, Point Results Tab
Thermal Results - Radiation

Calculated value
The calculated thermal radiation received at the point from all of the
flares in operation.
Thermal Results - Temperature
Calculated value
The equilibrium surface temperature reached during prolonged
flaring.
Thermal Results - Concentration
Calculated value
The concentration of gas at this point due to jet dispersion of
relieving fluid in flame out conditions. Note that the jet dispersion
calculations have a lower concentration cut off defined on the
9-13
9-14
Receptor Point View
Emissions tab of the Calculation Option view and that

concentrations below this cut off will be reported as 0.
Thermal Results - Wind Speed
Calculated value
The wind speed for the point that is used in the calculation of the
convective cooling contribution in the temperature calculation.
This can differ from the wind speed used for the main model if either
the wind speed correction for elevation option is enabled or if a local
environment object is selected for the receptor point.
Temperature Profile - Display
Selects whether the calculated change in temperature of the receptor
point with time is displayed as a table or as a graph.
Export
Button
Allows the calculated curve of time vs. point temperature to be
exported to a file. If the data is displayed as a table it may be
exported to an Excel XLS file or a comma separated CSV file. If
displayed as a graph it may be exported to a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF
or EMF graphics file. In either case a standard file dialog box will
appear to allow the name and file type to be entered.
9-14
Receptors
9-15
9.1.5 Noise Results

Figure 9-5, Noise Results
SPL
Calculated value
The total sound pressure level at the receptor point. It is calculated
by summing the sound pressure contributions at each frequency.
SPLA
Calculated value
The A-weighted sound pressure level calculated at the receptor
point. It is calculated by summing the A-weighted sound pressure
levels at each frequency.
Average SPL
Calculated value
The sound pressure level averaged across all the frequencies.
9-15
9-16
Receptor Point View
Display
Selects whether the sound pressure levels vs. frequency results are
displayed as a table or as a graph.
Export
Button
Allows the calculated sound pressure vs. frequency results to be
exported to a file. If the data is displayed as a table it may be
exported to an Excel XLS file or a comma separated CSV file. If
displayed as a graph it may be exported to a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF
or EMF graphics file. In either case a standard file dialog box will
appear to allow the name and file type to be entered.
9.1.6 Wind Rose Results

The Wind Rose Results tab shown below displays the results of wind
rose calculations. Wind Rose calculations show the radiation
received at a receptor point for a range of wind directions and speeds
as defined on the Wind Rose tab of the active Environment. If no
wind rose results are available a message stating this will be
displayed.
9-16
Receptors
9-17
Figure 9-6, Wind Rose Results
Display
This controls whether the results from the wind rose calculations are
displayed as a plot or as a table of results. The view will update to
show the results in the format requested.
Export
Button
Allows the calculated wind rose results to be exported to a file. If the
data is displayed as a table it may be exported to an Excel XLS file
or a comma separated CSV file. If displayed as a graph it may be
exported to a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file. In either
type to be entered.
9-17
9-18
Receptor Point View
Button
This opens a standard file open dialog to allow selection of the
layout file for the graphical report of the wind rose plot.
Layout file for graphical report
Filename
This defines the name of the graphic report layout file that will be
used to generate the graphic report for this receptor point wind rose.
The default value set when the Receptor Point is created is defined
in the Files tab of the Preferences view.
Layout files describe the background text, data items and graphics
formatting instructions required to define a graphics report in an
XML formatted file with the extension .LAY.
Standard layout files are shipped with Flaresim to provide graphic
report definitions for 1 and 2 stack systems with 1 or 2 tips on A4
and Letter paper sizes. Appendix A describes the structure and the
elements that make up a layout file.
Generate Graphic Report
Button
This creates a new graphical report window to display the wind rose
results in a graphical report alongside selected data items for the
model. The layout of this report is controlled by the layout file
selected. The graphic report is displayed in its own window and by
default is displayed as a maximised view. The graphic report
window can be minimised, resized and closed using standard
windows methods. A sample is shown below.
9-18
Receptors
9-19
Figure 9-7, Wind Rose Graphic report
Wind rose graphic reports can be printed using the File - Print
Graphic Report menu item.
9-19
9-20
Receptor Point Dynamics View
9.2 Receptor Point Dynamics View

The Receptor Point Dynamics view shown below displays the
results of the dynamic radiation, noise and temperature calculations
for the receptor point. The view is opened by clicking the
button on the Receptor Point view.
The view contains two tabs providing a tabular view of the results
and a plots view.
Figure 9-8, Receptor Point Dynamics View
9.2.1 Receptor Point Dynamics - Results Tab

This view shown above as Figure 9-8, displays a table of the
calculated radiation, temperature, noise and concentration results for
the receptor point as they vary with time in response to changes in
flare flow with time.
9-20
Receptors
9-21
Export Results
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialog to allow the Receptor
Points summary table to be saved as an Excel (XLS), comma
separated value (CSV) or text (TXT) file.
9.2.2 Receptor Point Dynamics - Plots Tab

This view shown below, allow display of a plot of the calculated
radiation, temperature, noise or concentration results for the receptor
point as they vary with time.
Figure 9-9, Receptor Point Dynamics View - Plots Tab
Plot Variable
Check box
Selects the result variable to be plotted.
Export Plot
Button
Exports the current plot. A standard File Save dialog will allow the
plot to be saved as a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file
9-21
9-22
Receptor Point Summary View
9.3 Receptor Point Summary View

The Receptor Point Summary view is shown below. It may be
opened by clicking the Receptor Point branch of the Case Navigator
view and then clicking the View button.
Figure 9-10, Receptor Point Summary View
This summary view for the defined Receptor Points provides two
tabs. The summary tab allows easy comparison and update of the
data input values and review of the results across all the points. The
Dynamics tab displays the results of dynamic calculations across all
of the receptor points.
9.3.1 Receptor Point Summary - Summary Tab

The Summary tab of the Receptor Point Summary view is shown in
Figure 9-10 above. It provides access to the main data input
variables and results for each Receptor Point in the model. See
section 9.1 for descriptions of each variable.
9-22
Receptors
9-23
Export Table
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialog to allow the Receptor
Points summary table to be saved as an Excel (XLS), comma
separated value (CSV) or text (TXT) file.
9.3.2 Receptor Point Summary - Dynamic

Results Tab
The Dynamic Results tab of the Receptor Point Summary view is
shown below. It displays the dynamic calculation results for a
selected variable for all the receptor points in a case as either a table
or a plot
Figure 9-11, Receptor Point Summary - Dynamics Tab
9-23
9-24
Receptor Point Summary View
Result Selection
Check box
Selects the result variable to be displayed.
Result Selection
Selects whether the selected the results are to be displayed as a table
or a plot.
Export Dynamic Results
Button
plot to be saved. If the results are currently displayed as a table the
file can be saved s a comma separated value (CSV) file, an Excel file
(XLS) or tab separated text file (TXT). If the results are displayed as
a plot he graphic file types that can be generated are JPG, PNG,
BMP, WMF or EMF.
9-24
Receptors
9-25
9.4 Receptor Grid View

The Receptor Grid view is shown below.
Figure 9-12, Receptor Grid View
9.4.1 Common Fields

Name
Text
Enter text to identify this Receptor Grid object.
Status Text
Status message
the data for this Receptor Grid object is complete and ready for
calculation.
9-25
9-26
Receptor Grid View
Ignored
Check box
Clear to calculate the results for this Receptor Grid or set to ignore
this grid when calculating.
9.4.2 Grid Extent Tab

The Grid Details tab of the Receptor Grid view, see Figure 9-12. has
the following data entry fields.
Grid Extent - Grid Plane
Drop down list: Northing-Easting / Northing - Elevation /
Easting - Elevation / Elevation - Downwind
This set of radio buttons selects the orientation plane of the receptor
grid. Receptor grids are set up either for one of the three orthogonal
planes or the downwind plane. In Flaresim terminology, the X-Y
plane is Northing-Easting, the X-Z plane is Northing-Elevation and
the Y-Z plane is Easting-Elevation.
Once selected the other fields are used to define the receptor grids
location and extent and the fineness or coarseness of the grid. The
names of these fields will be updated appropriately. For example
when the orientation is set to Northing-Elevation, the offset field
will be titled Easting Offset, the next group of fields will be titled
Northing and the next block Elevation.
For the Elevation - Downwind plane locations downwind of the
origin will have a positive coordinate and locations up wind will
have a negative coordinate. Crosswind offsets follow a right hand
rule i.e. index finger indicates downwind direction, thumb indicates
elevation and second finger indicates positive crosswind
coordinates.
Grid Extent - Offset
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
The offset of the receptor grid plane from the model origin.
Minimum
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
The minimum extent of the grid in the labelled direction.
9-26
Receptors
9-27
Maximum
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
The maximum extent of the grid in the labelled direction.
Number of Points
Range: 1 to 1001
The number of increments that the distance between the minimum
and maximum extents will be divided into.
Properties - On Plane
Drop down list: None / Northing-Easting / Northing-Elevation /
Easting-Elevation / Maximum
The orientation of the receptor and is used to determine the
correction to be applied due to the angle of incidence of the receptor
to the flare. This option is only active when the Expert Options
check box is set in the Calculation Options view.
With the default setting of receptor point orientation to None no
correction for angle of incidence will be applied. This is the most
conservative option.
Setting the receptor point orientation to Maximum will reduce the
speed of calculations significantly.
Receptor Properties - Emissivity
Range: 0.0001 to 1
The emissivity of each point in the grid which will be used in the
heat balance calculations to determine surface temperature.
Typical value for steel is 0.7
Receptor Properties - Absorbtivity
Range: 0.0001 to 1.0
The absorbtivity of each point in the grid which will be used in the
heat balance calculations to determine surface temperature. This is
defined as the fraction of thermal radiation striking a surface that
will be absorbed.
Typical value for steel is 0.7.
9-27
9-28
Receptor Grid View
Receptor Properties - Area Ratio

Range: 0.0001 to 10,000
The ratio of the area of the receptor available for losing heat to the
area of the receptor exposed to the flare. For a flat plate with one face
exposed to the flare the Area Ratio would be 2.0.
Options - Noise Basis
Drop down list: Noise / NoiseA / AverageNoise
This entry defines whether the noise results calculated for the
Receptor Grid are the Noise sound power level, the A-weighted
sound power level or the Average sound power level.
Receptor Grids in versions of Flaresim prior to 3.0 automatically
calculated Noise sound power.
9.4.3 Grid Radiation Tab

The Radiation tab of the Receptor Grid view displays a table or a
plot of the calculated thermal radiation at each point in the grid as
shown in Figure 9-13 below.
Display
Selects whether the thermal radiation results are displayed as a table
or as a graph.
When a new Receptor Grid is created the graph display settings are
set to the defaults defined in the Preferences View, see section 4.4.3.
They may then be modified by using the Zoom and Customise
buttons as described in chapter 12.
Export
Button
Allows the calculated thermal radiation results to be exported to a
file. If the data is displayed as a table it may be exported to an Excel
XLS file or a comma separated CSV file. If displayed as a graph it
may be exported to a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file.
9-28
Receptors
9-29
In either case a standard file dialog box will appear to allow the
name and file type to be entered.
Figure 9-13, Grid Radiation Tab
9.4.4 Grid Noise Tab

The Noise tab of the Receptor Grid view displays a table or a graph
of the sound pressure at each point in the grid. The value displayed
will be the Noise, A-weighted Noise or Average Noise as specified
on the Extent tab.
9-29
9-30
Receptor Grid View
Figure 9-14, Grid Noise Tab
Display
Selects whether the sound pressure results are displayed as a table or
as a graph.
set to the defaults defined in the Preferences View, see section 4.4.3
buttons as described in Chapter 12.
Export
Button
Allows the calculated sound pressure results to be exported to a file.
If the data is displayed as a table it may be exported to an Excel XLS
or comma separated CSV file. If displayed as a graph it may be
exported to a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file. In either
9-30
Receptors
9-31
type to be entered.
9.4.5 Grid Temperature Tab

The Temperature tab of the Receptor Grid view displays a table or a
graph of the calculated final surface temperatures at each point in the
grid.
Figure 9-15, Grid Temperature Tab
Display
Selects whether the temperature results are displayed as a table or as
a graph.
9-31
9-32
Receptor Grid View

Export
Button
Allows the calculated temperature results to be exported to a file. If
the data is displayed as a table it may be exported to an Excel XLS
file or a comma separated CSV file. If displayed as a graph it may
be exported to a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file. In
either case a standard file dialog box will appear to allow the name
and file type to be entered.
9.4.6 Grid Concentration Tab

The Receptor Grid, Concentration tab shows the results of the jet
dispersion calculations as shown below.
Figure 9-16, Grid Concentration Tab
9-32
Receptors
9-33
The jet dispersion results are only available when the jet dispersion
calculations are enabled in the Calculation Options view.
Display
Selects whether the concentration results are displayed as a table or
as a graph.
Export
Button
Allows the calculated concentration results to be exported to a file.
If the data is displayed as a table it may be exported to an Excel XLS
file or a comma separated CSV file. If displayed as a graph it may
be exported to a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file. In
either case a standard file dialog box will appear to allow the name
and file type to be entered.
9.4.7 Grid Maximum Radiation Tab

The Maximum Radiation tab shows the results of the search for the
point of maximum radiation within the grid.
Figure 9-17, Grid Maximum Radiation Tab
9-33
9-34
Receptor Grid View
Maximum Radiation Input - Initial Grid Points

Range: 5 to 1001
The number of divisions used on each axis when calculating the
initial search grid for maximum radiation.
The search for maximum radiation is initialised by searching for the
maximum value in a grid of points before starting a Nelder & Mead
optimisation algorithm. The default value of 11 is usually adequate
but if the grid has multiple regions of high radiation a higher number
might be required to avoid locating a local maximum.
Maximum Radiation Input - Sizing Constraint
Range: 0 to 100,000 W/m2
The maximum allowed radiation within the Receptor Grid during
sizing calculations.
Note using the maximum radiation within a grid as a sizing
constraint is useful only for receptor grids that do not have part of a
flame within the plane of the grid.
Maximum Radiation Input - Calculate Max Radiation
Specifies whether the maximum radiation in this grid is to be
calculated.
Note that calculation of Maximum Radiation is not useful in grids
which contain a part of the flame within the plane of the grid since
the point found will be within the flame.
Maximum Radiation Results - Radiation
Calculated value
The maximum value of radiation found within the Receptor Grid.
Maximum Radiation Results - Location 1
Calculated value
The location of the point of maximum radiation within the Receptor
Grid, Axis 1.
9-34
Receptors
9-35
Maximum Radiation Results - Location 2

Calculated value
The location of the point of maximum radiation within the Receptor
Grid, Axis 2.
9.4.8 Grid Plot Overlay Tab

The Plot Overlay tab of the Receptor Grid view allows the user to
select and define an overlay drawing that will appear as the
background picture in the various isopleth plots.
File Type
Radio buttons: Use External Overlay File / Use Flaresim Overlay
Two types of overlay file may be used.
An external file can be selected. In this case the extents or
dimensions of the drawing must be specified together with the
location of the Flaresim coordinate origin within the drawing.
Alternatively a background overlay picture can be created as an
Overlay object within Flaresim.
In both cases there is a limit to the complexity of drawings that can
be managed by the graphics component that Flaresim uses to
generate isopleth plots. If isopleth results must be integrated with
detailed plot drawings it is suggested that the isopleth results are
exported as a DXF script through the File - Print Graphic Reports
view, see chapter 15. This script will allow accurate integration of
the isopleth results with a plot plan using external software.
External File Type
When the File Type is set to Use External Overlay file the options
are as shown below.
9-35
9-36
Receptor Grid View
Figure 9-18, Plot Overlay, Use External File
File Type - Name

File name string
This entry defines the external graphics file that will be used as a
background picture for this Receptor Grids isopleth plots. Only a
reference to the file is stored within the Flaresim case so the
specified file must be copied separately when moving or
transmitting Flaresim case files.
Browse
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Open dialog to allow the external
graphics file to be selected.
External File - Details / Preview
Radio Buttons
Setting the radio button to Details allows the information about the
drawing dimensions and Flaresim origin to be defined. Setting it to
9-36
Receptors
9-37
Preview displays the contents of the external file with an overlay

showing the Receptor Grid dimensions overlaid on the drawing.
The first two sets of values define the plot dimensions covered by
the external file. The names of the axes displayed are updated as
appropriate to the setting of the Receptor Grid orientation on the
Extent tab.
File Dimension - Minimum
Range: -10,000m to 10,000m
The minimum value for the plot dimension in the external file.
File Dimension - Maximum
Range: -10,000m to 10,000m
The maximum value for the plot dimension in the external file.
The two Flaresim Location of Origin fields define where the
Flaresim 0, 0 point is located within the drawing file using the
drawing files dimensions. Again the names of the coordinates are
updated to match the grid orientation setting.
Location of Flaresim Origin
Range: -10,000m to 10,000m
The coordinates of the Flaresim origin point within the drawing.
Show Overlay
Check box
Set this to include the overlay drawing on the isopleth plots for this
Receptor Grid.
Reset Extent
Button
Clicking this button resets the external plot file dimensions to match
those of the Receptor Grid.
9-37
9-38
Receptor Grid View
External Plot File Example

As an example of how these values should be set, consider the
following. An external plot plan drawing is available which covers
master plot plan coordinates from 1000m to 3000m in the X
dimension and from 0m to 2000m in the Y dimension. In the master
coordinates the flare stack is located at 2600, 1200.
Assuming our Flaresim model has been run with the stack located at
0, 0 within the model and we have a Receptor Grid defined for the
Northing - Easting plane. The settings required to use the plot
overlay would be
Northing Min = 0m
Northing Max = 2000m
Easting Min = 1000m
Easting Max = 3000m
Flaresim Origin Northing = 1200m
Flaresim Origin Easting = 2600m
Generally the dimensions of the plot plan should exceed those
covered by the receptor grid or results can be unpredictable. In our
example this would imply following dimensions for the receptor
grid.
Easting Minimum = -1600m
9-38
Receptors
9-39
Flaresim Overlay File Type

When the File Type is set to Use Flaresim Overlay the options are as
shown below.
Figure 9-19, Plot Overlay Tab, Flaresim Overlay
Overlay Name
Drop down list: Available Overlay objects
This selects which of the Overlay objects defined in this case is to be
used as the background drawings for the isopleth plots in this
Receptor Grid. No check is made that the Overlay has the correct
orientation.
Show Overlay
Check box
Set this to include the overlay drawing on the isopleth plots for this
Receptor Grid.
Chapter 13 describes how to create and edit Flaresim Overlay
objects.
9.4.9 Grid Graphic Report Tab

The Graphic Report tab of the Receptor Grid view allows the user to
display a graphical report of isopleth results or export the data points
for an isopleth curve. Printing or saving of graphic reports is handled
by the File - Print Graphic Reports menu option.
9-39
9-40
Receptor Grid View
Figure 9-20, Graphic Report Tab
Button
This opens a standard file open dialog to allow selection of the
layout file for the graphical report.
Layout File
Filename
This defines the name of the graphic report layout file that will be
used to generate graphic reports for this receptor grid. The default
value set when the Receptor Point is created is defined in the Files
tab of the Preferences view.
Layout files describe the background text, data items and graphics
formatting instructions required to define a graphics report in an
XML formatted file with the extension .LAY.
Standard layout files are shipped with Flaresim to provide graphic
report definitions for 1 and 2 stack systems with 1 or 2 tips on A4
and Letter paper sizes. Appendix A describes the structure and the
elements that make up a layout file.
9-40
Receptors
9-41
Graphic Report Data - Variable

Drop down list: Radiation / Noise / Temperature / Concentration
Selects the type of isopleth to be viewed on the graphic report Radiation, Noise, Temperature or Concentration.
For rapid output of all types of Graphic Report use the Print Graphic Reports menu option.
Graphic Report Data - Contour Interpolation
Drop down list: Linear / Cubic / BSpline
Selects the method used to generate the isopleth curves from the
receptor grid data points.
The Linear option uses the least interpolation and as a result the
points generated will be in closest agreement to the data values in the
grid. However this may result in more jagged looking isopleth
curves if a coarse receptor grid is used i.e. fewer points are
calculated. The BSpline method offers the smoothest curves if a
coarse grid is used but individual points on the curves may not show
such good agreement with the original grid results. The Cubic
method offers an alternative smoothing method.
Graphic Report Options - Label Isopleth Curves
Check box
Set this to generate single letter labels for each of the isopleth curves.
This allows individual curves to be more easily distinguished on
black and white printed output. It is not normally required for colour
output.
Graphic Report Options - Use Layout File Isopleth Options
Check box
Set this to force the isopleth values, colour, line style and thickness
to use the settings from the layout file rather than those specified
within the case for this grid.
Export Isopleth Points
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialog that allows the
calculated isopleth coordinates for the selected isopleth type to be
9-41
9-42
Receptor Grid View
exported. The options for saving are as a XML file, a comma

separated CSV file or as an Autocad compatible script file SCR.
For rapid output of all types of Graphic Report use the Print Graphic Reports menu option.
View Graphic Report
Button
Clicking this button generates and displays on the screen a graphic
report from the selected layout file for the selected variable. The
graphic report is displayed in its own window and by default is
displayed as a maximised view as shown below. The graphic report
window can be minimised, resized and closed using standard
windows methods.
Figure 9-21, Sample Graphic Report
9-42
Shields
10-1
10 Shields
Page
10.1 Shield View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Definition Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Definition Tab - User Water Screen Method 5
Definition Tab - Long Water Screen Method6
Sections Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
10.2 Rectangle Builder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

10.3 Polygon Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
10.4 Pit / Hut Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
10.5 Transform View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
10-1
10-2
10-2
Shields
10-3
The Shield object models the use of water sprays or solid shields to
reduce the transmission of radiation and noise. Each shield object is
composed of one or more polygonal shapes or sections. Multiple
sections may be defined to describe complex shield structures such
as a burn pit.
The transmission of radiation through a shield can be modelled
either by user specified transmissivity factors or for water screens by
transmissivity factors calculated from details of the screen thickness
and the flame temperature. A method is also provided to calculate
the effective thickness of a water screen given details of the water
flow rate and other details of the water spray. The transmission of
noise through a shield is defined by a user specified transmission
factor.
Shield objects may be created using the Add-Shield drop down
menu option or by selecting the Shield branch in the Case Navigator
view and clicking the Add button.
An existing Shield object may be viewed by double clicking it in the
All defined Shield objects will be included in the calculations unless
they have been set to Ignored. A Shield may be set to ignored by
selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking the Ignore
button. An Ignored Shield object can be restored to the calculations
by selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking the Activate
button. Alternatively a Shield object can be ignored and restored by
setting or clearing the check box on its view.
A Shield object can be deleted either by clicking the Delete button
on its view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking
10-3
10-4
Shield View
10.1 Shield View

The following figure shows the Shield view as it would appear for a
newly created Shield object.
Figure 10-1, Shield Details View
10.1.1 Common Fields

Name
Text
Enter text to identify this Shield object.
Status Text
Status message
the data for this shield object is complete and ready for calculation.
10-4
Shields
10-5
Ignored
Check box
Clear to include this shield in the calculations or set to ignore this
shield when calculating.
10.1.2 Definition Tab

The Definition tab of the Shield view, Figure 10-1, has the following
fields.
Details Radiation - Screen Type
Drop down list: User / Water Screen
This drop down list selects the type of shield. The User option is
used for solid shields or water screens when it is desired to specify
the transmissivity of the screen directly. The Water Screen option is
used when it is desired the calculate the transmissivity for a known
thickness of a water screen.
When this field is set to User the view changes to display the
Transmissivity field to allow the transmissivity to be defined. When
the field is set to Water Screen the view changes to that shown in
Figure 10-2 below.
Details Radiation - Transmissivity
Range: 0 to 1
This defines the fraction of radiation transmitted by the shield. This
field is only displayed when the Type field is set to User.
Details Noise - Transmissivity
Range: 0 to 1
This defines the fraction of noise transmitted by the shield. The
factor is applied to the noise power.
10.1.3 Definition Tab - User Water Screen Method

When the Type field on the Details tab is set to Water Screen the
view changes to that shown below in Figure 10-2.
10-5
10-6
Shield View
Figure 10-2, Details Tab, User Water Screen Method
Layer Thickness Method

Drop down list: User / Long
This drop down list specifies the method that will be used to
determine the thickness of the water screen. If the User method is
selected the Layer Thickness field is displayed to allow the thickness
to be specified. If the Long method is selected the fields described in
section 10.1.4 will be displayed to allow details of the water screen
to be provided to allow the water screen thickness to be calculated.
Layer Thickness
Range: 0.001 to 1000 mm
This field defines the thickness of the water screen. The thickness
will be used to calculate the transmissivity of the water screen as a
function of the thickness and the flame temperature of the flare.
This field is only displayed when the Layer Thickness Calculation
option is set to User.
10.1.4 Definition Tab - Long Water Screen

Method
When the Shield type is set to Water Screen and the Layer Thickness
Calculation is set to Long then the following fields will be displayed.
10-6
Shields
10-7
Figure 10-3, Details Tab, Long Water Screen Method
Water Flow
Range: 0 to 1000 m3/s
This field defines the water flow rate for the calculation of the water
screen layer thickness using the Long method.
Nozzle Diameter
Range: 0 to 1000 mm
This field defines the nozzle diameter for the calculation of the water
screen layer thickness using the Long method.
Number of Nozzles
Range: 1 to 100
The number of water spray nozzles used.
Droplet Velocity
Range: 1 to 20 m/s
This field defines the droplet velocity to be used in the calculation of
the water screen layer thickness using the Long method.
Calc. Layer Thickness
Calculated value
This field displays the thickness of the water screen layer calculated
using the Long method.
10-7
10-8
Shield View
10.1.5 Sections Tab

The sections tab of the Shield view is shown below. This view lists
the individual sections or panels that make up the complete shield.
Each section is defined as a polygon with 3 or more points or
vertices to define its extremities. The shield sections may be updated
by selecting the line describing the section and then updating values
in the Section Details region below and / or clicking one of the action
buttons.
Figure 10-4, Sections Tab
Section List
List box: All defined shield sections
The Section List displays all of the shield sections defined for this
shield. Selecting a section in the list updates the Section Details
region with the corresponding information.
10-8
Shields
10-9
Section List - Add Section

Button
Creates a new shield section. The new section will be selected
automatically in the Section List box.
Section List - Delete Section
Button
Deletes the selected shield section.
Section List - Make Pit / Hut
Button
Opens the Pit / Hut Builder view ready to define a new shield. See
11.2.
Section List - Transform Shield
Button
Opens the Transform view to rotate or move the shield. See 11.3.
Section Details - Section Name
Text
This field allows the shield section to be given a descriptive name.
Section Details - Add Vertex
Button
This button adds a new vertex to the bottom of the list of vertices for
the current shield section.
Section Details - Delete Vertex
Button
This button deletes the selected vertex from the list.
Section Details - Sort Vertices
Button
This button sorts the list of vertices for the shield section.
When using the shield section editor it is important that the list of
vertices that define the section are entered in a way that each vertex
is directly connected to the preceding vertex in the list in a
continuous clockwise or anti-clockwise direction.
10-9
10-10
Shield View
For example if entering the vertices to define a rectangular shield

section, the four vertices, A, B, C and D must be entered as shown
below.
Correct
Correct
Incorrect
If vertices are not entered in the correct order their correct extent
cannot be calculated and the radiation and noise reduction results
will be misleading and inaccurate. This can usually be seen as very
irregular isopleths in the Receptor Grid view.
The Sort Vertices button will sort a list of vertices into the correct
order in most cases.
Section Details - Make Rectangle
Button
Clicking this button opens the Rectangle Builder view, see section
11.2. This allows rapid definition of a rectangular shield section.
Section Details - Make Polygon
Button
Clicking this button opens the Polygon Builder view, see section
11.3. This allows rapid definition of a polygonal shield section.
Vertex List - Northing
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
The northing coordinate of the vertex.
Vertex List - Easting
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
The easting coordinate of the vertex.
Vertex List - Elevation
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
The elevation coordinate of the vertex.
10-10
Shields
10-11
10.2 Rectangle Builder

The Rectangle Builder view is shown below. Its purpose is to allow
rapid creation of rectangular shield sections.This view is modal and
must be completed and closed before other Flaresim views can be
used.
Figure 10-5, Rectangle Builder
Rectangle - Height
Range: 0 to 1000m
The height of the shield section.
Rectangle - Width
Range: 0 to 1000m
The width of the shield section.
Centre Point Location - Northing
Range: -10,000 to 10,000m
The northing coordinate of the centre of the rectangle.
Centre Point Location - Easting
Range: -10,000 to 10,000m
The easting coordinate of the centre of the rectangle.
10-11
10-12
Rectangle Builder
Centre Point Location - Elevation

Range: -10,000 to 10,000m
The elevation coordinate of the centre of the rectangle.
Orientation - Angle to North
The angle from North of the rectangle.
Orientation - Angle to Horizontal
Range: -90 to 90 degrees
The angle from horizontal of the rectangle. The default value of 90
degrees implies a vertical rectangle.
OK
Button
Closes the Rectangle Builder view, accepting the input data. Note
any existing section vertices will be replaced by the new rectangular
section.
Cancel
Button
Closes the Rectangle Builder view, discarding the input data.
10-12
Shields
10-13
10.3 Polygon Builder

The Polygon Builder view is shown below. Its purpose is to allow
rapid creation of polygonal shield sections. The most common use
of this view will be to create polygonal sections of 12 or more
vertices to approximate circular water sprays. This view is modal
and must be completed and closed before other Flaresim views can
be used.
Figure 10-6, Polygon Builder
Number of Vertices
Range; 3 to 100
The number of vertices that will define the extents of the shield
section. The default number of 12 will approximate a circular spray
shield to a reasonable accuracy though a greater number can be used
if required.
Radius
Range: 0.1 to 1,000m
The radius of the polygonal shield section i.e. the distance from the
centre of the polygon to each vertex.
10-13
10-14
Polygon Builder
Rectangle Centre - Northing

Range: -10,000 to 10,000m
The northing coordinate of the centre of the polygon.
Rectangle Centre - Easting
Range: -10,000 to 10,000m
The easting coordinate of the centre of the polygon.
Rectangle Centre - Elevation
Range: -10,000 to 10,000m
The elevation coordinate of the centre of the polygon.
Orientation - Angle to North
The angle from North of the polygon.
Orientation - Angle to Horizontal
The angle from horizontal of the polygon. The default value of 90
degrees implies a vertical polygon.
OK
Button
Closes the Polygon Builder view, accepting the input data. Note any
existing section vertices will be replaced by the new polygon data.
Cancel
Button
Closes the Polygon Builder view, discarding the input data.
10-14
Shields
10-15
10.4 Pit / Hut Builder

The Pit / Hut Builder view is shown below. The function of this view
is to create the multiple shield sections that make up a burn pit or
alternatively a protective hut. It will automatically create 4
rectangular wall sections and a rectangular base or roof section. This
view is modal and must be closed before other Flaresim views can
be used.
Figure 10-7, Pit / Hut Builder
Details
Radio button: Pit / Hut
Selects whether the view will define data for a pit or a hut.
In both cases 4 vertical rectangular walls and a horizontal
rectangular section will be created from the data supplied. In the
case of a Pit the horizontal section will form the base of the burn pit
while for a Hut the horizontal section will form the roof.
Length (Northing Dimension)
The length of the burn pit/hut. The length is assumed to be the
dimension in the north-south direction.
10-15
10-16
Pit / Hut Builder
Width (Easting Dimension)

The width of the burn pit/hut.The width is assumed to be the
dimension in the east-west direction.
Depth / Height
The depth of the burn pit or the height of the hut.
Rectangle Centre - Northing
Range: -10,000 to 10,000m
The northing coordinate of the centre of the burn pit or hut base.
Rectangle Centre - Easting
Range: -10,000 to 10,000m
The easting coordinate of the centre of the burn pit or hut base.
Rectangle Centre - Elevation
Range: -10,000 to 10,000m
The elevation coordinate of the centre of the burn pit or hut base.
OK
Button
Closes the Pit/Hut Builder view, accepting the input data. Note any
existing shield section data will be replaced by the new pit/hut data.
Cancel
Button
Closes the Pit Builder view, discarding the input data.
10-16
Shields
10-17
10.5 Transform View

The Transform view is shown below. The purpose of this view is to
relocate or rotate an existing shield section. It is used by entering the
data required to define the move or rotation and then clicking the
Apply button
Figure 10-8, Transform View
Move Section - North

Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
This defines the distance the shield sections are to be moved in the
north-south direction.
Move Section - East
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
This defines the distance the shield sections are to be moved in the
east-west direction.
Move Section - Elevation
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
This defines the distance the shield sections are to be moved up or
down.
10-17
10-18
Transform View
Rotate Section - Angle to North

This defines the amount the shield sections are to be rotated from
North i.e. around a vertical axis.
Rotate Section - Angle to Horizontal
This defines the amount the shield sections are to be rotated from the
vertical i.e. around a horizontal axis.
Rotation Centre Point - Northing
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
This defines the north coordinate for the centre of rotation to be used
when rotating the shield sections.
Rotation Centre East
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
This defines the east coordinate for the centre of rotation to be used
when rotating the shield sections.
Rotation - Centre Elevation
Range: -10,000 to 10,000 m
This defines the elevation coordinate for the centre of rotation to be
used when rotating the shield sections.
Apply Transform To All Sections
Check box
If this check box is set then the transform will be applied to all of the
sections of the shield. If not it will only be applied to the section that
was selected when the Transform button was clicked.
OK
Button
This closes the Transform view and applies the specified movement
or rotation to the shield section.
Cancel
Button
Close the Transform view, discarding any defined transformation
data.
10-18
Shields
10-19
In applying a transform for simultaneous movement and rotation the

order in which these are applied is firstly movement, secondly
rotation from North around the vertical axis and finally rotation from
horizontal around the horizontal axis.
The effect of a given transform is not always obvious and it is
suggested that more complex movements be done in single steps to
avoid possible confusion.
10-19
10-20
10-20
Transform View
Dispersion
11-1
11 Dispersion
Page
11.1 Dispersion View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4
11.1.5
11.1.6
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Input Data Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Pollutants Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Plot Overlay Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Graphic Report Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
11.2 Implementation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
11-1
11-2
11-2
Dispersion
11-3
The Dispersion object provides a Gaussian dispersion calculation to

model the dispersion of combustion gases from burning flares and
dispersion of relieved fluid in the event of a flame out condition.
Gaussian dispersion is a simple model of gas dispersion appropriate
for a first pass screening of emissions from a flare system. In its
current implementation in Flaresim it is suitable for buoyant fluids
only and does not include modelling of terrain or structure effects,
both of which can have a significant impact on dispersion results.
The Dispersion object allows generation of contour isopleth results
for a single pollutant or a simple downwind plot for multiple
pollutants. The source of pollutants is either the calculated
combustion gas or the components in the relieved fluid. Multiple
Dispersion objects can be defined to carry out different calculations.
Dispersion objects may be created selecting the Add-Dispersion
drop down menu option or by selecting the Dispersion branch in the
Case Navigator and clicking the Add button.
An existing Dispersion object may be viewed by double clicking it
in the Case Navigator or by selecting it in the Case Navigator and
clicking the View button.
Dispersion objects will be included in the calculations providing that
the appropriate option has been selected in the Calculation Options
view unless they have been set to Ignored. A Dispersion may be set
to ignored by selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the
Ignore button. An Ignored Dispersion object can be restored to the
calculations by selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the
Activate button. Alternatively a Dispersion object can be ignored
and restored by setting or clearing the Ignored check box on its view.
A Dispersion object can be deleted either by clicking the Delete
clicking the Case Navigator Delete button.
11-3
11-4
Dispersion View
11.1 Dispersion View

The following figure shows the Dispersion view for entering and
updating Dispersion data.
Figure 11-1, Dispersion View

Name
Text
Enter a name to identify this Dispersion object. The entry will be
Status Text
Status message
the data for this Dispersion object is complete and ready for
calculation.
11-4
Dispersion
11-5
Ignored
Check box
Clear to include this Dispersion in the calculations or set to ignore
this Dispersion when calculating. The effect of setting this check
box will be to exclude the Dispersion object from the calculations.
Dispersion objects will only be considered for calculation if the
appropriate option is set in the General tab of the Calculations
Options view.
11.1.2 Input Data Tab

The Input Data tab of a newly created Dispersion object is as shown
in Figure 11-1 above. The following fields determine the type of
Dispersion calculation that will be performed.
Pollutant Source
Radio buttons: Combustion Product / Unburnt Flared Fluid
If the combustion product option is selected the list of pollutant
components will be loaded from the combustion gas compositions
calculated for the flare tips in the model. If the Unburnt Flared Fluid
option is selected the list of pollutant components will be loaded
from the component lists of the fluids in the model.
If the flared fluids are defined by bulk properties then no dispersion
modelling can be performed for the flared fluid. Combustion gas
modelling can still be done in this case since the combustion gas
composition can be calculated using an assumed composition.
Calculation Type
Radio buttons: Contour Plot / Downwind Line Plot
The dispersion calculations can be performed to generate either a
composition isopleth contour plot for a single pollutant or a plot of
mu lip le pollutant compositions along a single line downwind of a
selected origin.
11-5
11-6
Dispersion View
Contour Plot Data Entry

The data entry items for a contour plot dispersion calculation are
shown below.
Figure 11-2, Contour Plot Data Entry
Contour Plot Extent - Contours Height

Range: 0m to 1,000 m
The height of the contours plane. All contours are generated for a
horizontal plane i.e. a Northing-Easting orientation.
Northing - Minimum
Range: -50,000 to 50,000 m
The minimum extent of the contour plot in the northing direction.
Northing - Maximum
Range: -50,000 to 50,000 m
The maximum extent of the contour plot in the northing direction.
Northing - Number of Points
Range: 1 to 1001
11-6
Dispersion
11-7
Easting - Minimum
Range: -50,000 to 50,000 m
The minimum extent of the contour plot in the easting direction.
Easting - Maximum
Range: -50,000 to 50,000 m
The maximum extent of the contour plot in the easting direction.
Easting - Number of Points
Range: 1 to 1001
Downwind Line Plot Data Entry

The data entry items for a contour plot dispersion calculation are
shown below.
Figure 11-3, Downwind Line Plot Data Entry
Line Plot Details - Line Through Point

Drop down list: Origin and defined tip exit locations
This entry defines the point on which the downwind line calculation
is based. The downwind distances specified are calculated from this
selected point.
11-7
11-8
Dispersion View
Line Plot Details - Height For Calculation

Range: 0m to 1,000 m
The height at which the pollutant concentrations are to be calculated.
Downwind Distance - Minimum
Range: 0 to 50,000 m
The minimum downwind distance for the line plot.
Downwind Distance - Maximum
Range: 0 to 50,000 m
The maximum downwind distance for the line plot.
Downwind Distance - Number of Points
Range: 1 to 1001
11.1.3 Pollutants Tab

Figure 11-4, Pollutants Tab
11-8
Dispersion
11-9
The Pollutants tab view shows a list of the pollutant components

found in the selected Pollutant source.
If this is set to combustion gases all of the combustion results for
each active tip are scanned to complete the list of pollutants though
the O2 and N2 components are not added to the list. If the source is
set to Flared Fluid all of the active fluid compositions in the case are
scanned. If all of the active fluids are defined by bulk properties then
the pollutant list will be empty.
Plot
Check box
Set the check box for the pollutants that should be included in the
dispersion calculations. For a contour calculation only one
component may be selected. Multiple components can be selected
for a downwind line plot.
11.1.4 Results Tab

Figure 11-5, Results Tab, Downwind Line Results
11-9
11-10
Dispersion View
The view above shows the results obtained for a downwind line plot
dispersion calculations. The view below shows the results for a
contour calculation. In both cases the Display and Export options
available are the same.
Figure 11-6, Results Tab, Contour Results
Display
Selects whether the dispersion results are displayed as a table or as
a graph.
When a new Dispersion object is created the graph display settings
are set to the defaults defined in the Preferences View, see section
5.4.
Export
Button
Allows the calculated thermal radiation results to be exported to a
file. If the data is displayed as a table it may be exported to an Excel
XLS file or a comma separated CSV file. If displayed as a graph it
11-10
Dispersion
11-11
may be exported to a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file.

In either case a standard file dialog box will appear to allow the
name and file type to be entered.
The contour plot view may be customised using the Zoom and
Customise options as described in Chapter 13.
11.1.5 Plot Overlay Tab

The options in the Plot Overlay tab of the Dispersion object apply to
the contour plot calculation type only. Their operation is identical to
that described for the Plot Overlay tab of the Receptor Grid object,
see section 10.3.8.
11.1.6 Graphic Report Tab

The options in the Graphic Report tab of the Dispersion object apply
to the contour plot calculation type only. Their operation is identical
to that described for the Graphic Report tab of the Receptor Grid
object, see section 10.3.9.
Graphic Reports are not available for the downwind line plot
dispersion option.
11-11
11-12
Implementation Details
11.2 Implementation Details

The Flaresim Gaussian dispersion calculations make the following
key assumptions in their implementation.
A. The gas is assumed to be buoyant.
In the case of the combustion gases this is a reasonable assumption
at normal flame temperatures. In the case of the uncombusted flared
fluid, a check is made to confirm that the temperature/mole weight
of the fluid leads to a gas density that is lighter than air at 120C as a
precondition for running the calculations.
B. The combustion gas source is assumed to be the end of the flame.
The Flame Shape tab of the Tip view can be used to see the location
of the end of the flame.
C. Multiple sources are summed to provide a final result
If multiple sources are specified in a model i.e. there are multiple
tips then the dispersion results are calculated for each individual tip
and then summed to give the final result.
D. Minimum Distance is 100m
The dispersions coefficients used are calculated from correlations
that were validated for a minimum distance of 100m downwind of
the source. While Flaresim may calculate Gaussian dispersion
results at closer distances they should be regarded as extrapolations
and of low reliability.
11-12
Overlays And Isopleths
12-1
12 Overlays And Isopleths

Page
12.1 Overlay View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
12.1.4
12.1.5
12.1.6
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Editor Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overlay Editor Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overlay Editor - Object Properties . . . . . . 10
Overlay Editor - Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
12.2 Zoom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

12.3 Isopleth Customise View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
Plot Details Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Contour Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Text Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
12-1
12-2
Page
12-2
12-3
Overlays are drawings such as plot plans created in Flaresim to add

as background pictures to isopleth plots to show graphically the
extent of the isopleths. The overlay editor provided allows creation
of simple drawings but is not a a substitute for a full graphics
program. Externally created files can also be used as background
pictures - see the Plot Overlay tab of Receptor Grid and Dispersion
views.
Overlay objects may be created using the Add-Overlay drop down
menu option or by selecting the Overlay branch in the Case
An existing Overlay object may be viewed by double clicking it in
the Case Navigator view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator
Overlay objects can be used by one or more Receptor Grid or
Dispersion objects (client objects). Overlays are selected and their
display is controlled through the Plot Overlay tab of the client object
view.
Overlay objects can be deleted by selecting them in the Case
Navigator and clicking the Delete button or by using the Delete
button on their view.
Isopleth Zoom and Isopleth Customisation views are accessible
from all isopleth display tabs. These include the Radiation, Noise,
Temperature and Concentration tabs of the Receptor Grid views and
the Results tab of the Dispersion object view when used for
dispersion contour calculations. The Zoom and Customisation views
allow the appearance of individual isopleths to be manipulated.
Isopleth Zoom and Isopleth Customisation views pop up alongside
a particular isopleth display and will close automatically when that
display is closed.
12-3
12-4
Overlay View
12.1 Overlay View

The following figure show the Overlay view for creating and
modifying overlay pictures.
Figure 12-1, Overlay View

Name
Text
Enter text to identify this Receptor Point object.
12.1.2 Details Tab

The Details tab of the Overlay view, see Figure 12-1, has the
following data entry fields.
12-4
12-5
Overlay Type -Overlay Plane

Drop down list: Northing-Easting / Elevation-Northing /
Elevation-Easting
Defines the plane of the Overlay drawing. Selection of the plane
automatically updates the labels for the remaining entries in the this
tab.
File Dimension - Minimum
Range: -50,000 to 50,000 m
The minimum extent of the overlay drawing in the labelled
direction.
File Dimension - Maximum
Range: -50,000 to 50,000 m
The maximum extent of the overlay drawing in the labelled
direction.
Update Details From Grid / Dispersion - Select
Drop down list: All Grids and Dispersions in Case
This drop down provides a list of all of the Receptor Grid and
Dispersion objects in the case so that it can be used as the basis for
setting the Overlay dimensions.
Update Details From Grid / Dispersion - Update
Button
Clicking this copies the orientation and each axis minimum and
maximum dimensions from the selected Receptor Grid or
Dispersion object. This is a one-off copy and no link is made
between the Overlay and the selected source object.
12.1.3 Editor Tab

The Overlay Editor tab allows the creation and modification of
background graphics from scratch. The view shown below has three
main sections, the tool bar, the information and setting region and
the drawing display.
12-5
12-6
Overlay View
Figure 12-2, Editor Tab
Current Location - X Loc

Cursor location in selected units
This updates as the mouse is moved around the drawing to show the
X location of the cursor.
Current Location - Y Loc
Cursor location in selected units
This updates as the mouse is moved around the drawing to show the
Y location of the cursor.
Show Stacks
Check box
If this check box is set the stacks will be added to the displayed
overlay drawing to act as guides for other drawing actions. Clearing
the check box clears the stack and tip elements. The stack drawing
elements will not form part of the saved Overlay. The setting is not
saved.
12-6
12-7
The stack elements shown are the projection of the stack onto the
Overlay plane i.e. vertical stacks will appear as a point on an
Overlay with a Northing-Easting orientation.
Refresh
Button
Clicking this button updates any open Receptor Grid or Dispersion
isopleth plot views that are using the current Overlay so that they
display the latest version of the Overlay. Newly opened isopleth
views and report graphics always display the latest Overlay version.
12.1.4 Overlay Editor Tool bar

Figure 12-3, Overlay Editor Tool bar
The icons on this tool bar may be clicked to perform the following
actions or select a drawing mode. A blue box is shown around the
current active icon.
Opens a file to import into the current Overlay. A standard
windows File Open Dialog will be displayed to allow the file
to be selected. Allowed types of input file are JPG, PNG,
BMP, WMF or EMF standard Windows file types, Flaresim
version 2 overlays FSG and Flaresim version 3 overlays
FSO.
The imported file will replace the current drawing. If you
want to add an external file to an existing Overlay use the
Add Picture option
.
Exports the current Overlay picture. A standard windows
File Save Dialog will be displayed to allow the export file to
be selected. The file may be saved as a JPG, PNG, BMP,
WMF or EMF file.
12-7
12-8
Overlay View
Puts the drawing in selection and edit mode. When this icon
is selected, clicking objects in the drawing selects them for
editing, as described in section below.
Puts the drawing in Add Line mode.selection When this icon

is selected, clicking and dragging in the drawing will create
a new line.
Puts the drawing in Add Rectangle mode. When this icon is
selected, clicking and dragging in the drawing will create a
new rectangle.
Puts the drawing in Add Rounded Rectangle mode. When
this icon is selected, clicking and dragging in the drawing
will create a new rounded rectangle.
Puts the drawing in Add Ellipse mode. When this icon is
selected, clicking and dragging in the drawing will create a
new ellipse or circle.
Puts the drawing in Add Polyline mode. When this icon is
selected, the first click will start a multiple segment line and
each subsequent click adds a new segment. Double clicking
or the Esc key indicate completion of the Polyline.
Puts the drawing in Add Polygon mode. When this icon is
selected, the first click will start a drawing a polygon and
each subsequent click adds a new side to the polygon.
Double clicking or the Esc key indicate completion and
closure of the Polygon.
Puts the drawing in Add Text mode. Click the left mouse
button at the point where the text is to start - a vertical
blinking line will be displayed. Type the text and finish by
hitting the enter key.
12-8
12-9
Puts the drawing in Add Picture mode. Using the Add

Picture mode is a two step process.
First as soon as the icon is clicked a File Open dialog will
appear to allow selection of the picture to be added. A JPG,
PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF file can be selected.
After file selection, clicking and dragging in the drawing will
define a box within which the picture from the file will be
drawn. A single picture can be added to the drawing multiple
times. To change the picture being added, click the icon
again.
Displays a drop down list to allow selection of the properties
for new objects or to change the style of an existing object.
The options in the list are shown below and their usage is
covered below.
Figure 12-4, Object Properties Drop Down
Displays a drop down list to allow the rearrangement of the

relative positioning, orientation or grouping of the selected
object in Edit Mode. The options in the list are shown below
and their usage is covered below.
12-9
12-10
Overlay View
Figure 12-5, Object Arrange Drop Down
Zooms in on the overlay drawing i.e. displays the drawing at

a larger scale. Scroll bars will appear if required and can be
used to scroll around the drawing.
Zooms out on the overlay drawing i.e. displays the drawing
at a smaller scale.
Displays the currently selected zoom size of the
drawing as a percentage of the full size. Drop down button
can be used to select pre-defined zoom percentages.
12.1.5 Overlay Editor - Object Properties

The Overlay Editor is object based and the colour and drawing style
of each object are set using the
drop down list. This drop down
sets the object properties for new objects added in Draw Mode or
changes the properties of objects selected in Edit Mode.
The properties in the drop down list that can be set are.
Line Colour
This displays a standard windows Colour Selection Dialog as shown
below. Click the colour required and then the Ok button. The
selected colour applies to individual line objects, polyline objects
and the outside lines for rectangle, rounded rectangle, ellipse and
polygon objects.
12-10
12-11
Figure 12-6, Colour Selection Dialog
Line Style
This displays the following dialog to allow the line width and line
style to be selected. Enter the line width required and select the line
style from the drop down list then click Ok. The selected style
applies to individual line objects, polyline objects and the outside
lines for rectangle, rounded rectangle, ellipse and polygon objects.
Figure 12-7, Line Style Selection
Fill Colour
This displays the standard windows Colour Selection Dialog as
shown above. The selected colour applies to the interior of rectangle,
rounded rectangle, ellipse and polygon objects.
12-11
12-12
Overlay View
Fill Style
This displays the following dialog. Select the Fill style from the drop
down list and click Ok. The selected fill style applies to the interior
of rectangle, rounded rectangle, ellipse and polygon objects.
Figure 12-8, Fill Style Selection
Background Colour
shown above. The selected colour applies background colour of the
plot.
Text Colour
shown above. The selected colour applies to the text objects.
Text Font
This displays a standard windows Font Properties Dialog as shown
below. Select the font name, size and style and click Ok. Note that
the font size selected has to be scaled for use on the overlay and so
a given point size may not display with the exact height requested.
12-12
12-13
Figure 12-9, Font Properties Dialog
12.1.6 Overlay Editor - Edit Mode

In Edit mode it is possible to modify existing objects in the plot
overlay. Edit mode is selected by clicking the
button in the tool
bar. Once the editor is in edit mode the cursor will change to show a
simple arrow.
Edit mode can be used to move, resize, change the properties or
change the arrangement of the objects that make up a plot overlay.
Selecting Objects
A single object can be selected by clicking on it with the left mouse
button. Once selected the object will display white boxes at the
corners and sides of its bounding rectangle as shown below.
Figure 12-10, Selected Object
12-13
12-14
Overlay View
Multiple objects can be selecting by clicking and holding the left

mouse button to draw a rectangle around multiple objects. In this
case grey boxes are displayed at the corners and sides of the
rectangles bounding each selected object. Alternatively hold down
the Shift key and click to select multiple objects.
Resizing Objects
A selected object can be resized by moving the cursor over one of
the white boxes in the bounding rectangle. When the cursor changes
to a two headed arrow, click and hold the left mouse button then drag
to resize the object.
Moving Objects
An object can be moved by clicking and holding the left mouse
button on the object and dragging the object to the new position. The
cursor will show a four arrowed icon. To move multiple objects first
select them then click and drag one of the them.
Changing Object Properties
The properties of an object can be changed by selecting it then using
the
drop down to select the property to be changed.
Rotating and Flipping Objects
Objects can be rotated or flipped by selecting it then using the
drop down to select the angle of rotation or horizontal or vertical
flip.
Changing Object Stacking Order
The stacking order of objects, i.e. whether one object is displayed in
front or behind another object, is set by selecting it then using the
drop down to bring the object forward or in front of other
objects or send it backwards or behind other objects.
Grouping or Ungrouping Objects
Multiple objects may be grouped together by selecting them and
then using the group option from the
drop down. The group of
objects can then be treated as a single object for other
transformations. A grouped object can be broken into individual
objects again by selecting it and using the ungroup from the same
drop down menu.
12-14
12-15
12.2 Zoom View

The Zoom view shown below will appear on clicking the Zoom
button on a Receptor Grid isopleth or a Dispersion object contour
plot. The view will appear beside the parent object view and will
remain open until closed or until a different tab is selected in the
parent object. More than one Zoom view can be open at a time.
Figure 12-11, Zoom View
The zoom view allows the isopleth to be rescaled to zoom in on a

particular section of the isopleth and view its contents in more detail.
This is done without recalculating the results, all isopleths drawn
will be calculated by interpolation from the original results.
There are two ways of establishing the new scale for the isopleth plot
axes.
Firstly, when the Zoom view is open, moving the cursor over
isopleth shows a
cursor. When this is displayed you can click
and drag in the isopleth to select the new zoom region. The updated
scale values will be displayed in the Zoom view.
Alternatively the Zoom extents can be set through the zoom view.
Zoom Extents - Min
Range: Constrained by isopleth extents
Enter the minimum scale value for the axis.
12-15
12-16
Zoom View
Zoom Extents - Max

Range: Constrained by isopleth extents
Enter the minimum scale value for the axis.
Note the labels for the Min and Max entries will be updated
according to the orientation of the parent object isopleth.
Apply
Button
Clicking this button redraws the isopleths with the current zoom
extents.
Reset
Button
Clicking this button sets the zoom extents back to the original
Receptor Grid or Dispersion extents and redraws the isopleths.
Update Extents From Zoom
Button
Clicking this button copies the current zoom extents to the input
extents of the parent Receptor Grid or Dispersion object. Since this
effectively changes the input data for the grid the current results will
be cleared. The case must be recalculated before any new isopleth
results can be viewed.
Update All Isopleths in this Grid
Button
Clicking this button copies the zoom extents for the current isopleth
to the other isopleths of the same Receptor Grid. For example
updated zoom extents on the Radiation isopleth can be copied to the
Noise, Temperature and Concentration isopleths.
It should be emphasised again that the number and range of points
calculated are specified on the Extent tab of a Receptor Grid or the
Input Data tab of a Dispersion object. Expanding the scale of the
plots using the zoom feature does not add any detail to the
calculations. To do this you must update the Grid or Dispersion
extents and recalculate.
12-16
12-17
12.3 Isopleth Customise View

The Isopleth Customise view shown below will appear on clicking
the Customise button on a Receptor Grid isopleth or a Dispersion
object contour plot. The view will appear beside the parent object
view and will remain open until closed or until a different tab is
selected in the parent object. More than one Isopleth Customise view
can be open at a time.
Figure 12-12, Isopleth Customise View
There is one button on this view.

Update All Isopleths of This Type
Button
Clicking this button copies the settings for this isopleth to all other
isopleths of the same type in the case. For example if you click the
button when updating a Radiation isopleth, the Radiation isopleths
of all other Receptor Grids in the case will be updated.
The detailed customisation settings are split across three tabs.
12-17
12-18
Isopleth Customise View
12.3.1 Plot Details Tab

The Plot Details tab of the Isopleth Customisation view is shown as
Figure 12-12.
Plot Details - Display Grid
Check box
When selected plots will show a background grid.
Plot Details - Display Flame
Check box
When selected isopleth plots will show a line representing the shape
of the flames from any active flare tips.
Plot Details - Display Stack
Check box
and orientation of active flare stacks.
Plot Details - Display Tip
Check box
and orientation of active flare tips.
Plot Details - Display Shield
Check box
When selected isopleth plots will show lines representing the
intersection of active shield sections with the plane of the isopleth.
Note that it is the intersection that is displayed not the projection of
the shield on the isopleth. If plan view isopleth is at ground level i.e.
0m then the shields will require at least one point with an elevation
dimension < 0m in order to intersect with the isopleth plane.
Plot Parameter - Number of lines
This value determines the number of grid lines that will be displayed
for each axis of the isopleth plots.
12-18
12-19
Plot Parameter - Flame Thickness

to represent the flame shape.
Plot Parameter - Stack Thickness
to represent each active stack on the isopleth plots.
Plot Parameter - Tip Thickness
to represent the each active tip on the isopleth plots.
Plot Parameter - Shield Thickness
to represent the shield sections on the isopleth plots.
Plot Colour - Grid Colour
Colour dialog
This shows the colour that will be used for the background of the
isopleth plots. The colour may be selected by double-clicking the
sample panel to display the Flaresim colour dialog.
Figure 12-13, Colour Dialog
12-19
12-20
Colours are selected in the dialog by clicking on the colour required

and then clicking the Ok button. To close the dialog without
changing the colour click the Cancel button.
Plot Details - Flame Colour
Colour dialog
dialog.
Plot Details - Stack Colour
Colour dialog
the flare stacks on the isopleth plots. The colour may be selected by
dialog.
Plot Details - Tip Colour
Colour dialog
dialog.
Plot Details - Colour
Colour dialog
the shield sections on the isopleth plots. The colour may be selected
by double-clicking the sample panel to display the Flaresim colour
dialog.
12-20
12-21
12.3.2 Contour Details Tab

On the Contour Details tab, see below, it is possible to select the
following options for the 10 contour lines that are available for each
isopleth.
Figure 12-14, Contour Details

Number
This column defines the value for the selected isopleth contour in the
units defined at the head of the column.
Contour Details - Display
Check box
This column specifies whether the selected isopleth contour will be
displayed. Set the check box to display the contour, clear it to hide
the contour. Contours
Contour Details - Colour
Colour dialog
This column defines the colour to be used for the selected isopleth
contour. Double click the sample panel to open the Flaresim colour
dialog to change the colour.
12-21
12-22
Contour Details - Width

Number
This column defines the line width used to draw the selected isopleth
contour.
Drop down list: Solid / Dash / Dot / DashDot / DashDotDot
This column selects the line style used to draw the selected isopleth
contour.
12.3.3 Text Details Tab

The Text Details tab, see below, allows the following settings to be
defined.
Figure 12-15, Isopleth Text Details
Text Options - Select Text Item

Select Row
The rows of this table describe the different text elements that can
appear on an isopleth plot. The display properties of each different
text element can be set by selecting the row and then using the fields
below to modify the properties.
12-22
12-23
Not all of the defined properties may be supported for all of the text
elements. Where a property cannot be set it will be greyed out while
that text element is selected.
Text Options - Display Item
Check box
This controls whether the selected text element will be displayed.
Set the check box to display the item, clear it to hide it.
Text Options - Sample
Font dialog
The Sample column displays a sample of the font style that is
currently defined for the selected text item. Double clicking the
sample text opens a standard windows font dialog to allow the
family, size and style of the font to be set for the selected text item.
Figure 12-16, Font Dialog
Text Options - Spacing

This determines the spacing between the selected text element and
the item it describes e.g the spacing between the X-Axis of the
isopleth plot and the X-Axis of the graph. The value is expressed as
a percentage of the dimensions of the isopleth plot.
12-23
12-24
12-24
KO Drums
13-1
13 KO Drums
Page
13.1 KO Drum View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
13.1.6
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
KO Drum View - Fluid Data Tab. . . . . . . . . . 5
KO Drum View - Fluid Composition Tab . . 8
KO Drum View - Vessel Data Tab . . . . . . . 10
KO Drum View - Nozzle Data Tab . . . . . . . 15
KO Drum View - Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 17
13.2 KO Drum Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
13-1
13-2
13-2
KO Drums
13-3
The KO Drum object allows modelling of vessels used to remove

liquid from flare gas streams (KO Drums) in either Sizing or Rating
mode for horizontal or vertical vessels. The KO Drum calculations
consider the relationship between the size of the vessel, the size of
liquid droplet that will be removed and the time taken for the vessel
to fill with liquid during a flare event.
A Flaresim model may contain multiple KO Drum objects allowing
the comparison of different vessels.
KO Drum objects may be created selecting the KO Drum menu
option in the Add Items drop down menu or by selecting the KO
Drum branch in the Case Navigator and clicking the Add button.
An existing KO Drum object may be viewed by selecting it in the
View drop down menu option; by double clicking it in the Case
Navigator or by selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the
View button.
All defined KO Drum objects will be included in the calculations
unless they have been set to Ignored. A KO Drum may be set to
ignored by selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the Ignore
button. An Ignored KO Drum object can be restored to the
calculations by selecting it in the Case Navigator and clicking the
Activate button. Alternatively a KO Drum object can be ignored and
restored by setting or clearing the Ignored check box on its view.
KO Drum calculations can be carried out independently of the main
model through use of the Calculate button located on the KO Drum
view.
A KO Drum object can be deleted either by clicking the Delete
clicking the Case Navigator Delete button.
A KO Drum Summary view showing the main details of all of the
KO Drum objects in a case can be displayed by double-clicking the
KO Drum collection branch in the Case Navigator or by selecting
the KO Drum collection branch and clicking the Case Navigator
View button.
13-3
13-4
KO Drum View
13.1 KO Drum View

The following figure shows the KO Drum view for entering and
updating KO Drum data.
Figure 13-1, KO Drum View

Name
Text
Enter a name to identify this KO drum object. The entry will be
13-4
KO Drums
13-5
Ignored
Check box
Clear to include this stack in the calculations or set to ignore this
stack when calculating. The effect of setting this check box will be
to exclude the KO drum from the calculations.
Status Text
Status message
the data for this KO drum object is complete and ready for
calculation.
13.1.2 KO Drum View - Fluid Data Tab

The Fluid Data tab of the Stack View is shown in Figure 13-1 above.
The options on this view are.
Gas Flow - Mass Flow
Defines the mass flow rate of gas entering the vessel.
If the gas density is known, the Actual Volume Flow of the gas will
be calculated.
Gas Flow - Actual Volume Flow
Range: 0 to 10,000 m3/s
Defines the volume flow rate of gas entering the vessel at the vessel
conditions.
If the gas density is known, the Mass Flow of the gas will be
calculated.
Liquid Flow - Mass Flow
Defines the mass flow rate of liquid entering the vessel. This is
assumed to be a single phase liquid. The KO Drum does not attempt
to distinguish between hydrocarbon liquid and water.
If the liquid density is known, the Actual Volume Flow of the liquid
will be calculated.
13-5
13-6
KO Drum View
Liquid Flow - Actual Volume Flow

Range: 0 to 10,000 m3/s
Defines the volume flow rate of liquid entering the vessel at the
vessel conditions. This is assumed to be a single phase liquid.
If the liquid density is known, the Mass Flow of the liquid will be
calculated.
Pump Out Flow - Mass Flow
Defines the mass flow rate at which liquid is pumped out of the
vessel during a flaring event. This is assumed to be a single phase
liquid.
If the liquid density is known, the Actual Volume Flow of the Pump
Out flow be calculated.
Pump Out Flow - Actual Volume Flow
Range: 0 to 10,000 m3/s
Defines the volume flow rate at which liquid is pumped out of the
vessel during a flaring event. This is assumed to be a single phase
liquid.
If the liquid density is known, the Mass Flow of the Pump Out flow
will be calculated.
Pump Out Flow - Include Pump Out Flow
When set to Yes the KO Drum calculations will assume that liquid is
removed out from the vessel at the specified pump out flow during
the flaring event. This reduces the size of vessel needed to achieve a
particular hold up time.
The default value for this setting is No meaning that no credit for the
pump out flow is included.
13-6
KO Drums
13-7
Fluid Properties - Property Source

Drop down list: User Specified / REFPROP
When set to User Specified the physical property data for the gas and
liquid must be defined by the user. Fields for entering the gas
density, gas viscosity and liquid density will be displayed as follows.
Fluid Properties - Gas Density
Range: 0 to 1000 kg/m3
The density of the gas phase in the vessel.
Fluid Properties - Gas Viscosity
Range: 0 to 1000 cP
The viscosity of the gas phase in the vessel.
Fluid Properties - Liquid Density
Range: 0 to 2000 kg/m3
The density of the liquid phase in the vessel.
When the Property Source is set to REFPROP the gas and liquid
properties will be calculated. Fields for defining the temperature and
pressure of the fluid and the calculated fluid properties will be
displayed. The composition of the fluid must also be defined on the
Fluid Composition tab.
Fluid Properties - Temperature
Range: 10 to 1000 K
The temperature to be used for fluid property calculations.
Fluid Properties - Pressure
Range: 100 to 2.0e Pa
The pressure to be used for fluid property calculations.
Calculated Properties - Vapour Fraction
Calculated value
The vapour fraction calculated by flashing the specified fluid
composition at the specified temperature and pressure.
Calculated Properties - Gas Density
Calculated value
The gas density calculated after flashing the specified fluid
13-7
13-8
KO Drum View
Calculated Properties - Gas Viscosity

Calculated value
The gas viscosity calculated after flashing the specified fluid
Calculated Properties - Liquid Density
Calculated value
The liquid density calculated after flashing the specified fluid
Calculate
Button
Clicking this button runs the calculations for an individual KO Drum
independently of the main calculations.
13.1.3 KO Drum View - Fluid Composition Tab

The Fluid Composition tab of the KO Drum View is shown below.
Figure 13-2, KO Drum View - Fluid Composition Tab
13-8
KO Drums
13-9
Table - Component Name

Selected components
Shows the list of components selected for use in the model.
Components are added to the list by clicking the Add Component
button to open the Component List view; see Figure 13-3. Highlight
one or more components in the list that you wish to add and click the
OK button. The required components will be added to the
component list and the Component List view will close.
Components are removed from the list by clicking the Remove
Component button to open the Component List view; see Figure 133. Then select one or more components that you wish to remove and
click the OK button. The selected components will be removed from
the current component list and the Component List view will close.
Figure 13-3, Component List view
Table - Composition Values

Range: 0 to 1.0
Specifies the fraction of each component in fluid on either a mole or
a mass basis as determined by the radio button selection to the right
of the table.
13-9
13-10
KO Drum View
Composition Basis
Radio button: Mass/Mole
This radio button selects the basis for the composition data. Note
that changing it does not convert any existing component fraction
data to the new basis.
As component fractions are updated, the running total of the
fractions is updated. A composition can be completed by clicking
either the Normalise button to set remaining fractions to 0.0 and
normalise current totals to add to 1.0 or by clicking the Calculate
Last Fraction button to set a single unspecified component fraction
to the value required to make the overall fraction equal to 1.0.
Flash Options - Flash Method
Drop down list: PR / NIST
This option selects the method to be used when flashing the
specified composition at the specified temperature and pressure. The
default PR or Peng Robinson method is widely used and is the
default option. The NIST option is the default method provided by
the REFPROP package.
The PR method is significantly faster than the NIST method.
13.1.4 KO Drum View - Vessel Data Tab

The Vessel Data tab of the KO Drum View is shown in Figure 13-4.
Calculation Options - Calculation Type
Drop down list: Sizing / Rating
This selects the type of calculation to be run.
In Sizing mode the liquid holdup time and critical droplet size must
be specified and the calculations will determine a vessel diameter,
length and L/D ratio to meet these criteria. In Rating mode the vessel
dimensions are specified and the holdup time and critical droplet
diameter are calculated.
13-10
KO Drums
13-11
Figure 13-4, KO Drum View - Vessel Data Tab
Calculation Options - Vessel Type

Drop down list: Horizontal / Vertical
This option selects the vessel type.
Calculation Options - Vessel End Type
Drop down list: Ellipsoidal / Hemispherical / Flat
This option selects the vessel end type. Calculations include the
volume of the ends for Horizontal vessels though not for Vertical
vessels.
Calculation Options - Settling Velocity Method
Drop down list: API / GPSA
This option selects the method to be used for calculating the settling
velocity of a liquid droplet of known diameter.
The API method is based on a curve fit to the settling velocity curve
data published in API 521. The GPSA method is based on equations
13-11
13-12
KO Drum View
published in the GPSA Data book which vary depending on the

droplet Reynolds number (Re). Stokes law is used at low values of
Re, Newtons law at high values of Re and a third equation is used
in the transition zone.
The vessel input data and summary results sections of the view
depend on the Calculation Type selected.
For Sizing Calculations
Vessel Input Data - Initial Liquid Level
Range: 0 to 100%
This entry defines the initial level of liquid in the vessel at the start
of a flaring event. It is sometimes called the Sump level. For a
vertical vessel the level is a percentage of the tan tan length.
Vessel Input Data - Max. Allowed Liquid Level
Range: 0 to 100%
This entry defines the maximum liquid level that is allowed in the
vessel during normal operation. For a vertical vessel the level is a
percentage of the tan tan length.
Vessel Input Data - Liquid Holdup Time
Range: 0 to 100,000s
This entry defines the liquid holdup time required. This is defined as
the time taken for the vessel to fill from the initial liquid level to the
maximum allowed liquid level at the specified liquid flow rate.
The default value is 30 minutes as recommended in API 521.
Vessel Input Data - Droplet Diameter
Range: 0 to 100mm
This entry defines the minimum diameter of liquid droplets that are
to be removed from the gas in the KO Drum. The default value of
0.300mm is recommended in API 521.
In a Horizontal vessel droplets will be removed from the gas if the
droplet has sufficient time to fall to the liquid surface during the time
taken for the gas to flow from the inlet nozzle to the exit nozzle. In
13-12
KO Drums
13-13
a Vertical vessel droplets will be removed from the gas if the droplet
settling velocity is greater than the superficial gas velocity.
Vessel Input Data - L/D Ratio
Range: 0.2 to 50
This entry defines the ratio of length / diameter to be used when
sizing the vessel. If this value is specified the diameter specification
is cleared automatically.
Vessel Input Data - Diameter
Range: 0.2 to 50
This entry defines the ratio of length / diameter to be used when
sizing the vessel. If this value is specified the L/D specification is
cleared automatically. This value cannot be specified for a Vertical
vessel.
For a Horizontal vessel a range of possible sizes can be found to
meet a given liquid holdup time and droplet diameter. Thus a
specification of either L/D Ratio or Diameter is required to generate
a unique solution. For a Vertical vessel the minimum diameter is
calculated directly from the settling velocity and the length will then
be derived from the L/D ratio with the diameter being increased if it
is required to meet the liquid holdup time criteria.
Summary Results - Diameter
Calculated value
The calculated vessel diameter.
Summary Results - Tan Tan Length
Calculated value
The calculated vessel tan to tan length of the vessel.
The tan tan length for a Horizontal vessel will be determined either
by the minimum gas flow path or minimum volume requirement as
required.
Summary Results - L/D Ratio
Calculated value
The calculated ratio of vessel length / vessel diameter.
13-13
13-14
KO Drum View
For Rating Calculations

Vessel Input Data - Initial Liquid Level
Range: 0 to 100%
This entry defines the initial level of liquid in the vessel at the start
of a flaring event. It is sometimes called the Sump level. For a
vertical vessel the level is a percentage of the tan tan length.
Vessel Input Data - Max. Allowed Liquid Level
Range: 0 to 100%
This entry defines the maximum liquid level that is allowed in the
vessel during normal operation. For a vertical vessel the level is a
percentage of the tan tan length.
Vessel Input Data - Tan Tan Length
Range: 0 to 100m
This entry defines the tan tan length of the vessel being rated.
Vessel Input Data - Diameter
Range: 0 to 20m
This entry defines the diameter of the vessel being rated.
Vessel Input Data - Liquid Level
Range: 0 to 100%
This entry defines the liquid level at which the rating calculation is
to be done. If this value is specified the Liquid Holdup time is
cleared automatically. For a vertical vessel the level is a percentage
of the tan tan length.
Vessel Input Data - Liquid Holdup Time
Range: 0 to 100,000s
This entry defines the liquid holdup time for which the rating
calculation is required.
Summary Results - Droplet Diameter
Calculated value
This is the minimum size of droplet that will be separated for a
vessel of the specified size operating at the specified liquid level or
at the specified holdup time.
13-14
KO Drums
13-15
Summary Results - Liquid Holdup Time

Calculated value
The calculated liquid hold up time for the specified vessel operating
at the specified liquid level.
Summary Results - Liquid Level
Calculated value
The calculated liquid level that will be reached in the specified
vessel after the specified liquid holdup time.
Calculate
Button
Clicking this button runs the calculations for an individual KO Drum
independently of the main calculations.For a vertical vessel the level
is a percentage of the tan tan length.
13.1.5 KO Drum View - Nozzle Data Tab

The Nozzle Data tab of the KO Drum view is shown below. It allows
definition and calculation of inlet and outlet nozzle diameters and
velocities.
Figure 13-5, KO Drum View, Nozzle Data Tab
13-15
13-16
KO Drum View
The view contains two similar sections, one for the inlet nozzle and
one for the exit nozzle.
Nozzle Data - Use Nominal Diameters
When set to Yes, the nozzle calculations will be based on nominal
diameters. If the design velocity is specified the required nozzle
internal diameter will be calculated and then the specified schedule
searched for the next nominal size with a larger internal diameter. If
the Nominal diameter is specified the nozzle internal diameter will
be obtained from the specified schedule.
When set to No, all calculations will use the internal diameter and
the nominal diameter will not be set.
Nozzle Data - Design Velocity
Range: 0.1 to 500 m/s
This specifies the design velocity for the nozzle. As long as the flow
and fluid properties are known, specification of this value will do a
sizing calculation and update the nozzle internal or nominal
diameter as appropriate.
This value will be cleared when the nominal diameter or internal
diameter is specified.
Nozzle Data - Schedule
Drop down list: Available pipe schedules
This entry defines the pipe schedule to be used for determining the
nozzle internal diameter from the nominal diameter. The data for the
available pipe schedules is defined in the Pipe Schedules data file
specified in the Preferences view - the default is PipeSizes.xml.
Nozzle Data - Nominal Diameter
Drop down list: Available nominal diameters for selected schedule
This entry defines the nominal diameter of the nozzle. It is only
available for use when the Use Nominal Diameters option is set to
Yes; otherwise this entry will be set to <Not Set>. The actual internal
diameter will be obtained by looking up the specified nominal
diameter defined for the selected schedule in the Pipe Schedules data
file.
13-16
KO Drums
13-17
When a sizing calculation is performed and the specified schedule

does not have a nominal diameter with an internal diameter that
exceeds the required size then the Nominal Diameter, Internal
Diameter and Calculated Velocity entries will be blank.
Nozzle Data - Internal Diameter
Range: 1 to 5000.0 mm
This entry specifies the internal diameter of the nozzle. It is only
available for use when the Use Nominal Diameters option is set to
No. Otherwise it displays the internal diameter for the selected
nominal diameter and schedule obtained from the Pipe Schedules
data file.
Nozzle Data - Calculated Velocity
Calculated value
This entry displays the calculated velocity through the nozzle.
13.1.6 KO Drum View - Results Tab

The Results tab of the KO Drum view displays the vessel
dimensions, operating conditions and separation performance
calculated for the vessel, see Figure 13-6.
Vessel Dimensions - Tan Tan Length
Calculated value
This displays the length of the vessel calculated in a sizing
calculation or specified for a rating calculation.
Vessel Dimensions - Diameter
Calculated value
This displays the diameter of the vessel calculated in a sizing
calculation or specified for a rating calculation.
Vessel Dimensions - L/D Ratio
Calculated value
This displays the length / diameter ratio of the vessel.
13-17
13-18
KO Drum View
Figure 13-6, KO Drum View, Results Tab
Vessel Dimensions - Vessel Volume

Calculated value
This displays the vessel volume.
Vessel Dimensions - Inlet Nozzle Diameter
Calculated value
This displays the diameter of the inlet nozzle.
Vessel Dimensions - Outlet Nozzle Diameter
Calculated value
This displays the diameter of the outlet nozzle.
13-18
KO Drums
13-19
Operating Results - Capacity Ok

Calculated value
This Yes/No result indicates whether the vessel has sufficient
capacity to meet the required holdup time without exceeding the
specified maximum allowed liquid level.
Operating Results - Liquid Holdup Time
Calculated value
This displays the required holdup time if this has been specified or
the calculated holdup time in rating calculations when the liquid
level is specified.
Operating Results - Additional Holdup Time
Calculated value
In rating calculations this displays the additional holdup time over
and above the required holdup time.
Operating Results - Liquid Level
Calculated value
This displays the calculated liquid level at the required holdup time.
For a vertical vessel the level is a percentage of the tan tan length.
When running sizing calculations if this value equals the maximum
allowed liquid level it indicates that the vessel size is determined by
capacity. When running rating calculations a value greater than the
maximum allowed liquid level may be displayed. Results will never
exceed 100%.
Operating Results - Total Liquid Volume
Calculated value
This displays the total volume of liquid in the vessel at the indicated
liquid level. For a vertical vessel this includes the volume of a single
dished end.
Operating Results - Holdup Liquid Volume
Calculated value
This displays the volume of liquid accumulated during the holdup
time or when the specified liquid level is reached. This is calculated
from the input liquid rate less any pumpout liquid rate.
13-19
13-20
KO Drum View
Operating Results - Slops Liquid Volume

Calculated value
This displays the volume of liquid in the vessel at the start of a
flaring event when the vessel is assumed to have been drained to the
specified initial liquid level. For a vertical vessel this includes the
volume of a single dished end.
Operating Results - Pump Out Liquid Volume
Calculated value
This displays the volume of liquid removed by the pumpout flow
during a flaring event over the specified holdup time or during the
time taken to reach as specified liquid level.
Operating Results - Total X Section Area
Calculated value
This displays the total cross sectional area of the vessel.
Operating Results - Liquid X Section Area
Calculated value
This displays the cross sectional area of the vessel occupied by the
liquid phase.
Operating Results - Gas X Section Area
Calculated value
This displays the cross sectional area of the vessel occupied by the
gas phase.
Operating Results - Inlet Nozzle Velocity
Calculated value
This displays the calculated velocity in the inlet nozzle.
Operating Results - Outlet Nozzle Velocity
Calculated value
This displays the calculated velocity in the outlet nozzle.
Separation Results - Droplet Diameter
Calculated value
For sizing calculations this displays the specified minimum droplet
diameter that must be separated by the vessel. Other results for Min.
Gas Flow Path and Settling velocity are derived from this value.
13-20
KO Drums
13-21
For rating calculations the droplet diameter displayed is the

minimum droplet size that can be separated in the vessel.
Separation Results - Actual Gas Flow Path
Calculated value
This result is displayed for horizontal vessels only. It is the actual
gas flow path calculated as the vessel tan tan length - 1.5 time the
sum of the inlet and outlet nozzle diameters.
Separation Results - Min Gas Flow Path
Calculated value
This value is only displayed for sizing calculations for a horizontal
vessel. It is the minimum flow path required to allow the liquid
droplet to settle to the liquid surface. If this value equals the actual
gas flow path it indicates that the vessel size is determined by the
minimum droplet size specification.
Separation Results - Gas Superficial Velocity
Calculated value
This entry displays the superficial velocity of the gas in the vessel.
For a horizontal vessel this value is used with the settling time to
determine the minimum gas flow path required.
For a vertical vessel this value must be less than the droplet settling
velocity. In sizing mode for a vertical vessel if this value is equal to
the settling velocity it indicates that the vessel size is determined by
the minimum droplet size specification.
Separation Results - Settling Height
Calculated value
This entry is displayed only for horizontal vessels. It is the height
through which the droplet must settle from its entry assumed to be at
the top of the vessel to the surface of the liquid.
Separation Results - Settling Velocity
Calculated value
This entry displays the settling velocity for the indicated droplet
diameter.
13-21
13-22
KO Drum View
In a horizontal vessel this value is used together with the settling

height to determine the settling time.
For a vertical vessel this value must be greater than the gas
superficial velocity. In sizing mode for a vertical vessel if this value
is equal to the gas superficial velocity it indicates that the vessel size
is determined by the minimum droplet size specification.
Separation Results - Settling Time
Calculated value
This entry is displayed only for horizontal vessels. It is calculated
from the settling height and settling velocity of the droplet.
Once the settling time is known the minimum gas flow path can be
calculated from the gas superficial velocity.
13-22
KO Drums
13-23
13.2 KO Drum Summary View

The KO Drum Summary view is shown below. It may be opened by
selecting KO Drum collection branch in the Case Navigator view
and clicking the View button or by double-clicking the KO Drum
collection branch.
Figure 13-7, KO Drum Summary View
The KO Drum Summary view shows the input data and results for
all of the KO drums in the case. Data input values can be updated
through the summary view if required.
Export Table
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialog to allow the KO Drum
13-23
13-24
13-24
KO Drum Summary View
Case Studies
14-1
14 Case Studies
Page
14.1 Case Study View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
14.1.1
14.1.2
14.1.3
14.1.4
14.1.5
14.1.6
14.1.7
14.1.8
Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Case Study View - Input Variables Tab. . . . 5
Input Variables Tab - Discrete Variable . . . 6
Input Variables Tab - Incremental Variable 8
Case Study View - Result Variable Tab . . 10
Case Study View, Results Tab. . . . . . . . . . .11
Case Study View - Plots Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Case Study View - Descriptions Tab . . . . 16
14.2 Select Variable View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
14-1
14-2
14-2
Case Studies
14-3
The Case Study object allows a set of comparison calculations to be

defined and run automatically within a single Flaresim model.
A Case Study is defined by selecting a set of input variables and
specifying the values to be used for each selected variable in each
case to be studied. Either discrete values are specified or, if
appropriate, incremental values. A set of result variables which are
to be recorded and compared are also selected.
When the Flaresim model is calculated, each set of input values
defined in the Case Study will be applied to the base model, the
results will be recalculated and the specified result values will be
saved. Following completion of the run the input and result values
for each case can be viewed as either a table or a plot.
Case Study objects may be created using the Add-Case Study drop
down menu option or by selecting the Case Study branch in the Case
An existing Case Study object may be viewed by double clicking it
in the Case Navigator view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator
All defined Case Study objects will be included in the calculations
unless they have been set to Ignored. A Case Study may be set to
ignored by selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking the
Ignore button. An Ignored Case Study object can be restored to the
calculations by selecting it in the Case Navigator view and clicking
the Activate button. Alternatively a Case Study object can be
ignored and restored by setting or clearing the check box on its view.
A Case Study object can be deleted either by clicking the Delete
button on its view or by selecting it in the Case Navigator view and
14-3
14-4
Case Study View
14.1 Case Study View

The following figure shows the Case Study view as it would appear
for a newly created Case Study object.
Figure 14-1, Case Study View, Input Variables

Name
Text
Enter text to identify this Case Study object.
Status Text
Status message
the data for this Case Study object is complete and ready for
calculation.
Ignored
Check box
Clear to include this Case Study in the calculations or set to ignore
this Case Study when calculating.
14-4
Case Studies
14-5
14.1.2 Case Study View - Input Variables Tab

The Input Variables tab for a Case Study view is shown above in
Figure 14-1. It is used firstly to select the type of case study that is
to be created. Two types are available.
The first is a case study based on Discrete values where the input
variables are selected and the values of each variable are defined for
every case to be considered. Any type of input variable can be
included in a Discrete study including:
Numeric inputs such as tip mass flow
Integer inputs such as the number of flame elements
Selection variables such as calculation method
Option variables such as include solar radiation
The other type of case study is based on Incremental values where
the input variables selected must be a numeric input. The input data
for the variable then defines the range over which the values will be
varied and the number or size of each incremental step that will be
calculated.
The layout of the Input Variables tab will change depending on the
type of study selected. The following fields are common to both
types of study.
Study Type
Radio buttons: Study Discrete Values / Study Incremental Values
Selection of this option defines whether the Case Study is based on
Discrete Variables or Incremental Variables. After selection of this
option the lower half of the view changes to show an appropriate
table to allow input of the data.
Case Study Information - Number of Cases
Calculated value
This displays the number of cases that will be calculated when the
Case Study runs. For Discrete case studies this is the number of
cases that have been added. For Incremental case studies this value
is calculated from the range of values to be considered and the step
size.
14-5
14-6
Case Study View
14.1.3 Input Variables Tab - Discrete Variable

Study
The input variables tab for new Case Study after setting the study
type to a Discrete variable case study is shown in Figure 14-1 above.
The input data for a Discrete variable case study has three parts:
1.
Select the variables
2.
Add cases and optionally name them
3.
Define the data values for each selected variable and case
This input does not have to be entered in any particular order. For
example it is possible to define the cases before selecting variables
or to define all of the variables, cases and data values for a study and
then add new variables and cases later.
Add Variable
Button
Clicking this button opens the Select Variable view which allows
new variables to be added to the Discrete Variable selection grid.
Usage of the Select Variable view is described in section14.2.
Remove Variable
Button
Clicking this button removes the variable whose column is currently
selected in the Discrete Variable Selection grid.
Add Case
Button
Clicking this button adds a new case to the Case Study as a new row
in the Discrete Variable Selection grid. The new case will be added
after the existing cases. The new case will be given a default name
and default data values for the new case will set from the previous
row in the grid.
14-6
Case Studies
14-7
Remove Case
Button
Clicking this button removes the case whose row is currently
selected in the Discrete Variable Selection grid.
Once the required cases and variables have been added to the
Discrete Variable selection grid, the data values in the individual
cells can be updated by simply clicking on a cell and entering a new
value. Should you wish to edit a few characters of an existing value,
a double click will allow modifications to the previous cell contents.
Data values for numeric variables must be entered in the units listed
in the column header. If you need to use a different set of units then
use the Preferences view to select the appropriate unit set. If the data
values are being entered for a selection variable, the cell will
display the appropriate choices as a drop down list in the usual way.
An example of a completed Discrete Variable selection grid is
shown below
Figure 14-2, Input Variables Tab - Discrete Variable Selection
14-7
14-8
Case Study View
14.1.4 Input Variables Tab - Incremental Variable

Study
The input variables tab for a new Case Study after setting the study
type to an Incremental Variable case study is shown in below.
Figure 14-3, Case Study View, New Increment Study Input
The input data for a Incremental variable case study is entered in two
steps which must be carried out in order:
1.
Select the variable
2.
Complete the variable information (min, max etc) in the

Incremental Variable Selection grid.
Add Variable
Button
new variables to be added to the Incremental Variable selection grid.
Usage of the Select Variable view is described in section 14.2. Only
numerical variables may be selected for inclusion in an incremental
variables study.
14-8
Case Studies
14-9
Remove Variable
Button
selected in the Incremental Variable Selection grid.
Incremental Variable Selection - Active
This cell defines whether the selected variable is to be included
when the case study is calculated. A maximum of 2 incremental
variables can be active in a single run of the case study.
Incremental Variable Selection - Minimum Value
Range: As appropriate for variable
This cell defines the minimum value for the selected variable.
Incremental variable studies run for a range of values from a
minimum to a maximum value.
Incremental Variable Selection - Maximum Value
This cell defines the maximum value for the selected variable.
Incremental variable studies run for a range of values from a
minimum to a maximum value.
Incremental Variable Selection - Number of Points
Number
This cell how many cases are to be generated over the range from the
minimum value to maximum value. The step size cell is
automatically updated when the number of points is changed.
Incremental Variable Selection - Step Size
This cell defines the value of the step size to be used when generated
cases over the range from the minimum to the maximum value. The
number of points is automatically updated when the step size is
changed. If the specified step size leads to a non-integer number of
points an error message is displayed.
All values for the Minimum, Maximum and Step Size entries must
be defined in the default units for the variable displayed in the
14-9
14-10
Case Study View
column header. If you need to enter values in different units they can
be changed in Preferences view.
As the values for Active, Minimum Value, Maximum Value and
Number of Points/Step Size are updated, the total number of cases
that will be generated is updated at the top right corner of the view.
When two variables are set active (the maximum) then total number
of cases is the product of the number of points defined for the two
variables. E.g. if variable 1 defines 10 points over its range and
variable 2 15 points then the total number of cases to be calculated
will be 150.
An example of a completed Incremental Variable Selection Grid is
shown below.
Figure 14-4, Input Variables Tab - Discrete Variable Selection
14.1.5 Case Study View - Result Variable Tab

The Result Variable tab of the Case Study view is used to select the
results variables whose values will be recorded as each case is run.
It is shown below in.
Its usage is similar to the input variable selection.
14-10
Case Studies
14-11
Add Variable
Button
new variables to be added to the Result Variable selection grid.
Usage of the Select Variable view is described in section 14.2. Only
calculated variables may be selected.
Remove Variable
Button
selected in the Result Variable Selection grid.
Figure 14-5, Case Study View, Result Variable Selection
14.1.6 Case Study View, Results Tab

The Results tab of the Case Study view shows the results of the case
study calculations. The results are displayed as a table with both the
input values and result values displayed side by side.
For a Discrete Variable study the cases are labelled with either the
initial automatic case label or the user supplied label if this has been
defined. Double clicking a case label will allow the input values for
that case to be copied to the underlying base case. A confirmation
14-11
14-12
Case Study View
window will pop up to ask you to confirm this action. When the
variables values are copied, the information on the Active Case
Study tab of the Case Summary view will be updated at the same
time with the selected case name and description. Logging
informations showing when the update was done will also be
recorded.
An Incremental Variable study will always label the cases in
sequence. There is no option to transfer input values to the
underlying base case for this type of case study.
Export
Button
Clicking this button opens a File Save dialogue to allow the case
study results table to be saved as an Excel (XLS), comma separated
value (CSV) or text (TXT) file.
A sample results tab view for a Discrete Variable study is shown
below.
Figure 14-6, Case Study View, Results Tab
14-12
Case Studies
14-13
14.1.7 Case Study View - Plots Tab

The Plots Tab of the Case Study view allows the case study results
to be displayed as a plot. The details of plots tab vary with the type
of case study but there is one common feature:
Export
Button
Clicking this button displays a File Save dialog allowing the current
plot to be saved as a JPG, PNG, BMP, WMF or EMF graphics file.
For a Discrete Variable study, the plots generated are bar charts.
Two grids are displayed allowing selection of the variables and
cases to be plotted.
Variables - Description
Text cell
The Variables grid displays names of all the variables in the case
study, both input and result variables. Initially a default name is
generated but these can be updated by clicking on the cell and
entering a new value.
Variables - Select
Check box
The Variables grid displays all the variables in the case study, both
input and results variables. Selecting the check box against a
variable indicates values that are to be included in the bar chart for
each case. The number of variables that can be selected depends on
their units; variables with up to two different unit types can be
chosen.
Cases - Description
Text cell
The Cases grid displays names of all the cases defined in the study.
These are the same names defined in the Input Variables tab but they
can be updated here by clicking on the cell and entering a new value.
14-13
14-14
Case Study View
Cases - Select
Check box
The Cases grid displays all the cases defined in the case study.
Selecting the check box against a case indicates that it is to be
included in the bar chart. The number of cases that can be selected
is unlimited though in practice the plot will be rather congested if
more than 4-5 cases are selected.
Horizontal Chart
Check box
Selecting this check box changes the plot from one with vertical bars
to one with horizontal bars. This can assist in readability of the plot
when longer case names are used.
A sample plots tab for a Discrete Variable study is shown below.
Figure 14-7, Case Study View, Discrete Study Plot
For an Incremental Variable study, the plots generated are line plots.
Two grids are displayed allowing selection of the variables for the X
and Y axes.
Select X Variable - Description
Text cell
The Select X Variable grid displays names of all the variables in the
case study, both input and result variables. Initially a default name is
14-14
Case Studies
14-15
generated but these can be updated by clicking on the cell and

entering a new value.
Select X Variable - Select
Check box
The Select X Variable grid displays all the variables in the case
study, both input and results variables. Selecting the check box
against a variable indicate its values are to be used for the X axis of
the plot. Only one variable can be selected for the X axis. Normally
this will be an input variable but it is possible to select a result
variable to allow a plot of one result variable against another.
Result Variables - Description
Text cell
The Result Variables grid displays the names of all the result
variables defined in the study. The default name displayed can be
updated by clicking it and entering a new name.
Result Variables - Select
Check box
The Result Variables grid displays all the result variables defined in
the case study. Selecting the check box against a variable indicates
that its results are to be included in the plot. Any number of variables
can be selected as long as they all have the same unit type.
When an Incremental study is run with 2 Active input variables a 3D
plot using the data values from the input variables for the X and Y
axes. One table is shown to select the result variable.
3D Plot Variables - Description
Text cell
The 3D Plot Variables grid displays the names of all the result
variables defined in the study. The default name displayed can be
updated by clicking it and entering a new name.
3D Plot Variables - Select
Check box
The 3D Plot Variables grid displays all the result variables defined
in the case study. Selecting the check box against a variable
14-15
14-16
Case Study View
indicates that its results are to be included in the plot. Only one
variable can be selected.
A sample Incremental Variable study plot is shown below.
Figure 14-8, Case Study View, Incremental Study Plot
14.1.8 Case Study View - Descriptions Tab

The Descriptions Tab of the Case Study view is used to provide
descriptive information for individual cases.
The descriptive information provided is used to update the Active
Case description entry on the Active Case Study tab of the Case
Summary view. This is to make it available for inclusion in reports.
The description option is only available in Discrete Variable studies.
Case - Description
The Case grid displays names of all the cases defined in the study.
These are the same names defined in the Input Variables tab but they
can be updated here by clicking on the cell and entering a new value.
14-16
Case Studies
14-17
Case - Select
Check box
The Cases grid displays all the cases defined in the case study.
Selecting the check box against a case displays its descriptive text in
the adjacent text box to allow it to be updated.
A sample Description view is shown below.
Figure 14-9, Case Study View, Descriptions Tab
14-17
14-18
Select Variable View
14.2 Select Variable View

The Select Variable view is displayed by the Case Study view to
allow selection of input variables or result variables. The view is
modal and must be closed before other Flaresim views can be used.
When first displayed the Select Variable view will appear as shown
below.
Figure 14-10, Select Variable View, Opening
Selections are made in the Select Variable view in sequence

1.
Select the type of object in the Object panel
2.
Select the name of the specific item of that type of object in

the Name panel. Note if no items of that type exist in the
model there will be no entries to chose from.
3.
Select the variable belonging to that specific item in the

Variable panel.
The variables displayed in the Variable panel will be appropriate to the type of variable being selected.
For a Discrete variable selection, numeric, integer, selection
and option input variables are displayed.
14-18
Case Studies
14-19
For an Incremental variable selection, numeric input variables are displayed.

For Result variable selection, numeric results variables are
displayed.
4.
Click the Add or Ok button to add the variable to the case

study.
Cancel
Button
Clicking this button closes the Select Variable view without adding
a variable to the case study.
Add
Button
Clicking this button adds the selected variable to the case study. If
the variable has already been added an error message will be
displayed. The Select Variable view will remain open to allow
additional variables to be added.
Ok
Button
Clicking this button adds the selected variable to the case study and
then closes the Select Variable view. If the variable already exists in
the case study no error will be displayed but it will not be duplicated.
Sort A-Z
Check box
When selected the variables in the Variables panel will be displayed
in alphabetical order. When this check box is cleared, which is the
default setting, the variables will be displayed with the most
commonly used variables at the top of the list.
14-19
14-20
Select Variable View
A sample variable selection prior to clicking the Add or Ok button

is shown below.
Figure 14-11, Select Variable View, Variable Ready to Add
14-20
Calculations
15-1
15 Calculations
Page
15.1 Calculation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
15.2 Calculation Options View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
15.2.4
15.2.5
General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sizing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Heat Transfer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Emissions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Fitting Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
15-1
15-2
15-2
Calculations
15-3
15.1 Calculation Sequence

Calculate Buttons
Flaresim calculations are started by clicking the Calculate button in

the Case View tool bar. Once started Flaresim will run through its
calculation sequence for the active objects using the settings defined
in the Calculation Options view.
With the release of Flaresim 4 additional calculations to generate
dynamics results and case study results are carried out in addition to
the base case calculations. The detailed calculation sequence is:
For a Standard Run
Dynamics calculations (cannot be run in sizing mode)
Case study calculations
Base case calculations
For a Fitting Run
Fitting calculations
Base case calculations
Each set of base case calculations runs through the following stages
Sizing calculations
Wind rose calculations
Sterile area calculations
Receptor point calculations
Receptor grid calculations
Knock out drum calculations
Dispersion calculations
Each case study calculation runs through the following stages
Sizing calculations
Wind rose calculations
Sterile area calculations
Receptor point calculations
Receptor grid calculations - maximum radiation only
Knock out drum calculations
The progress through the different calculation stages is reported in
the Error/Warnings log panel.
15-3
15-4
Calculation Options View
15.2 Calculation Options View

The Calculation Options view shown below is accessed by selecting
the Calculation Options branch in the Case Navigator view and
clicking the View button. Alternatively you can double click the
Calculation Options branch..
Figure 15-1, Calculation Options View
Status Text
Status message
the calculation options are complete and the model is ready for
calculation.
15.2.1 General Tab

The following data entry fields are found on the General tab of the
Calculation Options view (see Figure 15-1).
15-4
Calculations
15-5
Calculation Methods - Radiation Method

Drop down list: Flaresim API / Strict API / Point / Diffuse / Mixed /
Brzustowski / M.Point Brz / Chamberlain
Selects the method to be used to model the thermal radiation from
the flame.
The Flaresim API and Strict API methods model the single point
source method of Hajek and Ludwig given in API RP-521. The
difference between the methods is in the method of calculating the
flame shape before finding the centre point to act as the source. The
Flaresim API method uses the vector based flame shape method and
allows multiple flame elements to be used to model the shape more
accurately even though a single, centre point will be used as the
source. The Strict API method uses the graphical method presented
in API 521 through a curve fit to the data presented there. The API
method in DOS versions of Flaresim and Flaresim for Windows
versions prior to version 2.0 was the Flaresim API method. Either
API method may be generally applied to most flare systems.
The Point source method is a multiple point extension of the API
method in which the flame is assumed to be completely transparent
such that radiation from one point does not either interfere with or
occlude another. The flame is divided into a series of smaller point
source elements whose contributions are summed to derive the total
radiation from the flame. In practice this method generally gives
more realistic and less conservative values than the API method. It
does however tend to over predict thermal radiation in the near field.
The Diffuse source method assumes that the flame is completely
opaque such that radiation is emitted entirely from the surface of the
flame envelope. This method tends to under predict the thermal
radiation in the near field.
The Mixed source method is an empirical combination of both the
Point and Diffuse source methods. This has been found to give more
realistic results in both the near and far fields.
The Brzustowski method is a single point method in which the flame
centre is determined from jet dispersion theory. The method as
15-5
15-6
described in API RP-521 is subject to a number of limitations in its

implementation in Flaresim: Only vertical tips may be modelled.
Air assisted flares may not be modelled.
Liquid burners may not be modelled.
The M.Point Brz method is a Flaresim extension to the standard
Brzustowski method to allow the number of flame elements and the
element position to be specified by the user. In versions of Flaresim
prior to 1.2 these options could be set for the Brzustowski method. In
Flaresim 1.2 the Brzustowski method is forced to be a single flame
element with fixed element position. Old cases that specify the
Brzustowski method will be updated automatically to M.Point Brz if
they have more than one flame element or the element position is not
50%.
The Chamberlain method, also known in the industry as the Shell
Thornton method is based on a modelling the flame as a conical
frustum radiating from its surface with a uniform emissive power.
The method was developed to provide more accurate predictions of
flame shape and radiation in the near field.
Calculation Methods - No of Elements
Range: 1 to 50
The number of elements that the flame is divided into for calculation
of flame shape and the sources for the Point, Diffuse and Mixed
methods. Larger values will generally give more realistic values for
the thermal radiation at the expense of calculation time.
Unless you are modelling a system with a highly distorted flame
shape, 25 elements should be more than adequate. The combination
of a high flaring rate and an inclined tip flaring into a high wind may
require 50 elements to adequately model the flame shape.
Calculation Methods - Element Position
Range: 0 to 100%
The element position indicates the source point within a flame
element that is used for calculations. Typically this is 50% i.e. the
15-6
Calculations
15-7
middle of the flame element is taken to be the point source. 0%

indicates the source is the start of the element, 100% is the end.
Calculation Methods - Noise Method
Drop down list: API/Spectrum
Selects the method to be used for the noise calculations. The API
method taken from RP521 is a simple single value method and
considers jet noise only. The Spectrum method uses multiple
frequency values and includes combustion noise. Generally the
Spectrum method is recommended.
Options - Expert Mode
Check box
When set this option allows the user to select additional options that
have been classified as being for expert use only. These options
include:1.
Allowing the flame length method to be set independently
of the calculation method for each Tip - See Tip view.
2.
Allowing the plane of orientation to be set for Receptor

Points - See Receptor Point view.
3.
Allowing the plane of orientation to be set for Receptor

Grids - See Receptor Grid view.
4.
Allowing the radiation from each tip to be modelled with a

different radiation method.
5.
Allowing the emissions data for each Tip to be set

separately.
6.
Allowing user specified F Factors to be corrected by

internal correlations for use of HP/LP tips and Assist Fluids.
Options - Windchill
Check box
When set an empirical correlation is used to correct the incident
thermal radiation at any receptor point by taking into account the
heat losses due to passage of wind over the point. Use of this option
15-7
15-8
will generally be a matter of individual judgement or your company

standards.
It is recommended that you do not use this option if you are
interested in the surface temperature calculations. Note that
effective of wind on convective heat transfer in the surface
temperature calculations is independent of the setting of this option.
Options - Atm. Noise Attenuation
Check box
When set a correction will be applied to the noise calculations to
allow for the attenuation in noise due to atmospheric absorption.
This option should normally be set on.
Include Options - Jet Dispersion
Check box
Selecting this enables the jet dispersion calculations and will
calculate concentrations of flare fluid at receptor points and for
receptor grids under flame out conditions.
Include Options - Gaussian Dispersion
Check box
Selecting this enables the calculations for all Gaussian Dispersion
objects defined in the model.
Include Options - Run Dynamics
Check box
Selecting this enables dynamics calculations to be run to evaluate
the change in radiation and other results with time as the flare flow
varies with time. The variation in flare flow with time must be
defined on the Tip Dynamics View and the results variation with
time can be viewed on the Receptor Point Dynamics View.
The dynamics calculations are run in addition to the defined base
case. Receptor Grid objects and Dispersion objects are not included
in the dynamic calculations.
15-8
Calculations
15-9
Include Options - Run Case Studies

Check box
Selecting this enables the calculation of all the active Case Study
objects. Case study calculations are run in addition to the defined
base case.
Buoyancy
For all methods except the Brzustowski and Chamberlain methods,
the flame shape is calculated by resolving the velocity vectors in
three dimensions. The main components are the tip exit velocity and
the wind velocity. There is however an additional velocity
component which is due to the density differences between the hot
combustion gases and the surrounding air. This is referred to as the
flame buoyancy term.
Buoyancy - Pipe
Range: 0 to 30 m/s
The flame buoyancy which should be used for Pipe flares. A value
of 3.0 m/s is recommended unless specific vendor information
suggests otherwise.
Buoyancy - Sonic
Range: 0 to 30 m/s
The flame buoyancy to be used for Sonic flare tips. A value of 4.6
m/s is suggested unless specific vendor information suggests
otherwise.
Buoyancy - Welltest
Range: 0 to 30 m/s
The flame buoyancy to be used for Liquid flare tips. A value of 0.03
m/s is suggested unless specific vendor information suggests
otherwise.
The recommended buoyancy values are based on empirical
information supplied by a flare vendor. The wide range of allowed
values is intended to provide flexibility for users with specific
information and the validity of any values entered is the
responsibility of the user.
15-9
15-10
Environment - Active Environment

Drop down list: All defined environments
Allows selection of the set of environmental data to be used for the
calculations. This can also be set through activating a specific
Environment object.
15.2.2 Sizing Tab

The following figure shows the Sizing tab of the Calculation
Options view.
Figure 15-2, Sizing Tab
Stack Sizing - Select Stack

Drop down list of defined stacks
Allows one of the existing stacks to selected for sizing calculations
i.e. calculation of the stack length to meet the sizing constraints
defined on the active receptor points. To stop the sizing calculations
i.e. to do a rating calculation this should be set to None.
15-10
Calculations
15-11
Stack Sizing - Minimum Length

Range: 0 to 500 m
The minimum length allowed for the stack being sized.
Stack Sizing - Maximum Length
Range: 0 to 500 m
The maximum length allowed for the stack being sized.
Sizing Result - Calculated Length
Calculated value: m
The calculated length of the stack required to meet the sizing
constraints. If the sizing calculations fail the value will be blank.
Sizing Result - Wind Speed Used
Calculated value: m/s
The wind speed used to calculate the final stack size. In a simple
sizing case this is the wind speed defined for the active environment.
If Wind Rose data has been considered in the sizing calculations, see
Environment View, then this will be the wind speed in the wind rose
data that resulted in the highest stack length. The wind speed used to
calculate and display the final results will always be the wind speed
specified in the active environment.
Note wind speeds corrected for elevation used at the tip exit and at
receptor points are reported on the Tip Views and Receptor Point
Views.
Sizing Result - Wind Direction Used
Calculated value: angle
The wind direction used to calculate the final stack size. In a simple
sizing case this is the wind direction defined for the active
environment. If Wind Rose data has been considered in the sizing
calculations, see Environment View then this will be the wind
direction in the wind rose data that resulted in the highest stack
length. The wind direction used to calculate and display the final
results will always be the wind direction specified in the active
environment.
15-11
15-12
Pressure Profile Options - Pressure Tolerance

Range: 1.0e-6 to 10 Pa
This value defines the convergence tolerance that is used in the
pressure profile calculations for the tip and stack pressure drop.
Prior to Flaresim version 4 this value was internally set to 0.01 Pa.
The default in Flaresim version 4 is set to 0.1Pa to increase the speed
of calculations when using Refprop calculated properties since these
are significantly slower than the simple correlations used in earlier
versions. Testing has shown that in general results show no
significant changes but some differences might be seen when tip and
stack pressure drops are low.
Pressure Profile Options - Tip Elements
Range: 2 to 100
This defines the number of elements that the tip length is divided
into for the pressure drop calculation.
Prior to Flaresim version 4 this value was set internally to 10. Since
the calculation speed when using Refprop calculated properties is
significantly slower in Flaresim 4 this has been reduced to a default
value of 4. Testing has shown this does not have a significant effect
on the overall pressure drop.
Pressure Profile Options - Riser Elements
Range: 2 to 100
This defines the number of elements that the stack riser length is
divided into for the pressure drop calculation.
Prior to Flaresim version 4 this value was set internally to 1000.
Since the calculation speed when using Refprop calculated
properties is significantly slower in Flaresim 4 this has been reduced
to a default value of 40. Testing has shown this does not have a
significant effect on the overall pressure drop.
15.2.3 Heat Transfer Tab

The following figure shows the Heat Transfer tab of the Calculation
Options view.
15-12
Calculations
15-13
Figure 15-3, Heat Transfer Tab
This view allows definition of coefficients for calculating the heat

transfer coefficient as a function of wind speed. Two sets of
parameters may be defined to apply above and below a limiting wind
speed. The equation is:B
HTC = A Windspeed + C
(1)
Wind Speed Units

Drop down list: Speed Units
This drop down selects the wind speed units that are appropriate for
the A and C constants entered.
15-13
15-14
Transition Wind Speed

Range: 0.01 to 100 m/s
The transition wind speed at which the heat transfer coefficient
calculation switches from the first set of defined constants to the
second.
There are then two groups of equation parameters, the first apply for
wind speeds below the defined transition wind speed, the second
when the wind speed is higher than the transition value.
Equation Parameter A
Range: 0.01 to 100
The constant factor to be multiplied by the wind speed.
Equation Parameter B
Range: 0 to 10
The power to which the wind speed is raised.
Equation Parameter C
Range: 0.01 to 100
The constant factor to be added to the heat transfer coefficient.
Dynamics Parameters - Exposure Time
Range: 1 to 1,000,000 s
The time over which the dynamics results and changes in surface
temperatures are calculated.
Dynamics Parameters - Time Steps
Range: 1 to 1,000
The number of calculations to be made between the starting point
and the final exposure time for dynamics calculations and the base
case temperature rise. A higher number will track the change in
results with time more accurately but at the cost of greater
calculation time. The appropriate value will depend on the rate of
change in results with time; the faster values are changing the greater
need for additional time steps.
15-14
Calculations
15-15
15.2.4 Emissions Tab

The Emission tab defines the default calculation basis and
corresponding rate of emissions of NOx, CO and unburnt
hydrocarbons to be used for all tip. These values will be used unless
the Expert Mode option is in use in which case they can be set
individually for each Tip on the Emissions Tab of the Tip View.
Figure 15-4, Emissions Tab
NOx Emission Rate - Basis

Drop down list: Mass/Heat Release / Mass/Mass Flare Fluid / Mass/
Mole Flare Fluid / Sintef Method
This entry defines the basis used to calculate the NOx emission rate
for each tip. The NOx emission can be set to a fixed proportion
based on the heat release, mass flow or mole (volume) flow of the
flared fluid or calculated using a method published by Sintef, see
Methods chapter.
15-15
15-16
NOx Emission Rate - Rate

Range: 0 to 100, units depend on selected Basis
This entry defines the fixed proportion used to calculate the total
emissions of NOx according to the defined Basis. Leave blank if the
Sintef calculation basis is selected.
CO Emission Rate - Basis
Mole Flare Fluid
This entry defines the basis used to calculate the CO emission rate
for each tip. The CO emission can be set to a fixed proportion based
on the heat release, mass flow or mole (volume) flow of the flared
fluid.
CO Emission Rate - Rate
emissions of CO according to the defined Basis.
Unburnt HC Emission Rate - Basis
Mole Flare Fluid
This entry defines the basis used to calculate the emission rate of
unburnt hydrocarbons for each tip. The unburnt HC emission can be
set to a fixed proportion based on the heat release, mass flow or mole
(volume) flow of the flared fluid. Note that unburnt hydrocarbons
are assumed to be Methane.
Unburnt HC Emission Rate - Rate
emissions of unburnt according to the defined Basis.
Reset Defaults
Button
Clicking this button will reset the Emission Bases and rates to their
default values.
15-16
Calculations
15-17
Dispersion Options - Averaging Time

Drop down list: Short/Long
The averaging time used in the Jet Dispersion calculations.
Generally this should be set to Short for typical short duration flaring
events.
Dispersion Options - Stopping Concentration
Range: 1.0e-5 to 1.0
The minimum concentration calculated by the Jet Dispersion
calculations.
15.2.5 Fitting Tab

The Fitting tab provides access to a data fitting process in Flaresim
that allows the F Factor for a selected tip to be adjusted to achieve a
best fit between the calculated and observed radiation levels at one
or more receptor points.
The data fields that control the fitting process are shown below.
Figure 15-5, Fitting Tab
Fitting Parameters - Target Tip

Drop down List
This selects the Tip whose F Factor value is to be adjusted to try to
match the calculated and observed values of radiation. The list
15-17
15-18
shows all of the tips configured in the model. The tip that is selected
must have its F Factor method set to User Defined. It does not matter
what starting value of F Factor is defined on the tip.
Fitting Parameters - Target Receptor Point
Drop down list: Available receptor points
This selects the Receptor Points which are to be included in the
fitting calculation. Either a single point can be selected or the All
Active option can be selected in which case all Receptor points that
are not set to Ignored will be included in the calculation.
All of the points included in the calculation must have a value
defined for the Observed Radiation field.
Fitting Parameters - Result
Calculated value
This displays the value for the F Factor that was calculated by the
fitting process.
Fitting Parameters - Error
Calculated value
This displays the square root of the sum of the square of the relative
errors between the calculated and observed radiation values for the
selected Receptor points.
Run Fitting
Button
Clicking this starts the fitting process. The fitting process first
reconfigures the model to solve for Receptor points only. It will then
set the selected Tip to a low F Factor and run the model to calculate
the radiation at each selected Receptor point. The sum of the square
of the relative errors between the calculated and observed radiation
values will then be calculated. The F Factor is then raised by a step
and the process repeated until the calculated error begins to rise. At
this point a bisection search for the F Factor that gives the minimum
value for the error is obtained.
When the value of the F Factor that gives the minimum error has
been found the whole model will be reinstated and re-run at the
resulting F Factor.
15-18
Calculations
15-19
Note if the fitting process is run for a single Receptor Point the final
error should always be 0 as long as there is a feasible value for the F
Factor which cannot be greater than 1.
15-19
15-20
15-20
Printing
16-1
16 Printing
Page
16.1 Report View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
16.1.1
Report File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
16.2 Output Graphic Report View . . . . . . . . . . . .9

16.3 Select Graphic Report Printer. . . . . . . . . . 13
16.4 Graphic Report Page Settings . . . . . . . . . 14
16-1
16-2
16-2
Printing
16-3
Output of Flaresim results is through the tool bar Print

and
Graphic Report buttons or the File-Print and File-Print Graphic
Report menu options.
Selecting the Print option creates a Report view which contains a
report of the current input data and results for the case. The Report
view allows the contents to be customised by selecting different
sections of data input and output. Multiple Report views can be
created from the same case as data is changed and the case
recalculated to allow for side by side comparison of results. Report
views can then be output to a printer or saved as a case.
Selection of the Graphic Reports option opens the Output Graphic
Report view which offers selection of the graphic reports to be
output and the output method to be used. These views are described
below.
Flaresim produces its standard reports through an HTML file which
is created by using a style sheet file, by default Flaresim.xsl, to
format the contents of the Flaresim model file. The Preferences view
allows the user to specify the name of the style sheet file to be used.
Both the Flaresim XML data files and the XSL style sheet file
comply with the appropriate W3C.org standards. This provides the
capability to reformat the output of Flaresim through definition of an
alternate style sheet file. Third party documentation on the use of
XSL files should be consulted since this is beyond the scope of this
documentation.
Flaresims graphic reports are produced through a layout file which
is an XML formatted file that describes the text, data and graphical
elements to be included in the report and their layout. The default
layout file to be used may be selected in the Preferences view or for
each receptor grid individually.
16-3
16-4
Report View
16.1 Report View

When the Print
button on File-Print menu option is selected a
Report view is opened. This requires that the case is saved to a
temporary file and there can be a short delay before the report
appears.
Figure 16-1, Report View
The Report view is a separate window from the main Flaresim

program allowing multiple Report views to be compared side by
side as the case is recalculated with different input data. To aid
identification of different Reports, the Report view title bar shows
the time that the Report was generated and the name of the case that
generated it.
16-4
Printing
16-5
Note that the Report view being displayed is of the HTML report file
generated by Flaresim. Some elements of this report file will float
and be reformatted to try and fit into the area available for display.
It may be necessary to expand the view to see the report as it will be
printed.
Report Item
Tree view
This section of the view lists the items that can be included in a
report as a tree structure in a similar way to the Case Navigator view.
As in the case summary, the
and
icons can be used to expand
and collapse branches of the tree as required. The complete Report
Items panel can be collapsed using the
button and expanded
again using the
button.
Include Item
Check box
Each item available for the report has a check box against it. The
check box should be set to include the topic or cleared to exclude it.
Lines Per Page
Range: 10 to 1000
The maximum number of lines of text for each report page.
Reset Options
Button
Resets the include item check boxes for each item to the defaults
contained in the PrintPreferences.xml file.
Clear All
Button
Clears the include item check boxes for all items.
Save Options
Button
Opens a File Save dialog to allow the current report item selection
to be saved to a dedicated configuration file. This option can be used
to update the default settings in the PrintPreferences.xml file.
16-5
16-6
Report View
Read Options
Button
Opens a File Open dialog to allow a configuration file contain report
item selection to be read and applied to the current case.
Note that whenever a case is saved the current report settings are
saved with it. The Save Options and Read Options buttons provide
a way for settings copied from one case to another without the need
to update the main PrintPreferences file.
Save Report As Case
Button
Since the Report view is independent of a case and because multiple
Reports can be generated with different input data, the Save Report
As Case allows the information associated with a particular report to
be saved as a Flaresim case. Note that all of the case data and results
will be saved, not just the current selected items.
Print
Button
Prints the report using the current selection of included and excluded
items. Clicking this button starts the printing process by displaying
the standard Windows Printer dialog view below to allow the user to
select the printer to be used and to control the setup of the print
options.
16-6
Printing
16-7
Figure 16-2, Print Dialog
Once the printer options have been set the Print button on this view
should be clicked to send the output to the printer.
Page Setup
Button
This displays a standard windows page setup view to allow the page
margins etc to be defined for the report. While these changes may
have an impact on the number of lines of text that will fit on the page
it is still necessary to update the Lines Per Page entry separately.
Refresh
Button
Updates the report preview to reflect any changes that have been
made to the included or excluded topics. The report cannot be
refreshed if any data has changed since it was generated.
16.1.1 Report File

When a case is saved, the HTML report file and the associated
graphic files will be automatically saved at the same time. These
files will be saved to a sub-folder in the folder to which the case is
16-7
16-8
Report View
being saved. The sub-folder name will be the same as the saved file
name.
This HTML file can be viewed at any time using an internet browser,
independently of Flaresim.
16-8
Printing
16-9
16.2 Output Graphic Report View

When the
button or File-Print Graphic Reports menu option is
selected displays the Output Graphic Report view to allow selection
of the graphic reports to be output and whether these are to be output
to printer or to a file. The Output Graphic Report view is shown
below. This is a modal view that does not allow use of other parts of
the Flaresim program until it is closed.
Figure 16-3, Output Graphic Report View
Select
List box: Receptor Grids, Receptor Points, Dispersions
This displays as list of the Receptor Grids, Receptor Points and
Dispersion objects for which a graphic report is available. Receptor
Points only appear in the list if a wind rose graphic report is
available. Dispersion objects only appear in the list when a contour
plot report is available.
16-9
16-10
Output Graphic Report View
Objects are selected in the list by clicking on the name in the list.
Multiple items may be selected using Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click in
the usual way.
For convenience an All option is provided at the top of the list which
can be selected to output graphic reports for all the receptor grids
and receptor points in the model.
Select Plots
Check boxes
Each receptor grid can generate four separate graphic reports, one
for each of the radiation, noise, temperature isopleths and
concentrations (as long as jet dispersion calculations are enabled).
These check boxes allow selection of which reports will be output.
Set a check box to output the associated report and clear a check box
to suppress the report.
Save File Type
Drop down list: JPG / PNG / BMP / WMF / EMF
This allows selection of the graphic file type that will be generated
if the reports are output to file using the Save Graphic Reports
button. The options are JPG, PNG or BMP bitmap files and WMF or
EMF vector meta files.
Save Graphic Reports
Button
This creates the selected graphic reports and saves them as files of
the type selected by the Save File Type item. A pop-up window will
be displayed to select the output folder. Each file will be
automatically named with the type of the isopleth and the name of
the receptor grid e.g. Radiation-Helideck. Confirmation of each file
saved is output to the information log.
Isopleths To CSV
Button
This saves a list of the isopleth data points for each selected report
to a text file in Comma Separated Value or CSV format. This allows
the isopleths to be plotted using third party applications such as
Excel. A pop-up window will be displayed to select the output
16-10
Printing
16-11
folder. Confirmation of each file saved is output to the information

log.
Isopleths To XML
Button
This saves a list of the isopleth data points for each selected report
to a text file in XML format. A pop-up window will be displayed to
select the output folder. Confirmation of each file saved is output to
the information log.
Isopleths To DXF Script
Button
This creates and saves an Autocad script that will allow the isopleth
data for each selected report to be imported into a plot plan or other
drawing using Autocad or compatible software such as Intellicad. A
pop-up window will be displayed to select the output folder. The
files will be stored with a .scr extension in the selected folder.
Confirmation of each file generated is output to the information log.
The script generated will create one new layer in the target drawing
file for each isopleth value defined. Each layer will be named
according to the isopleth value and the isopleth value will also be
displayed on a text label within the added layer. An additional layer
will be created to draw the flame location. Note that the generated
script requires that the Snap to guides features of Autocad are
turned off before playing the script.
Print Graphic Reports
Button
This button prints the selected graphic reports to the currently
selected graphic report printer.
16-11
16-12
Output Graphic Report View
Preview Graphic Reports

Button
This button generates a preview of the selected graphic reports and
displays it in the Preview Graphic Reports view shown below.
Figure 16-4, Preview Graphic Reports View
This view allows output pages to be reviewed and page settings

adjusted. The
Print button in the view can then be clicked to
send the output to the printer or the
Save button can be used to
save the output to a PDF file.
Close
Button
This button closes the Output Graphic Report view and returns to the
main Flaresim views.
16-12
Printing
16-13
16.3 Select Graphic Report Printer

The Select Graphic Report Printer option on the File Menu can be
used to select the printer that will be used for output of graphic
reports. It opens a standard Printer Selection Dialog as shown below.
Figure 16-5 Printer Selection Dialog
In addition to the printer, the paper size and orientation can also be
selected through the Properties button of the view.
The selection of graphic report printer will be remembered and
reselected next time Flaresim is used if the appropriate option is set
on the Files tab of the Preferences view.
16-13
16-14
Graphic Report Page Settings
16.4 Graphic Report Page Settings

The Graphic Report Page Settings menu option on the File Menu can
be used to set the page size, orientation and margin for output of
Graphic Reports. The view is shown below.
Figure 16-6, Page Settings Dialog
The allowed paper sizes and paper source are those for the currently
selected printer. The paper size, orientation and margins will be
saved as Flaresim is closed and reloaded next time Flaresim is used.
Graphic reports will override the default page size specified in the
selected layout file if required to fit within the page size defined in
this dialog.
16-14
Calculation Methods
17-1
17 Calculation Methods
Page
17.1 Thermal Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
17.1.1
17.1.2
17.1.3
17.1.4
17.1.5
17.1.6
17.1.7
17.1.8
17.1.9
17.1.10
API Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Integrated Point Source Method. . . . . . . . . 5
Integrated Diffuse Source Method . . . . . . . 6
Integrated Mixed Source Method . . . . . . . . 7
Brzustowski and Sommer Method . . . . . . . 7
Chamberlain Method (Thornton Method). . 8
F Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Atmospheric Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Windchill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Flame Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
17.2 Surface Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

17.3 Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
17.3.1
17.3.2
17.3.3
Combustion Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Jet Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Atmospheric Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
17.4 Purge Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

17.4.1
17.4.2
HUSA Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Reduced HUSA Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
17.5 Water Sprays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

17.5.1
Thickness of Water Curtain . . . . . . . . . . . 32
17-1
Calculation Methods
17-2
Page
17.6 Gas Dispersion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
17.6.1
17.6.2
17.6.3
Jet Dispersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Gaussian Dispersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Emission Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
17.7 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
17.7.1
17.7.2
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Subscripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
17.8 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
17-2
Calculation Methods
17-3
This chapter contains a summary of the mathematical models used

for the calculation of incident thermal radiation, noise and surface
temperatures. It is not intended to be a detailed treatise on
combustion theory, but rather a summary of the models available in
the program to assist the engineer in making his own judgement as
to the applicability of the models to his particular system.
17-3
17-4
Thermal Radiation
17.1 Thermal Radiation

6 options are available for calculating the incident thermal radiation
at a point receptor. These are: API Method
Integrated Point Source
Integrated Diffuse Source
Integrated Mixed Source
Brzustowski and Sommer
Chamberlain (Thornton)
These methods primarily differ in the approach to the calculation of
the contributions of individual elements within the flame to the total
incident heat flux and the method for calculation of the flame shape.
Each of these methods can be used for most applications either as
preferred by the program user or as required by client preference and
specifications.
A key parameter in calculation of thermal radiation is the fraction of
the combustion heat radiated by the flame, known as the F Factor.
Flaresim includes a number of different correlations for predicting F
Factor.
Predicted thermal radiation values may be corrected for a range of
environmental conditions. These corrections are available for:
Windchill
Atmospheric attenuation
The inclusion of the attenuation effects due to windchill or
atmospheric attenuation must be either a matter of sound
engineering judgement or as required by client specifications.
All thermal radiation values calculated by any of these methods are
to point receptors and do not take account the relative orientation of
the receptor to the flame.
17-4
Calculation Methods
17-5
17.1.1 API Method

This is based upon the simple heat release method outlined in API
RP-521, "Guide For Pressure Relieving and Depressuring Systems",
1997 [1]. This method uses Equation (1) proposed by Hajek and
Ludwig [2] to evaluate the flux at a given distance from the flame.
FQ
K = -------------2
4D
(1)
It is assumed that the flame can be treated as a single point source

located at the centre of the flame which radiates in all directions
from this centre.
There are two variants of the API method implemented in Flaresim.
In the Flaresim API method the flame shape is calculated from the
resolution of the velocity vectors for the flared fluid, wind and flame
buoyancy. Multiple flame elements can be defined to model the
flame shape more accurately but the source is still modelled as a
single point at the centre. In the Strict API method, the flame shape
is calculated using the graphical method described in the API RP521 implemented using a data fit to the curves presented in the
guide.
17.1.2 Integrated Point Source Method.

The integrated point source method is an extension to the API
method in which the flame is divided into a series of smaller point
source elements whose contributions are summed to derive the total
thermal radiation from the flame. The centre of each of the elements
is used for the calculation of the distance between the flame element
and the target receptor.
Two major assumptions are made:
The flame radiates uniformly along its entire length.
The flame is long in comparison to its width. As such it may be
considered to be a line source.
17-5
17-6
Thermal Radiation
In making these assumptions, it is accepted that the flame itself is

completely transparent to thermal radiation and that one point
source does not either interfere with or occlude another. This
occlusion effect would generally be negligible to the side of the
flame but could be significant at locations directly below the flame
where there is a shallower angle of view.
These assumptions lead to Equation (2) proposed by McMurray[4].
FQ L 1
K ips = ---------- ------- dl
4L 0 D 2
(2)
The distance between the point source and the receptor is calculated
from a flame shape derived from the resolution of the velocity
vectors for the flared fluid, wind and flame buoyancy.
17.1.3 Integrated Diffuse Source Method

The diffuse source model assumes that the flame itself is completely
opaque such that the thermal radiation is emitted entirely from the
surface of the flame.
This model is represented by Equation (3).
FQ L sin
-------- ----------- dl
K ids =
2
2
L 0 D
(3)
The distance between the point source and the receptor is calculated
from a flame shape derived from the resolution of the velocity
vectors for the flared fluid, wind and flame buoyancy.
17-6
Calculation Methods
17-7
17.1.4 Integrated Mixed Source Method

The mixed source model is basically a combination of the point and
diffuse source models. This was developed as a result of
observations during field tests [4] that showed:
The Integrated Point Source (IPS) model tends to over predict
the thermal radiation close to the flare.
The Integrated Diffuse Source (IDS) model tends to under predict the thermal radiation close to the flare.
Both models predict similar values for thermal radiation in the
far field.
The mixed source model is given by Equation (4) which is a linear
combination of the IPS and IDS models.
K ims = aK ips + ( 1 a )K ids
(4)
17.1.5 Brzustowski and Sommer Method

The equation for the calculation of the heat flux at a given distance
is identical to that given for the API method as Equation 1. Both this
method and the API method are based upon the flame being
considered as a single point heat source.
The distance between the point source and the receptor is calculation
from a flame shape which is based upon the diffusion of a turbulent
jet to the to the lean flammability concentration limit [3].
Flaresim allows an extension to the standard Brzustowski method by
allowing the user to specify multiple flame elements or an element
position that is not 50%. In versions of Flaresim prior to 1.2 these
options could be set for the Brzustowski method. In Flaresim 1.2 and
following these options can only be set if the extended M.Point
Brzustowski method is selected.
17-7
17-8
Thermal Radiation
17.1.6 Chamberlain Method (Thornton Method)

The Chamberlain method, also known as the Shell Thornton
method, for modelling thermal radiation is based on modelling a
flame as an inverted conical frustum emitting radiation from its
surface. The method is explained in detail in references [14] and
[15].
17.1.7 F Factors
The F Factor or fraction of combustion heat radiated from a flame is
the most important single parameter in the calculation of thermal
radiation calculation. The following is a summary of the correlations
available in Flaresim, see reference [13] except where otherwise
indicated. Note that some of these correlations are explicitly for Fs.
or fraction of heat radiated from surface of the flame whereas in
others F is for fraction of total heat radiated.
Natural gas (Chamberlain)
Correlation based on tip exit velocity assuming a natural gas fluid of
molecular weight 19.
F s = 0.11 + 0.21e
0.00323u j
(5)
Tan
F = 0.048 MW
17-8
(6)
Calculation Methods
17-9
Kent
Correlation based on mole weight.
50 MW + 100
F = 0.2 -----------------------------------900
(7)
High Efficiency
Proprietary correlation between tip type, exit velocity, fluid
molecular weight and degree of hydrocarbon saturation. Formally
known as the Flaresim method in versions prior to 1.2.
Cook
Correlation based on exit velocity.
F = 0.321 0.000418u j
(8)
Generic Pipe
Proprietary correlation based on refitting Kent, Tan, Natural gas and
Cook methods across a range of exit velocities and molecular
weights.
Mod. Chamberlain Method
This correlation corrects the basic Natural Gas (Chamberlain)
method for mole weight [14].
F s = [ 0.11 + 0.21e
0.00323u j
] f ( MW )
(9)
17-9
17-10
Thermal Radiation
where
f ( MW ) = 1, MW < 21
f ( MW ) = ( MW 21 )
0.5
, 21 < MW < 60
f ( MW ) = 1.69, 60 < MW
17.1.8 Atmospheric Attenuation
Brzustowski and Sommer[3] recommend the use of the atmospheric
transmissivity, as the fraction of the heat intensity which is
transmitted to a point, in order to correct the calculated values for
thermal radiation.
This correction is given by Equation (10).
K = K
(10)
In all cases, atmospheric absorption attenuates the incipient

radiation at a point. This will typically be 10 to 20% over distances
of up to 500 ft. The empirical Equation (11) given below was
obtained by cross plotting absorptivities calculated from Hottel
charts. It is strictly applicable only under the following conditions
of:
A luminous hydrocarbon flame radiating at 2240 F

Dry bulb temperature of 80 F
Relative humidity greater than 10%
Distances from flame between 100 and 500 ft
It is generally used to estimate the order of magnitude of the

atmospheric transmissivity under a wider range of conditions.
100 0.0625 100 0.0625

= 0.79 -------- --------H
D
17-10
(11)
Calculation Methods
17-11
Equation(11) should prove adequate for most situations. However,

for cases in which the design conditions are significantly different
from those under which the equation was derived, the designer
should revert to the Hottel charts.
Equation (11) is implemented in Flaresim with 2 options, selected in
the Environment view, see Chapter 7.
If the Calculated method is selected, equation 6 is used after limiting
the distance values to the minimum of 100ft and maximum of 500ft
as per the strict applicability limits of the equation.
If the CalcNoLimits method is selected, equation (11) is used
without regard to the distance limits.
Wayne Transmissivity
Wayne [12] presented a method of calculating transmissivity as a
function of distance that is effectively a function of both
atmospheric temperature and humidity. The equation is.
= 1.006 0.01171 ( Log 10 X ( H 2 O ) )
0.02368 ( Log 10 X ( H 2 O ) )
(12)
0.03188 ( Log 10 X ( CO 2 ) )
+ 0.001164 ( Log 10 X ( CO 2 ) )
where
X ( H 2 O ) = ( 288.651R H DS mm ) T
X ( CO 2 ) = 273.0D T
RH = Fractional humidity
Smm = Saturated water vapour pressure in mmHg at T
T = Atmospheric temperature K
D = Distance between receptor and emittor m
17-11
17-12
Thermal Radiation
17.1.9 Windchill
The design of offshore flare systems often takes into account the
effect of heat loss from the target surface due to windchill. Equation
(13) gives the simple correction to the calculated value for thermal
radiation.
Kw = K Kf
(13)
The correction K f is taken from Figure 17-1 below.

Figure 17-1, Windchill Correction
For conditions beyond the range of this figure, the following

constraints are applied: If the wind speed is greater than 35 knots, the 35 knot value is
used.
17-12
Calculation Methods
17-13
If the ambient temperature is less that 30 F, the 30 F value is

used.
If the ambient temperature is greater than 80 F, the correction is
taken to be zero regardless of the wind speed
17.1.10 Flame Shape

The calculation of the distance between any point on the flame and
the target receptor requires a knowledge of the flame length and
shape. This is a function of:
Flare exit velocity
Wind speed and direction
Orientation of the tip
The flare exit velocity is calculated by simply dividing the
volumetric flare rate by the cross sectional area of the flare tip
according to Equation 8.
4WZRT
u j = ------------------2
PMd
(14)
The gas mach number is calculated from the sonic velocity which is
calculated from Equation (15).
us =
gkRT
------------M
(15)
The pressure used in equation (14) for a tip operating at sub-sonic

velocity is either the specified tip exit pressure or the pressure
specified for the active environment. Where the tip operates at sonic
velocities an iterative calculation is made to find the pressure at
which the tip can pass the specified mass flow at the sonic velocity
calculated at that pressure.
17-13
17-14
Thermal Radiation
The temperature used in these equations is either the specified fluid

temperature or, when the temperature correction option is selected
the fluid temperature corrected for adiabatic isentropic expansion/
contraction from the specified fluid reference pressure.
API & Integrated Methods
The method for calculation of the flame length and deflection is
dependent upon the method selected for calculation of the thermal
radiation. If the API, IPS, IDS or IMS method is selected then the
flame length is calculated from the heat released by the flame, then
the deflection is calculated by resolving the vectors for the jet, flame
buoyancy and wind.
The flame length is calculated from an empirical equation (16)
relating the flame length to the heat release. The heat release is the
total heat produced by the combustion of the fluid.
Q = W LHV
(16)
The flame length is calculated from Equation (17). The constants l1

and l2 are a function of the type of tip
Q I2
L = I 1 ---N
(17)
Tip Type
l1
l2
Pipe flare
0.00331
0.4776
Single Burner Sonic
0.00241
0.4600
0.00129
0.5000
Steam and air assisted flares will generally have shorter flames than
those calculated by these equations. The program contains
proprietary algorithms for prediction of the shortening of the flame
17-14
Calculation Methods
17-15
as a function of the rate of injection of the assist fluid. Due to the

proprietary nature of these algorithms, they are not presented here.
In windy conditions the flame will be distorted from the straight
vertical. This distortion may be calculated by the resolution of the
velocity vectors for the exit jet, wind and flame buoyancy.
The jet velocity as a function of the curvilinear distance along the
flame is modelled according to the formula proposed by
McMurray[4].
1 1
u l = 5.0u j d --- --l A
(18)
Equations (19), (20) and (21) are resolved according to the Cartesian
coordinate system shown by Figure 17-2.
dx
------ = u l sin cos + u cos
dt
(19)
dy
------ = u l sin cos + u sin
dt
(20)
dz
----- = u l cos + u b
dt
(21)
17-15
17-16
Thermal Radiation
Figure 17-2, Coordinate System
Brzustowski
If the Brzustowski method [3] is selected then the flame length and
deflection are calculated from a method based upon the distance
required for the dilution of the flared gas to the lean flammability
limit concentration.
Dimensionless parameters are defined which relate the lean
flammability limit concentration and the following parameters to the
deflection of the end point of the flame:
Tip exit velocity
Wind velocity
Gas molecular weight
Air molecular weight
Tip diameter
17-16
Calculation Methods
17-17
The following dimensionless parameters are defined:
Mj
uj
c l = c l ------ -------u
M
(22)
xl
x l = -------------------------dj uj
--------- ------ju
(23)
zl
z l = -------------------------dj uj
--------- ------ju
(24)
Figure 17-3 gives the values for the horizontal and vertical distance
factors for a range of values for the dimensionless concentration
parameter.
17-17
17-18
Thermal Radiation
Figure 17-3, Dimensionless Distance Parameters
This procedure cannot strictly be used for calculation of the flame

deflection in cases where there is no wind. The limiting case is a
ratio of gas exit velocity to wind velocity of 110. This value
corresponds to a sonic discharge of methane at 400 F into a 10 mph
wind. When analysing any calculation results this ratio should be
checked if you are evaluating the effect of low wind speeds.
Chamberlain (Thornton)
The Chamberlain method models the flame as an inverted conical
frustum as shown in Figure 17-4 below. See reference [15] for the
methods used to calculate the characterising dimensions.
17-18
Calculation Methods
17-19
Figure 17-4, Chamberlain Flame Model
W2
RL
L
W1
Flare Stack
17-19
17-20
Surface Temperature
17.2 Surface Temperature

The equilibrium surface temperature of metal surfaces exposed to
the thermal radiation is calculated from a heat balance between the
thermal radiation from the flame incident at the specified point and
the heat losses from the same point.
K = ( h c + h r ) ( T m T )
(25)
This heat balance equation assumes that heat losses by convection

and radiation occur only from the surface exposed to the radiation.
The overall heat loss from the point is the sum of the radiation from
the point and the forced/free convection from the point. The
radiative heat transfer coefficient is given by:
4
( Tm T )
h r = E -----------------------------( Tm T )
(26)
Convective heat transfer coefficients are calculated from a series of

empirical correlations that are a function of air velocity.
0 u 15
h c = 0.80 + 0.22u
(27)
u > 15
h c = 0.56u
0.75
(28)
A value of 0.70 is used for both the absorbtivity and emissivity of

the surface. This is a typical value for steels.
17-20
Calculation Methods
17-21
17.3 Noise
The noise generated by a flare may be broken down into 2 basic
components:
Combustion noise
Jet noise
Although the noise may be expressed in terms of an average value,
it is frequency dependant. The shape of this noise spectrum is
dependant upon whether the major contribution is due to
combustion noise as in the case of pipe flares, or jet noise as in the
case of sonic flares. The noise spectrum is generally given in 7
octave bands from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz.
Attenuation of the noise occurs due to atmospheric absorption. This
absorption is a function of the frequency of the noise with higher
frequencies being more readily absorbed.
Noise is expressed either in terms of the Sound Power Level (PWL)
or the Sound Pressure Level (SPL) where these terms are defined by
Equations 23 and 24.
W
PWL = 10 log -------
W
0
(29)
P2
SPL = 10 log ---------
P 2
0
(30)
The international standard reference conditions are 10-12 Watts

(W0) and 2 x 10-6 N/m2 (P0).
In the case of a flare stack where the acoustic source may be
considered to be in a free field with directivity factor of unity then
17-21
17-22
Noise
the Sound Pressure Level is related to the Sound Power Level by

Equation 25.
SPL = PWL 20 log D 0.49 SPL A
(31)
Noise data predicted by the program refer to the Sound Pressure

Level in all cases.
17.3.1 Combustion Noise

Combustion noise is a function of the heat release from the flame
and the design of the flare tip. The calculation of the noise spectrum
due to combustion is based upon a typical characteristic curve for the
type of tip under consideration (pipe, sonic etc). An example of the
shape is given by Figure 17-5 which gives the noise levels at a
distance of 20 ft from a combustion source of power 81 MM btu/hr.
The noise level at each frequency is then corrected for the actual
combustion duty and distance from Equation 26.
Q
SPL = SPL 20 + 10 log --------------------- +
6
81 10
20
20log ------ SPL A
D
17-22
(32)
Calculation Methods
17-23
Figure 17-5, Typical Noise Combustion Spectrum
17.3.2 Jet Noise

The expansion of an unchoked gas stream will produce noise whose
sound power at the peak frequency is determined from the kinetic
energy and acoustic efficiency of the expanded jet according to
Equation 27 [6].
2
j uj
PWL = V -----------2
(33)
The acoustic efficiency of the expanded jet is related to the jet

velocity and whether or not the flow is choked.
17-23
17-24
Noise
If the flow is not choked, then the acoustic efficiency may be

obtained from Figure 17-6. In this figure the dimensionless factor B
is given by the equation:
j Tj 2
B = ------- -------
T
(34)
Figure 17-6, Acoustic Efficiency For Normal Flow
If the flow is choked, then the acoustic efficiency may be obtained

from Figure 17-7.
17-24
Calculation Methods
17-25
Figure 17-7, Acoustic Efficiency For Choked Flow
The expansion of a gas stream will produce noise which has a

spectrum which peaks with a frequency calculated by a method due
to MacKinnon [6].
0.2mu s
f max = ----------------dj
(35)
At frequencies other than the peak frequency the noise is calculated

using Equation 30.
17-25
17-26
Noise
SPL i = SPL tot 10
f i 2
f max 4
log 1 + -------------- 1 + ----------- 5.3
2f max
2f i
(36)
17.3.3 Atmospheric Attenuation

At distances greater than approximately 100 ft, the noise becomes
attenuated due to absorption by the atmosphere. The attenuation is a
function of the frequency of the noise, with higher frequencies being
more readily attenuated than lower ones.
Figure 17-8 gives the attenuation of noise for a range of frequencies.
This figure is strictly applicable only to still air at a temperature of
70 F and a relative humidity greater than 60%. Extension to
temperatures in the range 40 F to 100 F may be made by
increasing the attenuation by 10% for each 10 F below 70 F.
17-26
Calculation Methods
17-27
Figure 17-8, Atmospheric Attenuation Of Noise
17-27
17-28
Purge Gas
17.4 Purge Gas

This section details the different methods used to calculate purge gas
rates.
17.4.1 HUSA Method

The full HUSA method is based on the following equation 31[8].
Q p = 0.07068d
3.46 1
20.9
--- ln --------- F
y O2 b
(37)
where
Qp
d
O2
y
Fb
Purge rate (ft3/h)

Stack diameter (in)
% oxygen
Depth into stack (ft)
Gas buoyancy factor
The gas buoyancy factor F b is calculated using either equation 32

or 33.
Where composition of purge gas is known, equation 32 is used[8].
Fb =
Ci
0.65
exp [ 0.065 ( 29 M i ) ]
i
where
Ci
Volume fraction of ith component
Mi
Molecular weight of ith component
17-28
(38)
Calculation Methods
17-29
Where only the molecular weight of the purge gas is known,

equation 33 is used[9].
F b = 6.25 [ 1 0.75 ( M 28.96 )
1.5
(39)
where
M
Molecular weight of purge gas.
If the purge gas buoyancy factor calculated using either method is
less than the buoyancy factor of nitrogen then the buoyancy factor
for nitrogen is used.
17.4.2 Reduced HUSA Method

The reduced HUSA method is based on the following equation
34.[8]
Q p = 0.003528d
3.46
Ci
0.65
Ki
(40)
i
where
Qp
d
Ci
Ki
Purge rate (ft3/h)

Stack diameter (in)
Volume fraction of ith component
Constant for ith component from following table
17-29
17-30
Purge Gas
Component
Hydrogen
5.783
Helium
5.078
Methane
2.328
Nitrogen
1.067 (no wind)

1.707 (wind)
Ethane
-1.067
Propane
-2.651
Carbon Dioxide
-2.651
Butane and heavier
-6.586
0.65
If the sum of the C i K i terms is less than the K value for nitrogen
then the value for nitrogen is used.
17-30
Calculation Methods
17-31
17.5 Water Sprays

The modelling of water sprays used for shields is based on the
method presented by Long and Rogers [10].
The transmissivity of the water curtain is given by the ratio
E
= -----Eb
(41)
where
E
Eb
Transmissivity
Total transmitted flux
Total black body radiated flux
The total transmitted flux is calculated by integration over the range

of radiation wavelengths emitted by the flame.
max
E =
min )
E b exp ( s )
(42)
where
E b
Black body radiation at wavelength , W/m2

Radiation wavelength, m
Absorption coefficient at wavelength m-1
Thickness of water curtain layer m
The black body radiation at wavelength is given by the Planck

equation.
2 5
E b = ( 2Hc
) ( exp ( ( Hc ) ( KT ) 1 ) )
(43)
17-31
17-32
Water Sprays
where
H
c
K
T
Planck constant J/s

Speed of light m/s2
Wavelength of radiation m
Boltzman constant J/K
Temperature K
The absorption coefficient for water is calculated by interpolation

from graphical data presented in the paper [10].
17.5.1 Thickness of Water Curtain

The effective thickness of a water curtain is calculated for a given
water flow and nozzle characteristics using an equation presented by
Long, [11].
6u noz
s = ( ( 0.5D noz ) ) ------------u drop
where
s
Layer thickness m
D noz Nozzle diameter m
u noz Nozzle exit velocity m/s
u drop Droplet velocity m/s
17-32
(44)
Calculation Methods
17-33
17.6 Gas Dispersion

Flaresim includes two separate gas dispersion models. The first is a
jet dispersion model intended to calculate flammable gas
concentrations close to the flare tip in the event of a flame out
condition. The second is a Gaussian dispersion model intended to
model the dispersion over longer distances of combustion gases or
flared gas components in the event a flame out.
17.6.1 Jet Dispersion

The jet dispersion model provided by Flaresim is that proposed by
Cleaver and Edwards [16]. This is an integral model for predicting
dispersion of a turbulent jet into a cross flow in the absence of any
obstructions. The implementation in Flaresim generalises this model
into the 3 dimensional coordinate system used by Flaresim.
The model is limited to wind speeds of less than 20 m/s. The model
cannot be used for horizontal tips projecting directly into the wind.
17.6.2 Gaussian Dispersion

The Gaussian Dispersion calculations are based on the widely used
generalised gaussian dispersion equation for a continuous pointsource plume.
2
2
y ( 2 y )
Q
C = ---------------------- e
u z y 2
2
( zf He )
2
2 z
+e
( zf + He )
2
2 z
(45)
17-33
17-34
Gas Dispersion
where
C = Emissions concentration g/m3 at receptor located at
x m downwind
y m crosswind from centre line
z m above ground
Q = Source emission rate, g/s
u = Horizontal wind velocity m/s
He = plume centre line above ground, m
z = vertical standard deviation of emissions distribution m
y = horizontal standard deviation of emissions distribution m
This equation is valid subject to the following constraints
Vertical and crosswind diffusion follow Gaussian distribution
Downwind diffusion is negligible
Emissions rate is constant and continuous
All emissions are conserved in plume
No barriers to diffusion other than ground
Emissions are reflected from ground as if generated from imaginary plume beneath the ground and are additive to primary
plume.
Turbulence within x, y, z dimensions of plume is homogenous.
The dispersion coefficients used by Flaresim z and y in
equation (45) in rural terrain are calculated using McMullens
equation fit to the Pasquill dispersion coefficients published by
Turner[17], page 53. In urban terrain the equation developed by
Gifford to fit the dispersion coefficients published by Briggs are
used [17], page 56. In both cases the data to which equations apply
is for distances greater than 100 m downwind of the source.
The Gaussian Dispersion equation (45) requires the effective height
of the plume He. This is calculated using the Briggs equations for a
bent-over buoyant plume in their 1972 version [17], pages 72, 73.
The Briggs buoyancy parameter required by these equations is
calculated using the fully generalised method given in [17], page
184. The effective release height for dispersion of combustion gases
17-34
Calculation Methods
17-35
is taken to be the end of the flame calculated using Flaresims

standard methods.
Where multiple tips are in operation the final emission
concentrations are calculated by simple addition of the contributions
from the individual tips.
17.6.3 Emission Rates

The default NOx, CO and unburnt hydrocarbon emission rates
calculated by Flaresim are based on the heat released and are taken
from the John Zink Combustion Handbook [18].
The Sintef method for NOx emission prediction is based on the
following equation, given in reference [19].
u0
35
EI NOx ------------ = 3.5 Fr
d 0.55
0
(46)
where
EINOx = NOx emissions rate in gNOx / kg fuel
2
Fr = Froude number = u 0 g d 0
u 0 = Nozzle outlet velocity m/s at ambient conditions (298K, 1.013
bar)
d 0 = Nozzle outlet diameter, m
17-35
17-36
Nomenclature
17.7 Nomenclature
The following nomenclature is used in this chapter unless otherwise
specified in the body of the text.
17.7.1 Symbols
A
a
B
c
D
d
E
F
Fs
f
H
h
L
LHV
l
l1
l2
M
m
N
K
k
P
API flame length (ft)

Empirical constant used in IMS method
Dimensionless scaling parameter
Flammability lean limit concentration
Distance from flame midpoint to receptor (ft)
Tip diameter (ft)
Metal surface emissivity
Fraction of heat radiated
Fraction of heat radiated from surface of flame
Frequency (Hz)
Relative humidity (%)
Heat transfer coefficient (btu/hr/ft2/(R)
Flame length (ft)
Lower heating value (btu/lb)
Curvilinear flame length (ft)
Constant in flame length equation
Constant in flame length equation
Molecular weight
Mach number
Number of burners in tip assembly
Thermal radiation at receptor (btu/hr/ft2)
Heat capacity ratio
Pressure (psi a)
PWL Sound Power Level (W)
Heat release based upon LHV (btu/hr)
Q
Universal gas constant
R
SPL Sound Pressure Level (dB)
Temperature ((R)
T
Velocity (ft/s)
u
Volumetric flow (ft3/s)
V
17-36
Calculation Methods
W
x
x'
y
Z
z'
z
17-37
Flow rate (lb/hr)

Distance north of tip (ft)
Horizontal plume distance factor
Distance east of tip (ft)
Compressibility factor (-)
Vertical plume distance factor
Distance above tip (ft)
Metal surface absorbtivity
Angle between flame tangent and line of sight to receptor
(degrees)
Efficiency
Rotation of flare from x axis (degrees)
Angle of tip from vertical (degrees)
Rotation of wind from x axis (degrees)
Fluid density (lb/ft3)
Stephan Boltzman constant (0.171 x 10-8 btu/hr/ft2/(R4)
Transmissivity
17.7.2 Subscripts
A
b
c
f
i
ids
ims
ips
j
l
m
r
s
w
0
20
Atmospheric attenuation
Buoyancy
Convective
Correction
Frequency band
Integrated diffuse source
Integrated mixed source
Integrated point source
Jet exit
Curvilinear length
Metal
Radiative
Sonic
Corrected for windchill
Wind/atmospheric
Corrected for transmissivity
Reference condition
At 20 ft from source
17-37
17-38
References
17.8 References
17-38
1.
API RP521, Guide For Pressure-Relieving and

Depressuring Systems, 4th ed, American Petroleum
Institute, Washington DC, 1997.
2.
Hajek, J.D. and Ludwig, E.E., How To Design Safe Flare

Stacks, Part 1, Petro/Chem Engineer, 1960, Vol 32, No. 6,
pp.C31-C38; Part2, Petro/Chem Engineer, 1960, Vol 32,
No. 7, pp.C44-C51.
3.
Bruztowski, T.A. and Sommer, E.C. Jr., Predicting Radiant

Heating From Flares, Proceedings - Division of Refining,
Vol. 53, pp. 865-893, American Petroleum Institute,
Washington DC, 1973.
4.
McMurray, R., Flare Radiation Estimated, Hydrocarbon

Processing, Nov. 1982, pp. 175-181.
5.
Narasimhan, N.D., Predict Flare Noise, Hydrocarbon

Processing, April 1986, pp. 133-136.
6.
MacKinnon, J.G., Recent Advances in Standardizing Valve

Noise Prediction, Society of Instrument & Control
Engineers, Tokyo, Sept. 1984.
7.
Husa, H.W., How to Compute Safe Purge Rates,

Hydrocarbon Processing, 1964, 43, No. 5.
8.
Husa, H.W., Purging Requirements of Large Diameter

Stacks, American Petroleum Institute, Fall Meeting 1977.
9.
Shore, D, Making the Flare Safe, Journal of Loss

Prevention Process Industry, 1996, Vol 9, No 6, 363-381
10.
Long, C.A and Rogers M.C, Temperature Prediction for

Surfaces Exposed to Flare Radiation and Attenuation of
Radiative Fluxes by Water Curtain, 5th International
Conference - Offshore Structures - Hazard & Integrity
Management 4-5th December 1996.
Calculation Methods
17-39
11.
Long C.A. Attenuation of Thermal Radiative Heat Fluxes

by Water Curtain, 1995, School of Engineering, University
of Sussex, Report No 95/TFMRC/181.
12.
Wayne F.D. An Economical Formula for Calculating

Atmospheric Infrared Transmissivities, Journal of Loss
Prevention Process Industry, 1991, Vol 4, January, 86-92
13.
Guidard, S.E., W.B. Kindzierski and N. Harper, 2000. Heat

Radiation from Flares. Report prepared for Science and
Technology Branch, Alberta Environment, ISBN 0-77851188-X, Edmonton, Alberta
14.
Cook J., Bahrami Z, Whitehouse R.J. A Comprehensive

Program for Calculation of Flame Radiation Levels,
Journal of Loss Prevention Process Industry, 1990, Vol 3,
January, 150-155
15.
Chamberlain G.A. Developments in Design Methods for

Predicting Thermal Radiation from Flares, Chem Eng Res
Des, Vol 65, July 1987, 299-309
16.
Cleaver R.P, Edwards P.D., "Comparison of an integral

model for predicting the dispersion of a turbulent jet in a
cross flow with experimental data", Journal of Loss
Prevention Process Industry, 1990, Vol3, January 91-96
17.
Beychok M.R. Fundamentals of Stack Gas Dispersion,

2005 Edn. ISBN 0-9644588-0-2, Milton R. Beychok, 1102
Colony Plaza, Newport Beach, CA 92660.
18.
Baukal jr. C.E. (Editor), John Zink Combustion

Handbook, 2001 Edn, ISBN 0-8493-2337-1, John Zink
Company LLC, Tulsa, Oklahoma.
19.
Bakken J., Langrgen , Improving Accuracy in

Calculating NOx Emissions from Gas Flaring, Society of
Petroleum Engineers International Conference on Health,
Safety and Environment in Oil and Gas Exploration and
Production, Nice, April 2009, SPE 111561.
17-39
17-40
17-40
References
Graphic Report Layout
A-1
A Graphic Report Layout

Page
A.1
Introduction to XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
A.1.1
A.1.2
A.1.3
A.2
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Layout File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
A.2.1
A.2.2
A.2.3
A.2.4
A.2.5
A.2.6
A.2.7
A.2.8
A.2.9
A.2.10
A.2.11
Allowed Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PageSize Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Text Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Unit Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Logo Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CaseData Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Line Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PlotArea Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
LegendArea Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ContourSet Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-3
The appearance of graphic reports produced by Flaresim is

controlled by layout files. These files contain a list of instructions in
a XML format that describe how data items, graphic items,
background text, background lines and background graphics will
appear on the report. This appendix describes the format of the
layout files.
A-3
A-4
Introduction to XML
A.1 Introduction to XML

XML is a standardised markup language for describing structured
data. The following description of the language is intended to
introduce the terms used in this appendix. For a full description of
the XML standard see http://www.w3.org/xml.
The figure below shows a fragment of the XML language taken from
one of the Flaresim layout files.
Figure A-1, XML File Fragment
The basic building block of a XML file is the element. An element

is a data fragment that has a tag, attributes and data.
A.1.1 Tags
An elements tag can be thought of as its name. A tag enclosed in a
pair of < > brackets starts the description of an element and the
same tag preceded by a / character and enclosed in a pair of < >
brackets ends the description of the element. For example, an
element containing text data might be given the tag Description and
would appear as follows
<Description>The descriptive text</Description>.
A XML file can contain more than one element with the same tag
describing repeating data items. Tags are case sensitive, i.e.
<description> is different to <Description>.
Taking the XML fragment shown in Figure A-1 as an example, there
are six elements in total with four unique tags namely <Text>,
<Logo>, <CaseData> and <Var>. There are three <Text> elements.
A-4
A-5
A.1.2 Attributes
The attributes of an element can be thought of as data parameters
or additional descriptions of the element. Attributes are defined
within the < > brackets of the elements opening tag. A single
attribute is introduced by a name followed by an = sign followed
by the value of the attribute enclosed in quotes. For example our
Description tag might be extended to have an attribute called Font to
define the typeface to be used to print it thus.
<Description Font=Arial>The descriptive text</Description>
An element may have no attributes or multiple attributes. Attribute
names are case sensitive i.e. Font is different to font.
Taking the XML fragment shown in Figure A-1 as a further
example, the <Text> elements there each have four attributes name
X, Y, Font and Size.
A.1.3 Data
The data part of an element is contained between the opening tag
and the closing tag. The data can be either text or another element.
In our <Description> element example the data is the text The
descriptive text.
The data part of an element does not have to contain data, it can be
empty if for example all of the data contained in an element is
described through attributes. When the data part of an element is
empty the closing / character can be included in the opening tag
and the closing tag omitted thus.
<Description Font=Arial/>
Looking at our example XML fragment shown in Figure A-1 again,
we can see that the data sections of the <Text> elements contain
descriptive text, the data section of the <Logo> element contains a
file name and the data section of the <CaseData> element contains
another element introduced by the <Var> tag.
A-5
A-6
Layout File Structure
A.2 Layout File Structure

A Flaresim graphic report layout file must contain the following top
level data elements in order to be recognised as a valid graphic
report layout file
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1" ?>
This defines the version of the XML standard used to encode the file
and the unicode character set used. This is a standard element that
must appear as the first element in the file.
<FlaresimLayout>
This element is the top level data element that contains all other
elements that define the layout of the graphic report.
A.2.1 Allowed Elements

The following element tags are recognised within the main
<FlaresimLayout> element within the layout file. Each of these
elements is described in more detail below.
Element Tag
A-6
Description
Number
PageSize
Defines the overall dimensions
Single
Text
Defines background text
Multiple
Unit
Defines units of measurement
Multiple
Data
Defines data items
Multiple
Logo
Defines background graphics items
Multiple
CaseData
Defines case description items
Multiple
Line
Defines background lines
Multiple
PlotArea
Defines plot area and style
Single
LegendArea
Defines plot legend area and style
Single
ContourSet
Defines contour list and styles
Single
A-7
A.2.2 PageSize Element

Description
Defines the overall size of the plot to be produced.
Attributes
X
Y
Size of plot in X dimension in mm.

Size of plot in Y dimension in mm.
Data Value
None.
A.2.3 Text Element

Description
Defines individual items of background text to appear on the plot
such as titles and headings.
Attributes
X
Y
Font
Size
Style
Required - X position in mm of the left edge of the

text
Required - Y position in mm of the centre line of the
text
Required - Integer denoting font to be used 0 = Arial
1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining text height as % of plot
page height
Optional - Text describing style of text Bold
Italic
BoldItalic
Data Value
The background text to be added to the plot.
A-7
A-8
A.2.4 Unit Element

Description
Defines individual items of unit of measurement text to appear on
the plot.
Attributes
X
Y
Font
Size
Style

unit text
unit text
1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining unit text height as % of
plot page height
Optional - Text describing style of unit text Bold
Italic
BoldItalic
Data Value
The name of the unit of measurement type to be output e.g. length,
temperature. The full list of recognised type names is the same as the
list of quantity names defined in the units.xml file as followstime, length, mass, temperature, sound, frequency,
surface_area, volume, force, small_length, energy, pressure,
velocity, plane_angle, fraction, percentage, power,
mass_flow, mass_heat_capacity, mass_energy,
heat_flux_density, heat_transfer_coefficient,
mass_per_area, mass_density, volume_flow.
A.2.5 Data
Description
Defines individual data items that will appear on the plot.
A-8
Attributes
X
Y
Font
Size
Style
A-9

data value
value
1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining data value height as % of
plot page height
Optional - Text describing style of data value Bold
Italic
BoldItalic
Data Value
A <Var> data element defining the data item to be output as follows.
A.2.5.1 Var Element

Description
Identifies individual data item.
Attributes
Stack
Tip
Optional - index of stack which variable is associated

with.
Optional - index of tip which variable is associated
with. Note this is the index of the tip on the specified
stack i.e. a Tip index value of 1 denotes the first tip
on the specified stack regardless of whether the tip is
the first listed in the model.
A-9
A-10
Data Value
A text string identifying the data item to be output. The list of data
identifiers recognised is as follows.
Identifier
A-10
Stack Id
Tip Id
WindSpeed
Not specified
Not specified
WindDirection
Not specified
Not specified
SolarRadiation
Not specified
Not specified
Transmissivity
Not specified
Not specified
Humidity
Not specified
Not specified
BackgroundNoise
Not specified
Not specified
TransmissivityMin
Not specified
Not specified
TransmissivityMax
Not specified
Not specified
AtmTemperature
Not specified
Not specified
AtmPressure
Not specified
Not specified
CalculationMethod
Not specified
Not specified
NumberOfElements
Not specified
Not specified
BuoyancyPipe
Not specified
Not specified
BuoyancySonic
Not specified
Not specified
BuoyancyWellTest
Not specified
Not specified
OptSolarRadiation
Not specified
Not specified
OptWindchill
Not specified
Not specified
OptBackgroundNoise
Not specified
Not specified
OptAtmNoiseAttenuation
Not specified
Not specified
OptAdiabaticTempCorr
Not specified
Not specified
OptRKZFactor
Not specified
Not specified
NoiseCalcMethod
Not specified
Not specified
Identifier
Stack Id
A-11
Tip Id
Name
Required
Not specified
Length
Required
Not specified
AngleToHorizontal
Required
Not specified
AngleToNorth
Required
Not specified
Name
Required
Required
Type
Required
Required
NbrOfBurners
Required
Required
Length
Required
Required
Diameter
Required
Required
BurnerOpening
Required
Required
ContractionCoefficient
Required
Required
ExitLossCoefficient
Required
Required
Roughness
Required
Required
OutletPressureSpec
Required
Required
SealType
Required
Required
AngleToHorizontal
Required
Required
AngleToNorth
Required
Required
Fluid
Required
Required
MassFlow
Required
Required
LHV
Required
Required
MW
Required
Required
CpCv
Required
Required
EmissivityMethod
Required
Required
Emissivity
Required
Required
Temperature
Required
Required
A-11
A-12
Identifier
A-12
Stack Id
Tip Id
RiserDiameter
Required
Required
NoiseMethod
Required
Required
NoiseSPL
Required
Required
PeakFrequency
Required
Required
CombustionEfficiency
Required
Required
ExitVelocity
Required
Required
MachNumber
Required
Required
VolumeFlow
Required
Required
HeatRelease
Required
Required
FlameLength
Required
Required
APIFlameLength
Required
Required
WindSpeedAtTip
Required
Required
TipExitPressure
Required
Required
TipInletPressure
Required
Required
TipDP
Required
Required
SealInletPressure
Required
Required
SealDP
Required
Required
StackInletPressure
Required
Required
StackDP
Required
Required
TotalTipExitPressure
Required
Required
TotalTipInletPressure
Required
Required
TotapTipDP
Required
Required
TotalSealInletPressure
Required
Required
TotalSealDP
Required
Required
TotalStackInletPressure
Required
Required
Identifier
Stack Id
A-13
Tip Id
TotalStackDP
Required
Required
PurgeFluid
Required
Required
PurgeFixVolFlow
Required
Required
PurgeHUSAO2
Required
Required
PurgeHUSAHeight
Required
Required
PurgeFixedVel
Required
Required
PurgeFixVelCalcFlow
Required
Required
PurgeFixVolFlowCalcVel
Required
Required
PurgeFixVolFlowCalcFlow
Required
Required
PurgeHUSACalcVel
Required
Required
PurgeHUSACalcFlow
Required
Required
PurgeRedHUSACalcVel
Required
Required
PurgeRedHUSACalcFlow
Required
Required
Fluid2
Required
Required
MassFlow2
Required
Required
LHV2
Required
Required
MW2
Required
Required
CpCv2
Required
Required
Temperature2
Required
Required
AssistFluid
Required
Required
AssistFluidMassFlow
Required
Required
AssistFluidFlowRatio
Required
Required
A-13
A-14
A.2.6 Logo Element

Description
Defines individual graphic files to be output on the plot. This is
usually used to include company logos etc in the plot.
Attributes
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
Required - X position in mm of the top left corner of

the graphic item.
Required - Y position in mm of the top left corner of
the graphic item.
Required - X position in mm of the bottom right
corner of the graphic item.
Required - Y position in mm of the bottom right
corner of the graphic item.
Data Value
A text string naming the graphic file to be included.
A.2.7 CaseData Element

Description
Defines items of case description data that will appear on the plot.
Attributes
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
Font
Size
A-14

the area for output of the data item.
the area for output of the data item.
corner of the area for output of the data item.
corner of the area for output of the data item.
1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining data item text height as %
of plot height
Style
A-15
Optional - Text describing style of data value Bold

Italic
BoldItalic
Data Value
A text string defining the data item to be output. Recognised values
are.
Title
DataFile
Description
LastModified
Author
Revision
CheckedBy
FSWVersion
ActiveCaseName
ActiveCaseTag
ActiveCaseDesc
ActiveCaseTime
A.2.8 Line Element

Description
Defines background lines to be drawn on the plot. Typically these
are used to frame areas of the report.
Attributes
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
LineWidth
Required - X position in mm of the first end of the

line.
Required - Y position in mm of the first end of the
line.
Required - X position in mm of the second end of the
line.
Required - Y position in mm of the second end of the
line.
Required - Line width in pixels.
A-15
A-16
Data Value
None
A.2.9 PlotArea Element

Description
Defines the area used to output the isopleth graph on the plot and sets
the options used when drawing it.
Attributes
X1
Y1
X2
Y2

the graph area.
the graph area.
corner of the graph area.
corner of the graph area.
Data Value
Elements defining the options used to draw the isopleth graph as
follows. Note one instance of each of these elements is required in
the <PlotArea> data. None of these elements has any data value, all
the required information is contained as attributes.
A.2.9.2 Grid Element

Description
Describes how the background grid for the isopleth graph is to be
drawn.
Attributes
Display
Lines
A-16
Required - defines whether grid is drawn. Allowed

values are Yes or No.
Required - defines number of grid lines within graph
on each axid. Integer
BackColour
A-17
Required - defines colour of graph background.

Value can be Transparent or one of the colours from
Table A.1 below.
Table A.1, Allowed Colours

Yellow
Red
Green
Cyan
Orange
Lemon
PaleGreen
BlueGreen
PaleBlue
LightGrey
MidGrey
DarkGrey
White
Black
Other colours may be defined
using a hex code to define the
RGB contributions as follows
0xRRGGBB where RR is red
value, GG is green value and BB
blue value in hex.
For example 0xFF0000 is pure
red.
A.2.9.3 Title Element

Description
Defines how the isopleth graph title will be output. The title is the
name of the receptor grid that the isopleth applies to.
Attributes
Display
Space
Required - defines whether title is included. Allowed

values are Yes or No.
Required - Vertical spacing allowed for title as a
percentage of the Y range of the graph.
A-17
A-18
Font
Size
Style

1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining title text height as % of
graph height.
Optional - Text describing style of title text Bold
Italic
BoldItalic
A.2.9.4 Desc Element

Description
Defines how the graph description will be output. The description
identifies whether the graph is a radiation, noise or temperature
isopleth and the current units of measurement.
Attributes
Display
Space
Font
Size
Style
Required - defines whether description is included.

Allowed values are Yes or No.
Required - Vertical spacing allowed for description
as a percentage of the Y range of the graph.
1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining description text height as
% of graph height.
Optional - Text describing style of description text Bold
Italic
BoldItalic
A.2.9.5 XAxis Element

Description
Defines how the isopleth X axis label will be output.
A-18
Attributes
Display
Space
Font
Size
Style
A-19
Required - defines whether X axis label is included.

Required - Vertical spacing allowed for X axis label
as a percentage of the Y range of the graph.
1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining title X axis label height as
% of graph height.
Optional - Text describing style of X axis label text Bold
Italic
BoldItalic
A.2.9.6 YAxis Element

Description
Defines how the isopleth Y axis label will be output.
Attributes
Display
Space
Font
Size
Style
Required - defines whether Y axis label is included.

Required - Horizontal spacing allowed for Y axis
label as a percentage of the X range of the graph.
1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining Y axis label height as % of
graph height.
Optional - Text describing style of Y axis label text Bold
Italic
BoldItalic
A-19
A-20
A.2.9.7 Scale Element

Description
Defines how the scale labels will be output.
Attributes
Font
Size

1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining scale label height as % of
graph height.
A.2.9.8 Flare Element

Description
Defines how the stack, tip and flare will be drawn on the isopleth
graph.
Attributes
Display
Required - defines whether the flare will be drawn.

FlameThick Required - defines thickness of line used to draw
flame in pixels.
FlameColour Required - defines colour of line used to draw flame.
Allowed values are given in Table A.1.
StackThick Required - defines thickness of line used to draw
stack in pixels.
StackColour Required - defines colour of line used to draw stack.
TipThick
Required - defines thickness of line used to draw tip
in pixels.
TipColour
Required - defines colour of line used to draw tip.
A-20
A-21
A.2.10 LegendArea Element

Description
Defines the area used to output the legend for the isopleth graph on
the plot and sets the options used when drawing it.
Attributes
X1
Y1
X2
Y2

the legend data area.
the legend data area.
corner of the legend data area.
corner of the legend data area.
Data Value
Elements defining the options used to draw the legend data on the
isopleth graph as follows. Note one instance of each of these
elements is required in the <LegendArea> data. None of these
elements has any data value, all the required information is
contained as attributes.
A.2.10.9 Layout Element

Description
This defines the number of columns used to output the legend and
the characteristics of the text part of the legend.
Attributes
NumCols
Font
Size
Required - Integer defining number of colums to be

used for drawing the legend.
Required - Integer denoting font to be used for
legend label 0 = Arial
1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining legend label height as %
of legend data area height.
A-21
A-22
A.2.10.10 Desc Element

Description
Defines how the legend description will be output. The description
identifies whether the graph is a radiation, noise or temperature
isopleth as well as the units used.
Attributes
Display
Font
Size
Style
Required - defines whether description is included.

1 = Courier
2 = Times Roman
Required - Value defining description text height as
% of legend data area height.
Optional - Text describing style of description text Bold
Italic
BoldItalic
A.2.11 ContourSet Element

Description
Defines the details of the contours to be output on the isopleth graph.
Attributes
UseLayout
Required - Specifies whether the contour data from

the layout file is to be used. Allowed values Yes or
No. If set to Yes the contour data will be taken from
the layout file. If not, the contour data will be taken
from the current isopleth definition for the receptor
grid.
Data Value
Multiple elements defining the individual contour lines to be output.
Up to 10 instances of <RadiationContour>, <NoiseContour> and
<TemperatureContour> can be specified.
A-22
A-23
A.2.11.11 RadiationContour Element

Description
Defines the details of a single radiation contour to be output on the
isopleth graph.
Attributes
IsoValue
Colour
LineWidth
Style
Required - Specifies the radiation value of the

isopleth contour in internal program units of W/m2.
Required - Specifies the colour used to draw the
contour. Allowed values are given in Table A.1.
Required - Integer specifying the width of the line
used to draw the contour in pixels.
Required - Specifies the style of the line used to draw
the contour. Allow values are.
Solid
Dashed
Dotted
DashDot
DashDotDot
A.2.11.12 NoiseContour Element

Description
Defines the details of a single noise contour to be output on the
isopleth graph.
Attributes
IsoValue
Colour
LineWidth
Style
Required - Specifies the noise value of the isopleth

contour in internal program units of dB.
Solid
Dashed
Dotted
A-23
A-24
DashDot
DashDotDot
A.2.11.13 TemperatureContour Element

Description
Defines the details of a single temperature contour to be output on
the isopleth graph.
Attributes
IsoValue
Colour
LineWidth
Style
A-24
Required - Specifies the temperature value of the

isopleth contour in internal program units of K.
Solid
Dashed
Dotted
DashDot
DashDotDot

Flares Im

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Flares Im

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COPYRIGHT

2 Getting Started............................................. 2-1

Offshore Flare Stack Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

4 General Setup .............................................. 4-1

Case Navigator View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Setup Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

5 Fluids ............................................................ 5-1

Fluid View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Environment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

7 Stacks ........................................................... 7-1

Stack View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

8 Tips ............................................................... 8-1

Tip View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

9 Receptors ..................................................... 9-1

Receptor Point View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Shield View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

11 Dispersion .................................................. 11-1

Dispersion View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

12 Overlays And Isopleths............................. 12-1

Overlay View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

KO Drum View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

14 Case Studies .............................................. 14-1

Case Study View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

15 Calculations ............................................... 15-1

Calculation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

16 Printing ....................................................... 16-1

Report View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

17 Calculation Methods ................................. 17-1

Thermal Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4

A Graphic Report Layout............................... A-1

Introduction to XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Flaresim is a computer program designed to assist professional

Case study manager to allow multiple comparitive results to be

Option to define local environmental conditions at receptor

with all engineering computer software, Flaresim is a tool which

1.2 Program Overview

Case Navigator Icons

1.2.1 Flaresim Objects

1.2.2 Object Definition

Creation of an object automatically opens its view to allow its data

1.2.3 Entering Values

1.2.4 Running a Model

1.3 Documentation Overview

Offshore Flare Stack Design . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Onshore Flare Stack Design . . . . . . . . . . .24

Objective and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Offshore Case - Add Welltest Burner . . . .

Objective and Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Offshore Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Offshore Case Study - Discrete Variable . .51

Offshore Case - Flaresim Overlay . . . . . . .45

Initial Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

The purpose of this chapter is to provide an introduction to the use

Offshore Flare Stack Design

2.1 Offshore Flare Stack Design

2.1.2 Initial Setup

New File Icon

Start the Flaresim program through the Windows Start

We are going to build our first model through the Setup

Figure 2-1, Setup Wizard Opening View

In the Fluid tab of the Setup Wizard, enter the following

Offshore Flare Stack Design

LEL is used only by the

Note that some of these values (e.g Temperature or Cp/Cv)